WO2020032643A1 - Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor - Google Patents

Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020032643A1
WO2020032643A1 PCT/KR2019/010004 KR2019010004W WO2020032643A1 WO 2020032643 A1 WO2020032643 A1 WO 2020032643A1 KR 2019010004 W KR2019010004 W KR 2019010004W WO 2020032643 A1 WO2020032643 A1 WO 2020032643A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal
channel
base station
information
random access
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/KR2019/010004
Other languages
French (fr)
Korean (ko)
Inventor
박창환
안준기
김선욱
황승계
윤석현
Original Assignee
엘지전자 주식회사
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 엘지전자 주식회사 filed Critical 엘지전자 주식회사
Publication of WO2020032643A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020032643A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/08Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the receiving station
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/02Arrangements for increasing efficiency of notification or paging channel
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00Wireless channel access
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00Wireless channel access
    • H04W74/08Non-scheduled access, e.g. ALOHA
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W8/00Network data management
    • H04W8/22Processing or transfer of terminal data, e.g. status or physical capabilities
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W88/00Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
    • H04W88/02Terminal devices
    • H04W88/06Terminal devices adapted for operation in multiple networks or having at least two operational modes, e.g. multi-mode terminals

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving a signal or a channel according to a terminal type.
  • Mobile communication systems have been developed to provide voice services while ensuring user activity.
  • the mobile communication system has expanded not only voice but also data service.As a result of the explosive increase in traffic, shortage of resources and users demand faster services, a more advanced mobile communication system is required. .
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a method and an apparatus therefor for efficiently transmitting and receiving a signal according to a terminal type.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide a method and apparatus for efficiently mapping physical resources when a channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS) is set.
  • CSI-RS channel status information reference signal
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide an efficient CSI-RS configuration method and apparatus therefor for non-BL (Band reduced and Low cost) user equipment (UE) operating in a coverage extension or enhancement (CE) mode. .
  • UE user equipment
  • CE coverage extension or enhancement
  • a method for receiving a signal by a user equipment (UE) configured to operate in a first system in a radio resource control (RRC) connected mode Receiving from the configuration information for a particular channel of the second system from; Receiving the specific channel in the second system based on the configuration information in an RRC idle mode; And performing a random access procedure in the first system or the second system in response to the received specific channel.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • a user equipment configured to operate in a first system in an RRC connected mode, comprising: a radio frequency (RF) transceiver; And a processor operatively connected to the RF transceiver, wherein the processor controls the RF transceiver to receive configuration information for a specific channel of a second system from a base station, and in an RRC idle mode.
  • the second system may be configured to receive the specific channel based on the configuration information and perform a random access procedure in the first system or the second system in response to the received specific channel.
  • an apparatus for a user equipment configured to operate in a first system in an RRC connected mode
  • the apparatus comprising: a memory comprising executable code; And a processor coupled to the memory in operation, wherein the processor is configured to execute the executable code to perform specific operations, wherein the specific operations receive configuration information for a specific channel of a second system from a base station. And receiving the specific channel in the second system based on the configuration information in an RRC idle mode, and randomly in the first system or the second system in response to the received specific channel. Performing a connection procedure.
  • setting information for a specific channel of the second system may be received at the first system.
  • performing the random access procedure comprises: determining a system to operate after detection of the particular channel among the first system and the second system based on the information received through the particular channel;
  • the system may include performing the random access procedure.
  • information indicating a system to operate after detection of said particular channel may be received at said first system, and performing said random access procedure includes performing said random access procedure at said indicated system. can do.
  • performing the random access procedure includes determining a system to operate after detection of the particular channel, sending a request for the determined system to the base station, and accepting the request from the base station. May include receiving.
  • information necessary to operate in the determined system may be received from the base station.
  • the request may be sent via a random access preamble.
  • the request may be sent via uplink transmission for a random access response.
  • the specific channel may be a paging channel.
  • the second system may be a system configured to support repetitive transmission for coverage extension or coverage enhancement
  • the first system may be a system not configured to support repetitive transmission for coverage extension.
  • the second system is a system configured to operate in a narrowband
  • the first system may be a system configured to operate in a wideband
  • configuration information for a specific channel of the second system may be received upon RRC connection release in the first system.
  • CSI-RS channel status information reference signal
  • CSI-RS can be efficiently set for a non-BL (Band reduced and Low cost) user equipment (UE) operating in a coverage extension or enhancement (CE) mode.
  • UE user equipment
  • CE coverage extension or enhancement
  • FIG. 1 shows an example of a 3GPP LTE system structure.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a 3GPP NR system structure.
  • 3 illustrates physical channels and general signal transmission used in a 3GPP system.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a slot structure of an LTE frame.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates a structure of a downlink subframe of an LTE system.
  • FIG 8 illustrates a structure of an uplink subframe used in LTE.
  • FIG 9 illustrates a structure of a radio frame used in an NR system.
  • FIG. 10 illustrates a slot structure of an NR frame.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates the structure of a self-contained slot.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates a network initial access and subsequent communication process in an NR system.
  • 17 illustrates preamble transmission on an NB-IoT RACH.
  • 21 to 23 illustrate a flowchart of a method for transmitting and receiving a signal between a terminal and a base station according to the proposal of the present invention.
  • 24 to 29 illustrate a system and a communication device to which the methods proposed in the present invention can be applied.
  • downlink means communication from a base station to a terminal
  • uplink means communication from a terminal to a base station.
  • a transmitter may be part of a base station, and a receiver may be part of a terminal.
  • a transmitter may be part of a terminal, and a receiver may be part of a base station.
  • CDMA may be implemented with a radio technology such as Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA) or CDMA2000.
  • TDMA may be implemented with wireless technologies such as Global System for Mobile communications (GSM) / General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) / Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution (EDGE).
  • GSM Global System for Mobile communications
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • EDGE Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution
  • OFDMA may be implemented in a wireless technology such as IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, Evolved UTRA (E-UTRA), or the like.
  • UTRA is part of the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS).
  • 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) Long Term Evolution (LTE) is part of Evolved UMTS (E-UMTS) using E-UTRA and LTE-A (Advanced) / LTE-A pro is an evolution of 3GPP LTE.
  • 3GPP NR New Radio or New Radio Access Technology
  • 5G is an evolution of 3GPP LTE / LTE-A / LTE-A pro.
  • LTE refers to technology after 3GPP TS (Technical Specification) 36.xxx Release 8.
  • LTE-A the LTE technology after 3GPP TS 36.xxx Release 10
  • 3GPP TS 36.xxx Release 13 is referred to as LTE-A pro.
  • 3GPP 5G means technology after TS 36.xxx Release 15, and 3GPP NR means technology after TS 38.xxx Release 15.
  • LTE / NR may be referred to as a 3GPP system.
  • "xxx" means standard document detail number.
  • LTE / NR may be collectively referred to as 3GPP system.
  • Background, terminology, abbreviations, and the like used in the description of the present invention may refer to the matters described in the standard documents published prior to the present invention. For example, see the following document:
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • FIG. 1 shows an example of a 3GPP LTE system structure.
  • an E-UTRAN includes at least one base station (eg, BS) 20 that provides a control plane and a user plane to a terminal (eg, a UE) 10.
  • the UE 10 may be fixed or mobile and may be referred to in other terms, such as mobile station (MS), user terminal (UT), subscriber station (SS), mobile terminal (MT), wireless device, and the like.
  • BS 20 is generally a fixed station that communicates with UE 10.
  • BSs are interconnected via an X2 interface.
  • BSs are also connected to an evolved packet core (EPC) via an S1 interface, more specifically to a mobility management entity (MME) via S1-MME, and to a serving gateway (S-GW) via S1-U.
  • EPCs include MME, S-GW and packet data network-gateway (P-GW).
  • the layer of the air interface protocol between the UE and the network uses the first layer (L1), second layer (L2) and third layer (L3) models based on the lower three layers of Open System Interconnection (OSI), which are well known in communication systems. Can be classified using.
  • the physical layer (PHY) belonging to the first layer provides an information transmission service using a physical channel
  • the RRC (Radio Resource Control) layer belonging to the third layer controls radio resources between the UE and the network.
  • the RRC layer exchanges RRC messages between the UE and the base station.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a 3GPP NR system structure.
  • the NG-RAN consists of gNBs that provide control plane (RRC) protocol termination for the NG-RA user plane (new AS sublayer / PDCP / RLC / MAC / PHY) and user equipment (UE). do.
  • the gNBs are interconnected via an Xn interface.
  • the gNB is also connected to the NGC via an NG interface. More specifically, the gNB is connected to an Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF) through an N2 interface and to a User Plane Function (UPF) through an N3 interface.
  • AMF Access and Mobility Management Function
  • UPF User Plane Function
  • a terminal receives information through a downlink (DL) from a base station, and the terminal transmits information through an uplink (UL) to the base station.
  • the information transmitted and received between the base station and the terminal includes data and various control information, and various physical channels exist according to the type / use of the information transmitted and received.
  • an initial cell search operation such as synchronization with a base station is performed (S11).
  • the terminal receives a primary synchronization signal (PSS) and a secondary synchronization signal (SSS) from the base station, synchronizes with the base station, and acquires information such as a cell identity.
  • the terminal may receive a broadcast broadcast (PBCH) from the base station to obtain broadcast information in the cell.
  • the UE may check the downlink channel state by receiving a DL RS (Downlink Reference Signal) in the initial cell search step.
  • PBCH broadcast broadcast
  • DL RS Downlink Reference Signal
  • the UE may obtain more specific system information by receiving a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) and a physical downlink control channel (PDSCH) corresponding thereto (S12).
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • PDSCH physical downlink control channel
  • the terminal may perform a random access procedure (for example, see FIG. 4 and related description) to complete the access to the base station (S13 to S16).
  • the UE may transmit a random access preamble through a physical random access channel (PRACH) (S13) and receive a random access response (RAR) for the preamble through a PDCCH and a PDSCH corresponding thereto (S14).
  • the UE may transmit a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) using scheduling information in the RAR (S15) and perform a contention resolution procedure such as a PDCCH and a PDSCH corresponding thereto (S16).
  • PRACH physical random access channel
  • RAR random access response
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • the UE may perform PDCCH / PDSCH reception (S17) and PUSCH / PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel) transmission (S18) as a general uplink / downlink signal transmission procedure.
  • Control information transmitted from the terminal to the base station is referred to as uplink control information (UCI).
  • UCI includes Hybrid Automatic Repeat and reQuest Acknowledgment / Negative-ACK (HARQ ACK / NACK), Scheduling Request (SR), Channel State Information (CSI), and the like.
  • the CSI includes a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI), a Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI), a Rank Indication (RI), and the like.
  • the UCI is generally transmitted through the PUCCH, but may be transmitted through the PUSCH when control information and data should be transmitted at the same time.
  • the UE may transmit the UCI aperiodically through the PUSCH according to the request / instruction of the network.
  • the random access procedure may include an initial access in RRC Idle Mode (or RRC_IDLE state), an initial access after a radio link failure, a handover requiring a random access process, an RRC Connected Mode (or RRC_CONNECTED state). ) Is performed when uplink / downlink data is generated that requires a random access procedure.
  • the random access process may be referred to as a random access channel (RACH) process.
  • RACH random access channel
  • Some RRC messages such as an RRC connection request message, a cell update message, and an URA update message, are also transmitted using a random access procedure.
  • the logical channels Common Control Channel (CCCH), Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH), and Dedicated Traffic Channel (DTCH) may be mapped to the transport channel RACH.
  • CCCH Common Control Channel
  • DCCH Dedicated Control Channel
  • DTCH Dedicated Traffic Channel
  • the transport channel RACH is mapped to a physical channel physical random access channel (PRACH).
  • PRACH physical channel physical random access channel
  • the UE physical layer first selects one access slot and one signature and transmits the PRACH preamble in uplink.
  • the random access process is classified into a contention based process and a non-contention based process.
  • the terminal receives and stores information about a random access from a base station through system information. After that, if a random access is required, the UE transmits a random access preamble (also referred to as message 1 or Msg1) to the base station (S21).
  • the random access preamble may be referred to as a RACH preamble or a PRACH preamble.
  • the base station transmits a random access response message (also referred to as message 2 or Msg2) to the terminal (S22).
  • downlink scheduling information on the random access response message may be CRC masked by a random access-RNTI (RA-RNTI) and transmitted on an L1 / L2 control channel (PDCCH).
  • RA-RNTI random access-RNTI
  • the UE may receive and decode a random access response message from a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH).
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • the terminal checks whether the random access response information includes random access response information indicated to the terminal. Whether the random access response information indicated to the presence of the self may be determined by whether there is a random access preamble (RAID) for the preamble transmitted by the terminal.
  • RAID random access preamble
  • the random access response information includes a timing advance (TA) indicating timing offset information for synchronization, radio resource allocation information used for uplink, and a temporary identifier (eg, Temporary C-RNTI) for terminal identification. do.
  • TA timing advance
  • radio resource allocation information used for uplink and a temporary identifier (eg, Temporary C-RNTI) for terminal identification.
  • uplink transmission including an RRC connection request message on an uplink shared channel according to radio resource allocation information included in the response information (also referred to as message 3 or Msg3).
  • Msg3 radio resource allocation information included in the response information
  • the base station After receiving the uplink transmission from the terminal, the base station transmits a message for contention resolution (also referred to as message 4 or Msg4) to the terminal (S24).
  • the message for contention resolution may be referred to as a contention resolution message and may include an RRC connection establishment message.
  • the terminal completes the connection setup and transmits a connection setup complete message (also called message 5 or Ms
  • the base station may allocate a non-contention random access preamble to the terminal before the terminal transmits the random access preamble (S21).
  • the non-competitive random access preamble may be allocated through dedicated signaling such as a handover command or a PDCCH.
  • the UE may transmit the allocated non-competitive random access preamble to the base station similarly to step S21.
  • the base station may transmit a random access response to the terminal similarly to the step S22.
  • LTE supports frame type 1 for frequency division duplex (FDD), frame type 2 for time division duplex (TDD) and frame type 3 for unlicensed cell (UCell).
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • Uell unlicensed cell
  • PCell Primary Cell
  • SCells Secondary Cells
  • the operations described herein may be applied independently for each cell.
  • different frame structures can be used for different cells.
  • time resources eg, subframes, slots, and subslots
  • TU time unit
  • the downlink radio frame is defined as ten 1 ms subframes (SFs).
  • the subframe includes 14 or 12 symbols according to a cyclic prefix (CP). If a normal CP is used, the subframe includes 14 symbols. If extended CP is used, the subframe includes 12 symbols.
  • the symbol may mean an OFDM (A) symbol or an SC-FDM (A) symbol according to a multiple access scheme. For example, the symbol may mean an OFDM (A) symbol in downlink and an SC-FDM (A) symbol in uplink.
  • the OFDM (A) symbol is referred to as a Cyclic Prefix-OFDM (A) symbol
  • SC-FDM (A) symbol is a DFT-s-OFDM (A) (Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM) symbol. (A)) may be referred to as a symbol.
  • the subframe may be defined as one or more slots according to SCS (Subcarrier Spacing) as follows.
  • SCS Subcarrier Spacing
  • subframe #i is defined as one 1ms slot # 2i.
  • FIG. Frame type 2 consists of two half frames.
  • the half frame includes 4 (or 5) general subframes and 1 (or 0) special subframes.
  • the general subframe is used for uplink or downlink according to the UL-Downlink configuration.
  • the subframe consists of two slots.
  • the structure of the above-described radio frame is merely an example, and the number of subframes included in the radio frame or the number of slots included in the subframe and the number of symbols included in the slot may be variously changed.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a slot structure of an LTE frame.
  • a slot includes a plurality of symbols in the time domain and a plurality of resource blocks (RBs) in the frequency domain.
  • the symbol may mean a symbol section.
  • the slot structure may be represented by a resource grid composed of N DL / UL RB ⁇ N RB sc subcarriers and N DL / UL symb symbols.
  • N DL RB represents the number of RBs in the downlink slot
  • N UL RB represents the number of RBs in the UL slot.
  • N DL RB and N UL RB depend on the DL bandwidth and the UL bandwidth, respectively.
  • N DL symb represents the number of symbols in the DL slot
  • N UL symb represents the number of symbols in the UL slot
  • N RB sc represents the number of subcarriers constituting the RB.
  • the number of symbols in the slot can be variously changed according to the length of the SCS, CP. For example, one slot includes 7 symbols in the case of a normal CP, but one slot includes 6 symbols in the case of an extended CP.
  • RB is defined as N DL / UL symb (e.g. 7) consecutive symbols in the time domain and N RB sc (e.g. 12) consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain.
  • the RB may mean a physical resource block (PRB) or a virtual resource block (VRB), and the PRB and the VRB may be mapped one-to-one.
  • Two RBs, one located in each of two slots of a subframe, are called RB pairs.
  • Two RBs constituting the RB pair have the same RB number (or also referred to as an RB index).
  • a resource composed of one symbol and one subcarrier is called a resource element (RE) or tone.
  • RE resource element
  • Each RE in a resource grid may be uniquely defined by an index pair (k, l) in a slot.
  • k is an index given from 0 to N DL / UL RB ⁇ N RB sc ⁇ 1 in the frequency domain
  • l is an index given from 0 to N DL / UL symb ⁇ 1 in the time domain.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates a structure of a downlink subframe of an LTE system.
  • up to three (or four) OFDM (A) symbols located in front of the first slot in a subframe correspond to a control region to which a downlink control channel is allocated.
  • the remaining OFDM (A) symbols correspond to the data region to which the PDSCH is allocated, and the basic resource unit of the data region is RB.
  • the downlink control channel includes a Physical Control Format Indicator Channel (PCFICH), a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH), a Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel (PHICH), and the like.
  • the PCFICH is transmitted in the first OFDM symbol of a subframe and carries information on the number of OFDM symbols used for transmission of a control channel within the subframe.
  • the PHICH is a response to uplink transmission and carries an HARQ ACK / NACK (acknowledgment / negative-acknowledgment) signal.
  • Control information transmitted through the PDCCH is referred to as downlink control information (DCI).
  • DCI includes uplink or downlink scheduling information or an uplink transmit power control command for a certain group of terminals.
  • FIG 8 illustrates a structure of an uplink subframe used in LTE.
  • the subframe 700 is composed of two 0.5 ms slots 701. Each slot is composed of a plurality of symbols 702 and one symbol corresponds to one SC-FDMA symbol.
  • the RB 703 is a resource allocation unit corresponding to 12 subcarriers in the frequency domain and one slot in the time domain.
  • the structure of an uplink subframe of LTE is largely divided into a data region 704 and a control region 705.
  • the data area means a communication resource used in transmitting data such as voice and packet transmitted to each terminal, and includes a PUSCH (Physical Uplink Shared Channel).
  • PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
  • the control region means a communication resource used to transmit an uplink control signal, for example, a downlink channel quality report from each user equipment, a reception ACK / NACK for the downlink signal, an uplink scheduling request, and a PUCCH (Physical Uplink). Control Channel).
  • the sounding reference signal (SRS) is transmitted through the SC-FDMA symbol which is located last on the time axis in one subframe.
  • FIG 9 illustrates a structure of a radio frame used in an NR system.
  • uplink and downlink transmission are composed of frames.
  • the radio frame has a length of 10 ms and is defined as two 5 ms half-frames (HFs).
  • the half-frame is defined by five 1 ms subframes (SFs).
  • the subframe is divided into one or more slots, and the number of slots in the subframe depends on the subcarrier spacing (SCS).
  • SCS subcarrier spacing
  • Each slot includes 12 or 14 OFDM (A) symbols according to a cyclic prefix (CP). When a normal CP is used, each slot includes 14 symbols. If extended CP is used, each slot includes 12 symbols.
  • the symbol may include an OFDM symbol (or CP-OFDM symbol), an SC-FDMA symbol (or DFT-s-OFDM symbol).
  • Table 1 exemplarily shows that when CP is used, the number of symbols per slot, the number of slots per frame, and the number of slots per subframe vary according to SCS.
  • Table 2 illustrates that when the extended CP is used, the number of symbols per slot, the number of slots per frame, and the number of slots per subframe vary according to SCS.
  • OFDM (A) numerology eg, SCS, CP length, etc.
  • a numerology eg, SCS, CP length, etc.
  • the (absolute time) section of a time resource eg, SF, slot, or TTI
  • a time unit TU
  • FIG. 10 illustrates a slot structure of an NR frame.
  • the slot includes a plurality of symbols in the time domain. For example, in general, one slot includes 14 symbols in case of CP, but one slot includes 12 symbols in case of extended CP.
  • the carrier includes a plurality of subcarriers in the frequency domain.
  • RB Resource Block
  • a bandwidth part (BWP) is defined as a plurality of consecutive (P) RBs in the frequency domain and may correspond to one numerology (eg, SCS, CP length, etc.).
  • the carrier may include up to N (eg 5) BWPs. Data communication is performed through an activated BWP, and only one BWP may be activated by one UE.
  • Each element in the resource grid is referred to as a resource element (RE), one complex symbol may be mapped.
  • RE resource element
  • FIG. 11 illustrates the structure of a self-contained slot.
  • a frame is characterized by a self-complete structure in which all of a DL control channel, DL or UL data, UL control channel, etc. may be included in one slot.
  • the first N symbols in a slot may be used to transmit a DL control channel (referred to as DL control region), and the last M symbols in a slot may be used to transmit a UL control channel (referred to as UL control region).
  • N and M are each an integer of 0 or more.
  • a resource region (referred to as a data region) between the DL control region and the UL control region may be used for DL data transmission or may be used for UL data transmission.
  • the following configuration may be considered.
  • Each interval is listed in chronological order.
  • DL area (i) DL data area, (ii) DL control area + DL data area
  • UL region (i) UL data region, (ii) UL data region + UL control region
  • the PDCCH may be transmitted in the DL control region, and the PDSCH may be transmitted in the DL data region.
  • PUCCH may be transmitted in the UL control region, and PUSCH may be transmitted in the UL data region.
  • Downlink Control Information (DCI), for example, DL data scheduling information, UL data scheduling information, and the like may be transmitted in the PDCCH.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • uplink control information for example, positive acknowledgment / negative acknowledgment (ACK / NACK) information, channel state information (CSI) information, and scheduling request (SR) for DL data may be transmitted.
  • the GP provides a time gap in the process of the base station and the terminal switching from the transmission mode to the reception mode or from the reception mode to the transmission mode. Some symbols at the time of switching from DL to UL in the subframe may be set to GP.
  • the base station transmits the related signal to the terminal through the downlink channel, and the terminal receives the related signal from the base station through the downlink channel.
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • the PDSCH carries downlink data (eg, DL-shared channel transport block, DL-SCH TB), and modulation methods such as Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK), 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM), 64 QAM, and 256 QAM are used. Apply.
  • a codeword is generated by encoding the TB.
  • the PDSCH can carry up to two codewords. Scrambling and modulation mapping are performed for each codeword, and modulation symbols generated from each codeword are mapped to one or more layers. Each layer is mapped to a resource together with a DMRS (Demodulation Reference Signal) to generate an OFDM symbol signal, and is transmitted through a corresponding antenna port.
  • DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
  • the PDCCH carries downlink control information (DCI) and a QPSK modulation method is applied.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • One PDCCH is composed of 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 CCEs (Control Channel Elements) according to an aggregation level (AL).
  • One CCE consists of six Resource Element Groups (REGs).
  • REG Resource Element Groups
  • One REG is defined by one OFDM symbol and one (P) RB.
  • the PDCCH is transmitted through a control resource set (CORESET).
  • CORESET is defined as a REG set with a given pneumonology (eg SCS, CP length, etc.).
  • a plurality of CORESET for one terminal may be overlapped in the time / frequency domain.
  • CORESET may be set through system information (eg, MIB) or UE-specific higher layer (eg, Radio Resource Control, RRC, layer) signaling.
  • system information eg, MIB
  • UE-specific higher layer eg, Radio Resource Control, RRC, layer
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the number of RBs and the number of symbols (up to three) constituting the CORESET may be set by higher layer signaling.
  • the UE performs decoding (aka blind decoding) on the set of PDCCH candidates to obtain a DCI transmitted through the PDCCH.
  • the set of PDCCH candidates decoded by the UE is defined as a PDCCH search space set.
  • the search space set may be a common search space or a UE-specific search space.
  • the UE may acquire the DCI by monitoring PDCCH candidates in one or more sets of search spaces set by MIB or higher layer signaling.
  • Each CORESET setting is associated with one or more sets of search spaces, and each set of search spaces is associated with one COREST setting.
  • One set of search spaces is determined based on the following parameters.
  • controlResourceSetId indicates the control resource set associated with the search space set
  • monitoringSymbolsWithinSlot indicates the PDCCH monitoring pattern in the slot for PDCCH monitoring (eg, indicates the first symbol (s) of the control resource set)
  • Table 3 illustrates the features of each search space type.
  • Table 4 illustrates the DCI formats transmitted on the PDCCH.
  • DCI format 0_0 is used for scheduling TB-based (or TB-level) PUSCH
  • DCI format 0_1 is used for scheduling TB-based (or TB-level) PUSCH or Code Block Group (CBG) -based (or CBG-level) PUSCH. It can be used to schedule.
  • DCI format 1_0 is used for scheduling TB-based (or TB-level) PDSCH
  • DCI format 1_1 is used for scheduling TB-based (or TB-level) PDSCH or CBG-based (or CBG-level) PDSCH. Can be.
  • DCI format 2_0 is used to deliver dynamic slot format information (eg, dynamic SFI) to the UE
  • DCI format 2_1 is used to deliver downlink pre-Emption information to the UE.
  • DCI format 2_0 and / or DCI format 2_1 may be delivered to UEs in a corresponding group through a group common PDCCH, which is a PDCCH delivered to UEs defined as one group.
  • the terminal transmits the related signal to the base station through the uplink channel, and the base station receives the related signal from the terminal through the uplink channel.
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • PUSCH carries uplink data (eg, UL-shared channel transport block, UL-SCH TB) and / or uplink control information (UCI), and uses a Cyclic Prefix-Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (CP-OFDM) waveform. Or based on a Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (DFT-s-OFDM) waveform.
  • DFT-s-OFDM Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
  • the UE when transform precoding is not possible (eg, transform precoding is disabled), the UE transmits a PUSCH based on a CP-OFDM waveform, and when conversion precoding is possible (eg, transform precoding is enabled), the UE is CP-OFDM.
  • PUSCH may be transmitted based on the waveform or the DFT-s-OFDM waveform.
  • PUSCH transmissions are dynamically scheduled by UL grants in DCI or semi-static based on higher layer (eg RRC) signaling (and / or Layer 1 (L1) signaling (eg PDCCH)). Can be scheduled (configured grant).
  • PUSCH transmission may be performed based on codebook or non-codebook.
  • the PUCCH carries uplink control information, HARQ-ACK and / or scheduling request (SR), and is divided into Short PUCCH and Long PUCCH according to the PUCCH transmission length.
  • Table 5 illustrates the PUCCH formats.
  • MTC is a form of data communication that includes one or more machines, and may be applied to machine-to-machine (M2M) or Internet-of-Things (IoT).
  • a machine refers to an object that does not require human direct manipulation or intervention.
  • the machine may include a smart meter equipped with a mobile communication module, a bending machine, a portable terminal having an MTC function, and the like.
  • MTC can provide services such as meter reading, water level measurement, the use of surveillance cameras, and inventory reporting of vending machines.
  • MTC communication has a characteristic of small amount of transmission data and occasional up / down link data transmission and reception. Therefore, it is efficient to lower the cost of the MTC device and reduce the battery consumption at the low data rate.
  • MTC devices are generally less mobile, and thus MTC communication has the characteristic that the channel environment hardly changes.
  • 3GPP Release 12 adds features for low-cost MTC devices, for which UE category 0 is defined.
  • the UE category is an index indicating how much data the terminal can process in the communication modem.
  • UE category 0 can reduce baseband / RF complexity by using a reduced peak data rate, half-duplex operation with relaxed Radio Frequency (RF) requirements, and a single receive antenna.
  • RF Radio Frequency
  • 3GPP Release 12 enhanced MTC (eMTC) was introduced, and the MTC terminal lowered the cost and power consumption by only operating at 1.08MHz (that is, 6 RBs), which is the minimum frequency bandwidth supported by legacy LTE.
  • MTC Mobility Management Entity
  • Coverage enhancement may be referred to as coverage extension, and the techniques for coverage enhancement described with respect to MTC may apply equally or similarly to NB-IoT and 5G (or NR).
  • a base station / terminal can transmit / receive one physical channel / signal over a plurality of occasions (bundle of physical channels).
  • the physical channel / signal may be repeatedly transmitted / received according to a pre-defined rule.
  • the receiving device can increase the decoding success rate of the physical channel / signal by decoding part or all of the physical channel / signal bundle.
  • the opportunity may refer to a resource (eg, time / frequency) to which a physical channel / signal may be transmitted / received.
  • Opportunities for physical channels / signals may include subframes, slots or symbol sets in the time domain.
  • the symbol set may consist of one or more consecutive OFDM-based symbols.
  • Opportunities for physical channels / signals may include frequency bands, RB sets in the frequency domain. For example, PBCH, PRACH, MPDCCH, PDSCH, PUCCH and PUSCH may be repeatedly transmitted / received.
  • the MTC supports an operation mode for coverage enhancement or coverage (CE), and a mode supporting repetitive transmission / reception of signals for coverage enhancement or extension may be referred to as a CE mode.
  • a CE mode supporting repetitive transmission / reception of signals for coverage enhancement or extension
  • the number of repetitive transmissions / receptions of a signal for coverage enhancement or extension may be referred to as a CE level Table 6 exemplifies a CE mode / level supported by the MTC.
  • the first mode (eg, CE Mode A) is defined for small coverage enhancement with full mobility and channel state information (CSI) feedback, and is a mode with no or few repetitions.
  • the operation of the first mode may be the same as the operation range of the UE category 1.
  • the second mode (eg CE Mode B) is defined for UEs in extremely poor coverage conditions that support CSI feedback and limited mobility, and a large number of repetitive transmissions are defined.
  • the second mode provides up to 15dB of coverage enhancement based on the range of UE category 1.
  • Each level of the MTC is defined differently in a random access procedure (or RACH procedure) and a paging procedure.
  • the MTC is a specific band (or channel band) of the system bandwidth of the cell (MTC subband or narrow band) regardless of the system bandwidth of the cell. Narrowband (NB) only).
  • the uplink / downlink operation of the MTC terminal may be performed only in the 1.08 MHz frequency band.
  • 1.08 MHz corresponds to six consecutive Physical Resource Blocks (PRBs) in an LTE system, and is defined to follow the same cell search and random access procedure as that of an LTE terminal.
  • FIG. 13A illustrates a case in which MTC subbands are configured in the center of a cell (eg, six center PRBs) and FIG.
  • the MTC subband may be defined in consideration of frequency range and subcarrier spacing (SCS).
  • SCS subcarrier spacing
  • the size of the MTC subband may be defined as X consecutive PRBs (that is, 0.18 * X * (2 ⁇ ⁇ ) MHz bandwidths) ( ⁇ may refer to Table 1).
  • X may be defined as 20 according to the size of the SS / PBCH (Synchronization Signal / Physical Broadcast Channel) block.
  • the MTC may operate in at least one bandwidth part (BWP). In this case, a plurality of MTC subbands may be configured in the BWP.
  • BWP bandwidth part
  • a PDSCH is scheduled using a PDCCH.
  • MTC PDSCH is scheduled using MPDCCH.
  • the MTC terminal may monitor the MPDCCH candidate in a search space in a subframe.
  • monitoring includes blind decoding MPDCCH candidates.
  • the MPDCCH transmits a DCI, and the DCI includes uplink or downlink scheduling information.
  • MPDCCH is multiplexed into PDSCH and FDM in a subframe.
  • the MPDCCH is repeatedly transmitted in a maximum of 256 subframes, and the DCI transmitted by the MPDCCH includes information on the number of MPDCCH repetitions.
  • downlink scheduling when repetitive transmission of the MPDCCH ends in subframe #N, transmission of PDSCH scheduled by the MPDCCH starts in subframe # N + 2.
  • the PDSCH may be repeatedly transmitted in up to 2048 subframes.
  • MPDCCH and PDSCH may be transmitted in different MTC subbands. Accordingly, the MTC terminal may perform RF (Radio Frequency) retuning for PDSCH reception after MPDCCH reception.
  • uplink scheduling when repetitive transmission of the MPDCCH ends in subframe #N, the PUSCH scheduled by the MPDCCH starts transmission in subframe # N + 4.
  • frequency hopping is supported between different MTC subbands by RF retuning. For example, if the PDSCH is repeatedly transmitted in 32 subframes, the PDSCH is transmitted in the first MTC subband in the first 16 subframes, and the PDSCH is transmitted in the second MTC subband in the remaining 16 subframes. Can be sent.
  • MTC operates in half duplex mode.
  • HARQ retransmission of the MTC is an adaptive, asynchronous scheme.
  • NB-IoT Narrowband Internet of Things
  • NB-IoT represents a narrowband IoT technology that supports low-power wide area networks through existing wireless communication systems (eg, LTE, NR).
  • NB-IoT may refer to a system for supporting low complexity and low power consumption through a narrowband.
  • the NB-IoT system uses OFDM parameters such as subcarrier spacing (SCS) in the same manner as the existing system, and thus does not need to allocate an additional band separately for the NB-IoT system.
  • SCS subcarrier spacing
  • one PRB of the existing system band can be allocated for NB-IoT. Since the NB-IoT terminal recognizes a single PRB as each carrier, the PRB and the carrier may be interpreted to have the same meaning in the description of the NB-IoT.
  • the description of the NB-IoT mainly describes the case where it is applied to the existing LTE system, but the description of the present specification may be extended to the next-generation system (eg, NR system).
  • the content related to the NB-IoT herein may be extended to MTC for a similar technical purpose (eg, low-power, low-cost, improved coverage, etc.).
  • NB-IoT may be replaced with other equivalent terms such as NB-LTE, NB-IoT enhancement, enhanced NB-IoT, further enhanced NB-IoT, NB-NR, and the like.
  • NB-IoT downlink is provided with physical channels such as narrowband physical broadcast channel (NPBCH), narrowband physical downlink shared channel (NPDSCH), narrowband physical downlink control channel (NPDCCH), narrowband primary synchronization signal (NPSS), narrowband (NSSS) Physical signals such as Primary Synchronization Signal (NRS) and Narrowband Reference Signal (NRS) are provided.
  • NPBCH narrowband physical broadcast channel
  • NPDSCH narrowband physical downlink shared channel
  • NPDCCH narrowband physical downlink control channel
  • NPSS narrowband primary synchronization signal
  • NSSS narrowband Physical signals
  • NRS Primary Synchronization Signal
  • NRS Narrowband Reference Signal
  • the downlink physical channel / signal is transmitted through one PRB and supports 15kHz subcarrier spacing / multi-tone transmission.
  • NPSS is transmitted in the sixth subframe of every frame and NSSS is transmitted in the last (eg, tenth) subframe of every even frame.
  • the terminal may acquire frequency, symbol, and frame synchronization using the sync signals NPSS and NSSS, and search for 504 physical cell IDs (ie, base station IDs).
  • NPBCH is transmitted in the first subframe of every frame and carries the NB-MIB.
  • the NRS is provided as a reference signal for downlink physical channel demodulation and is generated in the same manner as in LTE.
  • NB-PCID Physical Cell ID
  • NCell ID or NCell ID, NB-IoT base station ID
  • NRS is transmitted through one or two antenna ports.
  • NPDCCH and NPDSCH may be transmitted in the remaining subframes except NPSS / NSSS / NPBCH.
  • NPDCCH and NPDSCH cannot be transmitted together in the same subframe.
  • NPDCCH carries DCI and DCI supports three types of DCI formats.
  • DCI format N0 includes narrowband physical uplink shared channel (NPUSCH) scheduling information, and DCI formats N1 and N2 include NPDSCH scheduling information.
  • NPDCCH can be repeated up to 2048 times to improve coverage.
  • the NPDSCH is used to transmit data (eg, TB) of a transport channel such as a downlink-shared channel (DL-SCH) and a paging channel (PCH).
  • the maximum TBS is 680 bits, and up to 2048 repetitive transmissions can be used to improve coverage.
  • the uplink physical channel includes a narrowband physical random access channel (NPRACH) and an NPUSCH, and supports single-tone transmission and multi-tone transmission.
  • NPRACH narrowband physical random access channel
  • NPUSCH NPUSCH
  • Single-tone transmissions are supported for subcarrier spacings of 3.5 kHz and 15 kHz, and multi-tone transmissions are only supported for 15 kHz subcarrier intervals.
  • the terminal may perform a network access procedure to perform the procedures and / or methods described / proposed herein.
  • the terminal may receive and store system information and configuration information necessary to perform the procedures and / or methods described / proposed herein while accessing a network (eg, a base station) and store them in a memory.
  • Configuration information required for the present invention may be received through higher layer (eg, RRC layer; Medium Access Control, MAC, layer, etc.) signaling.
  • a reference signal may be transmitted using beam-forming. If beam-forming-based signal transmission is supported, a beam management process may be involved to align the beam between the base station and the terminal. In addition, the signal proposed in the present invention may be transmitted / received using beam-forming.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • beam alignment may be performed based on SSB.
  • beam alignment in the RRC CONNECTED mode may be performed based on CSI-RS (in DL) and SRS (in UL).
  • operations related to beams may be omitted in the description of the present specification.
  • the base station may periodically transmit the SSB (S1602).
  • SSB includes PSS / SSS / PBCH.
  • SSB may be transmitted using beam sweeping.
  • the PBCH may include a master information block (MIB), and the MIB may include scheduling information regarding a retaining minimum system information (RMI).
  • the base station can transmit the RMSI and OSI (Other System Information) (S1604).
  • the RMSI may include information (eg, PRACH configuration information) necessary for the terminal to initially access the base station. Meanwhile, the terminal identifies the best SSB after performing SSB detection.
  • the terminal may transmit the RACH preamble (Message 1, Msg1) to the base station using the PRACH resources linked / corresponding to the index (ie, beam) of the best SSB (S1606).
  • the beam direction of the RACH preamble is associated with a PRACH resource.
  • the association between the PRACH resource (and / or RACH preamble) and the SSB (index) may be established through system information (eg, RMSI).
  • the base station transmits a random access response (RAR) (Msg2) in response to the RACH preamble (S1608), and the terminal uses the Msg3 (eg, UL grant in the RAR)
  • RAR random access response
  • Msg4 may include an RRC Connection Setup.
  • subsequent beam alignment may be performed based on SSB / CSI-RS (in DL) and SRS (in UL).
  • the terminal may receive the SSB / CSI-RS (S1614).
  • the SSB / CSI-RS may be used by the terminal to generate a beam / CSI report.
  • the base station may request the terminal to the beam / CSI report through the DCI (S1616).
  • the terminal may generate a beam / CSI report based on the SSB / CSI-RS and transmit the generated beam / CSI report to the base station through the PUSCH / PUCCH (S1618).
  • the beam / CSI report may include a beam measurement result, information on a preferred beam, and the like.
  • the base station and the terminal may switch the beam based on the beam / CSI report (S1620a, S1620b).
  • the terminal and the base station may perform the above-described procedures and / or methods.
  • the terminal and the base station process the information in the memory according to the proposal of the present invention based on the configuration information obtained in the network access process (eg, system information acquisition process, RRC connection process through the RACH, etc.) Or transmit the received wireless signal to the memory.
  • the radio signal may include at least one of PDCCH, PDSCH, and RS (Reference Signal) in downlink, and at least one of PUCCH, PUSCH, and SRS in uplink.
  • the MTC network access procedure will be further described based on LTE. The following description may be extended to NR as well.
  • the PDCCH is replaced with an MPDCCH (MTC PDCCH) (see, eg, FIG. 14 and related description).
  • the MIB includes 10 reserved bits.
  • MTC 5 Most Significant Bits (MSBs) of 10 reserved bits in the MIB are used to indicate scheduling information for a system information block for bandwidth reduced device (SIB1-BR).
  • SIB1-BR 5 MSBs are used to indicate the number of repetitions of the SIB1-BR and the transport block size (TBS).
  • SIB1-BR is transmitted in the PDSCH.
  • SIB1-BR may not change in 512 radio frames (5120 ms) to allow multiple subframes to be combined.
  • the information carried in SIB1-BR is similar to SIB1 of LTE system.
  • the MTC random access procedure (or RACH procedure) is basically the same as the LTE random access procedure (or RACH procedure) (see, for example, FIG. 4 and related description), and differs in the followings: MTC random access procedure (or RACH procedure) Is performed based on the Coverage Enhancement (CE) level.
  • CE Coverage Enhancement
  • CE Coverage Enhancement
  • the first mode eg, CE mode A
  • the second mode eg, CE mode B
  • the number of repetitions may be large.
  • the base station broadcasts system information including a plurality (eg, three) RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power) threshold values, and the terminal may determine the CE level by comparing the RSRP threshold value and the RSRP measurement value.
  • the following information can be configured independently through system information.
  • PRACH resource information period / offset of PRACH opportunity, PRACH frequency resource
  • Preamble group preamble set allocated for each CE level
  • RAR window time the length of time period for which RAR reception is expected (eg number of subframes)
  • Conflict Resolution Window Time The length of time period to expect to receive a conflict resolution message.
  • the UE may select a PRACH resource corresponding to its CE level and then perform PRACH transmission based on the selected PRACH resource.
  • the PRACH waveform used in MTC is the same as the PRACH waveform used in LTE (eg, OFDM and Zadoff-Chu sequences). Signals / messages transmitted after the PRACH may also be repeatedly transmitted, and the number of repetitions may be independently set according to the CE mode / level.
  • the NB-IoT random access procedure (or RACH process) is basically the same as the LTE random access process (or RACH process) (for example, see FIG. 4 and related description), and differs in the following points.
  • the RACH preamble format is different. In LTE, the preamble is based on code / sequence (eg, zadoff-chu sequence), whereas in NB-IoT the preamble is a subcarrier.
  • the NB-IoT random access procedure (or RACH procedure) is performed based on the CE level. Therefore, PRACH resources are allocated differently for each CE level.
  • the uplink resource allocation request in the NB-IoT is performed using a random access procedure (or RACH procedure).
  • 17 illustrates preamble transmission on an NB-IoT RACH.
  • the NPRACH preamble may be configured with four symbol groups, and each symbol group may be configured with a CP and a plurality of SC-FDMA symbols.
  • the SC-FDMA symbol may be replaced with an OFDM symbol or a DFT-s-OFDM symbol.
  • the NPRACH only supports single-tone transmissions with 3.75kHz subcarrier spacing, and offers 66.7 ⁇ s and 266.67 ⁇ s length CPs to support different cell radii.
  • Each symbol group performs frequency hopping and the hopping pattern is as follows. The subcarrier transmitting the first symbol group is determined in a pseudo-random manner.
  • the second symbol group is one subcarrier leap
  • the third symbol group is six subcarrier leaps
  • the fourth symbol group is one subcarrier leap.
  • the frequency hopping procedure is repeatedly applied, and the NPRACH preamble can be repeatedly transmitted ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 ⁇ to improve coverage.
  • NPRACH resources may be configured for each CE level.
  • the UE may select the NPRACH resource based on the CE level determined according to the downlink measurement result (eg, RSRP) and transmit the RACH preamble using the selected NPRACH resource.
  • the NPRACH may be transmitted on an anchor carrier or on a non-anchor carrier with NPRACH resources configured.
  • the UE may perform the DRX operation while performing the procedures and / or methods described / proposed herein.
  • the UE in which DRX is configured may lower power consumption by discontinuously receiving a DL signal.
  • DRX may be performed in a Radio Resource Control (RRC) _IDLE state, an RRC_INACTIVE state, and an RRC_CONNECTED state.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • DRX is used for discontinuous reception of PDCCH.
  • DRX performed in the RRC_CONNECTED state is referred to as RRC_CONNECTED DRX.
  • a DRX cycle includes On Duration and Opportunity for DRX.
  • the DRX cycle defines the time interval in which On Duration repeats periodically.
  • On Duration indicates a time interval that the UE monitors to receive the PDCCH (or, MPDCCH, NPDCCH).
  • the UE performs PDCCH monitoring for On Duration. If there is a PDCCH successfully detected during PDCCH monitoring, the UE operates an inactivity timer and maintains an awake state. On the other hand, if there is no PDCCH successfully detected during PDCCH monitoring, the UE enters a sleep state after the On Duration ends.
  • PDCCH monitoring / reception may be performed discontinuously in the time domain in performing the above-described / proposed procedures and / or methods.
  • PDCCH monitoring may be performed discontinuously according to DRX configuration in activated cell (s) in the present invention. Specifically, PDCCH monitoring is performed when a PDCCH opportunity (e.g., a time interval (e.g., one or more consecutive OFDM symbols) set to monitor the PDCCH) corresponds to On Duration, and PDCCH monitoring is performed when corresponding to Opportunity for DRX. Monitoring can be omitted.
  • a PDCCH opportunity e.g., a time interval (e.g., one or more consecutive OFDM symbols) set to monitor the PDCCH
  • On Duration e.g., one or more consecutive OFDM symbols
  • PDCCH monitoring / reception may be continuously performed in the time domain in performing the above-described / proposed procedure and / or method.
  • the PDCCH reception opportunity may be set continuously.
  • PDCCH monitoring may be limited in the time interval set as the measurement gap.
  • the DRX is used to discontinuously receive the paging signal.
  • RRC_IDLE DRX DRX performed in the RRC_IDLE (or RRC_INACTIVE) state
  • RRC_IDLE DRX DRX performed in the RRC_IDLE DRX. Therefore, when DRX is set, PDCCH monitoring / reception may be performed discontinuously in the time domain in performing the procedures and / or methods described / proposed herein.
  • DRX may be configured for discontinuous reception of a paging signal.
  • the terminal may receive DRX configuration information from the base station through higher layer (eg, RRC) signaling.
  • the DRX configuration information may include configuration information about a DRX cycle, a DRX offset, a DRX timer, and the like.
  • the UE repeats the On Duration and the Sleep duration according to the DRX cycle.
  • the UE may operate in a wakeup mode at On duration and may operate in a sleep mode at Sleep duration. In the wakeup mode, the UE may monitor the PO to receive a paging message.
  • the PO means a time resource / interval (eg, subframe, slot) in which the terminal expects to receive a paging message.
  • PO monitoring includes monitoring the PDCCH (or MPDCCH, NPDCCH) scrambled with P-RNTI in the PO (referred to as paging PDCCH).
  • the paging message may be included in the paging PDCCH or may be included in the PDSCH scheduled by the paging PDCCH.
  • One or a plurality of PO (s) is included in a paging frame (PF), and the PF may be periodically set based on the UE ID.
  • the PF corresponds to one radio frame, and the UE ID may be determined based on the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) of the terminal.
  • IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
  • the terminal When the terminal receives a paging message indicating a change of its ID and / or system information from the PO, the terminal performs a RACH process to initialize (or reset) the connection with the base station, or receives new system information from the base station ( Or acquisition). Accordingly, in performing the above described / proposed procedures and / or methods, PO monitoring may be performed discontinuously in the time domain to perform RACH for connection with a base station or to receive (or obtain) new system information from the base station. Can be.
  • the maximum cycle duration may be limited to 2.56 seconds.
  • a terminal in which data transmission and reception are intermittently performed such as an MTC terminal or an NB-IoT terminal
  • unnecessary power consumption may occur during a DRX cycle.
  • a method of greatly extending the DRX cycle based on a power saving mode (PSM) and a paging time window or a paging transmission window (PTW) has been introduced, and the extended DRX cycle is referred to simply as an eDRX cycle.
  • PSM power saving mode
  • PTW paging transmission window
  • eDRX cycle referred to simply as an eDRX cycle.
  • PH Paging Hyper-frames
  • PTW is defined in the PH.
  • the UE may monitor a paging signal by performing a DRX cycle in a PTW duration to switch to a wake-up mode in its PO.
  • One or more DRX cycles (eg, wake-up mode and sleep mode) of FIG. 19 may be included in the PTW section.
  • the number of DRX cycles in the PTW interval may be configured by the base station through a higher layer (eg, RRC) signal.
  • the BL UE is referred to as an MTC terminal, and more than the MTC terminal function is additionally implemented so that the terminal operating in the CE mode (CE mode, coverage enhanced mode or coverage enhancement mode or coverage extended mode or coverage extension mode) is non-compliant.
  • CE mode CE mode, coverage enhanced mode or coverage enhancement mode or coverage extended mode or coverage extension mode
  • Non-BL UE has the following characteristics compared to MTC terminal.
  • MTC terminal can receive downlink up to 5MHz according to the capability, but non-BL UE can receive up to 20MHz bandwidth in a single component carrier.
  • the MTC terminal assumes a single receive antenna, the non-BL UE has at least two receive antennas in its implementation, and whether to use a single or multiple antennas in the CE mode operation is currently an implementation issue. .
  • MTC terminal calculates CSI (Channel State Information) based on CRS (Cell Reference Signal or Common Reference Signal) and supports only one rank, it is 4x1 vector.
  • CRS Cell Reference Signal or Common Reference Signal
  • PMI Precoding Matrix Indicator
  • a non-BL UE can support CSI calculation assuming four or more transmit antennas, and can perform CSI-RS based CSI calculation and received signal strength / quality measurement.
  • the difference of MPDCCH / PDSCH resource mapping according to CSI-RS configuration is already implemented.
  • the non-BL UE does not operate in the CE mode, that is, when operating in the LTE mode (LTE mode) according to the category (category) or capability (capability) of the terminal does not require a variety of existing MTC It has a function. Whether to use such a function additionally in the CE mode operation is a terminal implementation issue, but in order to use it more effectively, it is necessary to define a special configuration and procedure for a non-BL UE in a standard technology and support it.
  • the present invention is directed to a UE (non-BL UE and BL UE) in a power saving mode or a low power mode.
  • UE non-BL UE and BL UE
  • the same / similarity may also be applied when operating in a mode). Therefore, in the proposal of the present invention, "CE mode” may be replaced with "power saving mode” or "low power mode”.
  • the non-BL UE When the non-BL UE operates in CE mode, the non-BL UE may be a paging channel or information (especially an emergency channel such as earthquake and tsunami warning system (ETWS) or commercial mobile alert system (CMAS)). Information) may be configured to be received through an LTE paging channel rather than a paging channel for the MTC UE. That is, since it is assumed that the MTC terminal is mainly designed for power saving and low cost, the paging channel monitoring is limited to be performed only in the RRC idle mode, or The cycle can be quite long.
  • non-BL UEs generally have better processing power than MTC terminals and are already implemented to read (receive and detect) LTE channels. Acquisition via an LTE channel other than the MTC channel may be allowed.
  • resources eg, time / frequency resource allocation and RNTI of (M) PDCCH and PDSCH that a non-BL UE may attempt to detect paging by the base station operating in CE mode
  • resources eg, time / frequency resource allocation and RNTI of (M) PDCCH and PDSCH that a non-BL UE may attempt to detect paging by the base station operating in CE mode
  • related parameters can be set.
  • the non-BL UE having such a configuration may receive the LTE channel by ignoring the corresponding MTC channel, or attempt to detect a related message in both the MTC channel and the LTE channel.
  • the method may require the following procedure.
  • a system or RAT or operation mode in which the terminal operates in an RRC connected mode may be referred to as a first system or RAT or operation mode, and the terminal is in an RRC idle mode.
  • a system or a RAT or an operation mode operating in an RRC idle mode may be referred to as a second system or an RAT or an operation mode.
  • the first system or RAT or operation mode may refer to a system or RAT or operation mode used to perform data transmission / reception after completing a random access procedure to obtain an RRC connection
  • a second system or The RAT or operating mode may refer to a system or RAT or operating mode used to attempt to receive a specific channel (eg, paging channel) after the RRC connection is released.
  • the first system or RAT or mode of operation is a system or RAT or mode of operation that is not configured to support power reduction and coverage extension or enhancement (CE) (or repeated transmission and reception of signals for this purpose).
  • CE coverage extension or enhancement
  • the second system or RAT or mode of operation may refer to a system or RAT or mode of operation configured to support power savings and coverage expansion or enhancement (CE) (or repeated transmission and reception of signals for this purpose).
  • CE power savings and coverage expansion or enhancement
  • the first system or RAT or mode of operation may refer to a system or RAT or mode of operation set to operate in wideband and the second system or RAT or mode of operation may be set to operate in narrowband. It may refer to a system or a RAT or an operation mode.
  • the first system or the RAT or the operation mode may be collectively referred to as the first system or the first RAT
  • the second system or the RAT or the operation mode may be collectively referred to as the second system or the second RAT.
  • the first system may be an LTE system or an NR system
  • the second system may be an MTC system or an NB-IoT system or an NR-light (NR-light or NR-lite) system.
  • a base station is any third channel that a terminal may appear as inter-RAT (Radio Access Technology) from another system (e.g., LTE or NR or MTC or NB-IoT system).
  • Inter-RAT Radio Access Technology
  • the UE may transmit UE_ID (which may assume the same value) and DRX cycle information, P-RNTI, etc.) to be used for calculating a PO (paging occasion).
  • UE_ID refers to UE identification information based on an international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI), and details of determining a DRX cycle, UE_ID, and PF / PO include the entire contents described in 3GPP Technical Specification (TS) 36.304 as a reference.
  • the terminal is based on the information obtained from the base station (resource unit) (resource unit) defined in the corresponding system (LTE, for example, time / frequency resources defined within the LTE system bandwidth) reference signal associated with the channel (A channel may be received / detected based on a reference signal) (LTE as an example and CRS or NR as a DMRS).
  • a base station and a terminal may simultaneously support a first system (eg, an LTE system or an NR system) and a second system (eg, an MTC system, an NB-IoT system, or an NR-lite system), and the base station may support the first system.
  • Configuration information for a specific channel (eg, paging channel) of the second system used for the same purpose as a specific channel (eg, paging channel) may be transmitted to the terminal. More specifically, the base station may transmit configuration information for a specific channel of the second system from the first system to the terminal.
  • the terminal may receive configuration information for a specific channel (eg, paging channel) of the second system from the base station, and more specifically, the terminal may receive configuration information for a specific channel (eg, paging channel) of the second system. Receive from the base station in the system.
  • a specific channel eg, paging channel
  • the base station may transmit a specific channel (eg, paging channel) from the second system to the terminal based on the configuration information.
  • the terminal may receive a specific channel (eg, paging channel) from the base station in the second system based on the configuration information.
  • the terminal When such information (e.g., configuration information for a specific channel of the first system and / or configuration information for a specific channel of the second system) is given from the base station, the terminal selectively selects the same channel reception. It may attempt to receive or detect a specific channel of another system (eg, the second system) only in the interval allowed by the base station.
  • information e.g., configuration information for a specific channel of the first system and / or configuration information for a specific channel of the second system
  • paging channel configuration (or configuration information) of a second system e.g., MTC system and / or NB-IoT system and / or NR-lite system
  • a first system e.g., LTE system or If the paging channel setup (or setup information) of the NR system is all given to the terminal, then the terminal receives more than the paging channel reception of the second system (e.g., the MTC system and / or the NB-IoT system and / or the NR-lite system).
  • Paging channel reception of the first system eg, LTE system or NR system
  • the base station may expect that the terminal does not perform MTC scheduling during the corresponding period.
  • the terminal may or may not be instructed to attempt to receive a paging channel of the first system (eg, LTE system or NR system) even in RRC connected mode. Likewise, it may be allowed not to expect scheduling in the second system (eg, MTC system and / or NB-IoT system and / or NR-light system) in the corresponding interval.
  • the second system e.g., MTC system and / or NB-IoT system and / or NR-light system
  • the terminal registers a registered Radio Access Technology (RAT) (or system) (that is, a RAT that performs a random access procedure, acquires system related information, and performs data transmission / reception).
  • RAT Radio Access Technology
  • the terminal needs to determine in which RAT the operation should be performed after the paging channel is received.
  • the terminal operates in a first system (e.g., LTE system or NR system) in RRC connected mode (after RRC disconnection) and a second system (e.g., MTC system or NB-IoT system or NR in RRC idle mode).
  • a specific channel eg, paging channel
  • a subsequent operation eg, random access procedure
  • This may be a method in which the terminal directly instructs the RAT (or system) to operate after receiving the corresponding channel in the paging channel, and if the subsequent operation cannot be performed in the corresponding RAT (for example, the SNR (Signal- If the to-noise ratio is not high enough or the power is not sufficient in the indicated RAT, the terminal may directly select the RAT and try again from the random access procedure. If the information of the RAT obtained from the base station before the paging channel reception is not sufficient for the communication except the paging reception, the paging channel may include all the information necessary for the subsequent operation or obtain necessary information. It can inform the channel information of the corresponding RAT.
  • the paging channel may include all the information necessary for the subsequent operation or obtain necessary information. It can inform the channel information of the corresponding RAT.
  • the ID (eg, C-RNTI) of the terminal may be assigned a value different from the ID of the existing RAT in a paging channel or an associated subsequent channel, and if necessary, may perform contention free-based random access (CFRA). Relevant parameters can be provided.
  • C-RNTI contention free-based random access
  • a terminal operates in a first system (eg, an LTE system or an NR system) in an RRC connected mode and a second system (eg, an MTC system or an NB-IoT system in an RRC idle mode). Or NR-lite system) to attempt to receive / detect a particular channel (eg, paging channel).
  • the terminal may operate in a second system (eg, an MTC system or an NB-IoT system or an NR-lite system) in an RRC connected mode, and may use a specific channel (eg, an LTE system or an NR system) in an RRC idle mode.
  • a paging channel may be configured to attempt to receive / detect.
  • a terminal registered in a second system for example, a narrow-band system
  • a second system for example, a narrow-band system
  • a first system e.g., a wide-band system
  • Relevant operations e.g., measures such as measurements required for cell selection / reselection
  • first system e.g., broadband system
  • the RRC idle mode may be configured / allowed to perform mobility related operations (eg, a measurement required for cell selection / reselection, etc.) in the corresponding RAT (first system (eg, broadband system) in the above example).
  • first system e.g., broadband system
  • the terminal may be instructed to monitor paging reception in a first system (e.g., broadband system) (e.g., LTE system or NR system) in RRC idle mode and obtain relevant parameters from the base station.
  • a first system e.g., broadband system
  • LTE system or NR system e.g., LTE system or NR system
  • a terminal registered and communicating in a first system may receive paging in an RRC idle mode.
  • Mobility in RRC idle mode when directed to monitor in a two-system (e.g., narrow-band system) (e.g., MTC system or NB-IoT system or NR-light system).
  • Related operations e.g., operations such as measurements required for cell selection / reselection
  • second system e.g., narrowband system in the above example
  • the mobility-related operation (eg, an operation such as measurement required for cell selection / reselection) in the RRC idle mode may also be configured to be performed by the corresponding RAT (second system (eg, narrowband system) in the above example). If allowed, the terminal is instructed to monitor paging reception in a second system (e.g., narrowband system) (e.g., MTC system or NB-IoT system or NR-light system) in RRC idle mode, and associated parameters. Can be obtained from the base station.
  • a second system e.g., narrowband system
  • the RRC is registered in the second system (e.g., a narrow-band system) (e.g., an MTC system, an NB-IoT system, or an NR-right system) to communicate.
  • a narrow-band system e.g., an MTC system, an NB-IoT system, or an NR-right system
  • paging reception is monitored by a first system (e.g., wide-band system) (e.g., LTE system or NR system) (or a different RAT than the registered RAT).
  • a terminal registered in a first system e.g., a wide-band system
  • a terminal in an RRC idle mode receives a second system (e.g., a narrowband (e.g., When paging monitoring is detected in a narrow-band system (or a different RAT than the registered RAT)
  • the base station directly instructs the system (either narrowband or broadband system) or the RAT in which subsequent operation of the terminal is to be performed, or Or to enter RRC idle mode
  • the system or RAT to operate (send / receive) after paging detection can be set in advance.
  • the terminal desires subsequent operation in a system or a RAT different from the RAT that receives the paging.
  • the terminal may be directly instructed in paging or perform random access in a predetermined system or RAT. This can be announced. That is, in the random access Msg.1 or Msg.3 or later uplink signal / channel transmission process, the terminal may request a base station or a system that you want to operate subsequently, if the base station requests the corresponding RAT The terminal can accept the request of the terminal while providing the necessary information.
  • a terminal registered and operated in a second system is measured for a specific purpose (e.g., for paging channel monitoring or mobility management).
  • the terminal needs the complexity (e.g., Transmit and / or receive bandwidth, transmit and / or receive antennas) or more.
  • the number of receive antennas may still be allowed to use only the number of antennas required or used by the second system (eg, narrowband system). have.
  • Such an operation may be performed only in the case of a terminal capable of supporting the complexity required by the first system (eg, a broadband system) (for example, the transmission and / or reception bandwidth of the terminal, the number of transmission and / or reception antennas). May be allowed.
  • a broadband system for example, the transmission and / or reception bandwidth of the terminal, the number of transmission and / or reception antennas. May be allowed.
  • different RATs or systems may mean LTE, NR, (e) MTC, NB-IoT, NR-Lite, and the like.
  • different repetition levels (or number of repetitions) to support different coverages for paging channel transmission are supported, and accordingly, repetition levels to be applied to subsequent channel transmission / reception after paging reception (
  • the operation / suggestion may be applied to the same RAT or the system by considering the operations for different repetition levels (or the number of repetitions) as operations in different RATs or systems.
  • FIG. 21 illustrates a method for transmitting and receiving a signal between a terminal and a base station according to a method proposed in the present invention (for example, refer to proposals (1-1) to (1-6) in Section H.1).
  • a method proposed in the present invention for example, refer to proposals (1-1) to (1-6) in Section H.1.
  • FIG. 21 is described based on the method proposed in Section H.1, one or more of the methods proposed in Sections H.2 to H.11 may be combined and applied to the example of FIG. 21 without limitation.
  • the first system and the second system may be defined as described in section H.1 above.
  • the terminal and the base station operate in the first system in the RRC connected mode and in the second system in the RRC idle mode, but this is only for clarity of explanation and the proposal of the present invention is It is not limited.
  • the terminal and the base station may be applied to the same / similarly when the terminal and the base station operate in the second system in the RRC connected mode and operate in the first system in the RRC idle mode.
  • the terminal and the base station can support both the first system and the second system (or can be configured to operate in both the first system and the second system).
  • the terminal may correspond to a non-BL UE, and may be a terminal operating in a CE mode by implementing more functions than the MTC terminal (eg, the H method “the method and apparatus proposed by the present invention). " Reference).
  • a terminal may be referred to by other terms such as a user equipment (UE), a mobile station (MS), a user terminal (UT), a subscriber station (SS), a mobile terminal (MT), a wireless device, and the like.
  • the base station (BS) is a wireless device that communicates with a terminal and may be referred to by other terms such as an evolved Node-B (eNB), a General Node-B (gNB), a base transceiver system (BTS), an access point (AP), and the like. (Eg, see Section A herein).
  • the terminal receives the configuration information for the specific channel of the second system from the base station, the base station may transmit the configuration information for the specific channel of the second system to the terminal.
  • the terminal and the base station may operate in the first system (in RRC connected mode), and in this case, configuration information for a specific channel of the second system may be received in the first system.
  • a specific channel may be a channel related to paging, the proposal of the present invention is not limited thereto and may be applied to the same / similarly when the channel is other than the paging channel.
  • the specific channel may be a physical control channel (eg, PDCCH, MPDCCH, NPDCCH) related to paging, or may be a paging channel carrying a paging message.
  • the terminal may attempt to receive / detect a specific channel in the second system in the RRC idle mode based on the configuration information received in operation S2102.
  • the base station may transmit a specific channel in the second system to the terminal of the RRC idle mode based on the configuration information transmitted in step S2102.
  • the terminal may perform a random access procedure in the first system or the second system in response to receiving the specific channel in operation S2104.
  • the terminal may perform a random access procedure and / or subsequent data transmission / reception (referring to data transmission and reception performed after acquiring an RRC connection through a random access procedure) in a preset system (by the base station).
  • a system for performing random access procedure and / or subsequent data transmission / reception may be set by the base station at the time of RRC connection release.
  • the terminal may determine a system to operate after detection of a specific channel among the first system and the second system based on the information received through the specific channel (S2104), and perform a random access procedure in the determined system.
  • the terminal may perform an RRC connection with the base station by performing a random access procedure in the second system in response to the reception of a specific channel and then transmit and receive data with the base station in the first system.
  • the terminal may perform an RRC connection with the base station by performing a direct random access procedure in the first system in response to the reception of a specific channel, and then perform data transmission and reception with the base station in the first system.
  • the terminal may receive information in the first system indicating a system to operate after detection of a specific channel (not shown), and may perform random access procedure and / or subsequent data transmission and reception in the system indicated by the received information. Can be done.
  • the terminal determines a system to operate after detecting / receiving a specific channel, transmits a request for the determined system to the base station, and receives an acceptance of the request from the base station, thereby allowing a random access procedure and And / or subsequent data transmission and reception.
  • the base station may transmit information necessary for operating in the system determined by the terminal to the terminal.
  • the request for the system determined by the terminal is transmitted through a random access preamble (or Msg. 1) or an uplink transmission (or Msg. 3) (or RRC) for a random access response (or Msg. 2). Uplink transmission including a connection request message) or a subsequent uplink signal / channel transmission process.
  • the UE-specific search space (USS) in the RRC connected mode to the non-BL UE operating in the CE mode (CE mode) Receive additional channels, such as Common search space (CSS), and other information such as earthquake and tsunami warning system (ETWS) / commercial mobile alert system (CMAS) (for example, receive paging channels)
  • CCS Common search space
  • EWS earthquake and tsunami warning system
  • CMAS commercial mobile alert system
  • a second search space e.g., a search space that the terminal should receive / attempt in order to receive unicast data in a connected mode (e.g., A first search space (e.g., a search space (e.g., USS) that the device must attempt to receive / detect by default for receiving unicast data in connected mode) while attempting to receive certain CSS, not USS)
  • a first search space e.g., a search space (e.g., USS) that the device must attempt to receive / detect by default for receiving unicast data in connected mode
  • An additional gap may be set that may not receive.
  • the terminal may receive gap setting information related to the search space (or monitoring of the search space) from the base station.
  • the gap setting information may indicate a gap (or gap duration) according to the present invention, and the gap (or gap period) of the present invention may be set based on the gap setting information received from the base station.
  • the gap setting information according to the present invention may be received through system information (or system information block (SIB)) or may be received through higher layer signaling (eg, RRC layer signaling).
  • the gap (or gap section) of the present invention may be set in units of subframes, and the gap setting information may indicate the number of subframes corresponding to the set gap (or gap section).
  • the gap of the present invention may be set in units of slots, and the gap information may indicate the number of slots corresponding to the set gap (or gap period).
  • the gap section may not be applied when the first search space and the second search space may exist in one narrowband NB at a specific time point. In other words, the terminal receives both the first and second search spaces.
  • the gap interval may be applied when the first search space and the second search space exist in different narrow bands (NB) at a specific time point.
  • the terminal may attempt to receive / detect the second search space at a specific time point, and the terminal may not receive / detect the first search space not only at the specific time point but also within the set gap period (or the first search). Postpone reception / detection of space).
  • the gap section may be defined as a section allowed to preferentially receive / detect the first search space and not attempt to detect the second search space.
  • the gap section may be applied to the reception / detection of the second search space, and the terminal may first try to receive / detect the first search space within the gap section, and may detect the second search space within the gap section. May not be received / detected (or may defer receiving / detecting the second search space).
  • the terminal When PDSCH is scheduled in a subframe / slot that overlaps with a set second search space section in time, the terminal receives a second search space / May not be allowed to attempt detection. In this case, the terminal defers or receives / detects the second search space without attempting to receive / detect the second search space in a time interval (eg, a subframe or slot) where the second search space interval and the PDSCH scheduled interval (or PDSCH transmission interval) overlap. Can be skipped. On the other hand, the terminal may receive a scheduled PDSCH in a time interval overlapping the second search space interval.
  • a time interval eg, a subframe or slot
  • the terminal operates in HD-FDD (or is configured to operate in HD-FDD)
  • the UE may be allowed not to attempt to receive / detect a second search space in an overlapping time period (or subframe / slot).
  • the terminal defers or receives / detects the second search space without attempting to receive / detect the second search space in a time interval (eg, a subframe or a slot) where the second search space interval and the PUSCH scheduled interval (or PUSCH transmission interval) overlap. Can be omitted.
  • the terminal may transmit a scheduled PUSCH in a time interval overlapping the second search space interval.
  • the terminal when the terminal operates in HD-FDD (or is configured to operate in HD-FDD), when the terminal is configured to transmit a PRACH in a subframe / slot overlapping in time with the set second search space interval, the terminal overlaps with each other. It may be allowed not to attempt to receive / detect the second search space in the interval (or subframe / slot). Accordingly, the terminal may postpone or omit the reception / detection without attempting to receive / detect the second search space in the time interval (eg, subframe or slot) where the second search space interval and the PRACH transmission interval overlap. On the other hand, the terminal may transmit a PRACH in a time interval overlapping the second search space interval.
  • the terminal may transmit a PRACH in a time interval overlapping the second search space interval.
  • the terminal when the terminal operates in HD-FDD (or is configured to operate in HD-FDD), when the terminal is configured to transmit a PUCCH in a subframe / slot that overlaps in time with the set second search space interval, the terminal overlaps. It may be allowed not to attempt to receive / detect a second search space in a time interval (or subframe / slot). Accordingly, the terminal may postpone or omit the reception / detection without attempting to receive / detect the second search space in a time interval (eg, a subframe or a slot) where the second search space interval and the PUCCH transmission interval overlap. On the other hand, the terminal may transmit the PUCCH in a time interval overlapping the second search space interval.
  • a time interval eg, a subframe or a slot
  • the gap of the present invention is not a second control channel (e.g., a control channel associated with receiving unicast data in connected mode (e.g., a PDCCH scrambled with C-RNTI) but a specific control channel (e.g.
  • P- Receive / detect a first control channel e.g., a control channel (e.g., a PDCCH scrambled with C-RNTI) associated with receiving unicast data in connected mode) while attempting to receive / detect RNTI (scrambled PDCCH) Can be set to not try.
  • a control channel e.g., a PDCCH scrambled with C-RNTI
  • the gap period of the present invention is not applied, and the terminal is not connected with the first control channel even within the gap period. Attempt to receive / detect all second control channels.
  • the terminal is the first control channel within the set gap interval May defer or omit without attempting to receive / detect and attempt to receive / detect a second control channel.
  • the set gap period may be applied to reception / detection of the second control channel.
  • the terminal may preferentially attempt to receive / detect the first control channel within the gap period and may not receive / detect the second control channel within the gap period (or receive / detect the second control channel). Detection can be postponed).
  • the terminal may be allowed not to attempt to receive / detect a second control channel.
  • the terminal postpones or receives / detects the second control channel without attempting to receive / detect the second control channel interval in the time interval (eg, subframe or slot) where the PDSCH scheduled interval (or PDSCH transmission interval) overlaps. Can be skipped.
  • the terminal may receive a scheduled PDSCH in a time interval overlapping the second control channel interval.
  • the same may be applied to a case where a PDSCH scheduled from or associated with a DCI is a PUSCH or a PRACH or a PUCCH.
  • a terminal may be referred to by other terms such as a user equipment (UE), a mobile station (MS), a user terminal (UT), a subscriber station (SS), a mobile terminal (MT), a wireless device, and the like. (Eg, see Section A herein).
  • UE user equipment
  • MS mobile station
  • UT user terminal
  • SS subscriber station
  • MT mobile terminal
  • wireless device and the like.
  • the terminal may correspond to a non-BL UE, and may be a terminal operating in a CE mode by implementing more functions than the MTC terminal (eg, the H method “the method and apparatus proposed by the present invention). " Reference).
  • the terminal may be configured to monitor a common search space (CSS) related to reception of a paging signal in an RRC connected mode.
  • the paging signal may include information such as, for example, earthquake and tsunami warning system (ETWS) / commercial mobile alert system (CMAS), and may be received through a paging channel.
  • the paging channel may be received via a shared channel (eg PDSCH) associated with a control channel (eg PDCCH scrambled with P-RNTI) that is received / detected via CSS.
  • a shared channel eg PDSCH
  • a control channel eg PDCCH scrambled with P-RNTI
  • the terminal may receive gap setting information indicating a gap period of a search space.
  • the gap section refers to a section that is set not to monitor the first search space while monitoring the second search space.
  • the first search space refers to a search space associated with data reception in a connected mode, and more specifically, a search space (eg, USS) to which a terminal should attempt to receive / detect data for unicast data reception.
  • the second search space refers to a specific search space (e.g., CSS) that is not a search space (e.g., USS) that the terminal should attempt to receive / detect (attempt) for receiving unicast data in connected mode. More specifically, it refers to a search space associated with reception of a paging signal.
  • Monitoring refers to the operation of a terminal attempting to receive / detect a search space (or a specific (control) channel in the search space).
  • the terminal may monitor the search space based on the set gap period.
  • the terminal may monitor the second search space and not monitor the first search space in a specific time interval based on the set gap interval (or omit or monitor the monitoring). Can be postponed). More specifically, when a first search space and a second search space are set in different narrowbands (NBs) in a specific time interval, the terminal monitors a second search space in the specific time interval and is based on the gap period. In this particular time interval, the first search space may not be monitored (or the monitoring may be omitted or the monitoring may be delayed). On the other hand, when the first search space and the second search space are set in one narrow band in the specific time interval, the terminal does not apply the gap interval, and the terminal searches for both the first search space and the second search space in the specific time interval. Can be monitored.
  • NBs narrowbands
  • step S2204 when the time interval of the second search space and the physical downlink control channel (PDSCH) reception time interval overlap, the terminal may receive the PDSCH without monitoring the second search space in the overlapping time interval. Or, if the terminal operates in half-duplex frequency division duplex (HD-FDD) and the time interval of the second search space and the PUSCH transmission time interval overlap, the terminal transmits the PUSCH without monitoring the second search space in the overlapping time intervals. Can be. Alternatively, when the terminal operates in HD-FDD and the time interval of the second search space and the PRACH transmission time interval overlap, the terminal may transmit the PRACH without monitoring the second search space in the overlapping time intervals. Alternatively, when the terminal operates in HD-FDD and the time interval of the second search space and the PUCCH transmission time interval overlap, the terminal may transmit the PUCCH without monitoring the second search space in the overlapping time interval.
  • HD-FDD half-duplex frequency division duplex
  • the terminal transmits the PUSCH without monitoring the second search space in the overlapping time
  • the method illustrated in FIG. 22 is not limited to the above description but may be implemented in combination with the methods described in Sections H.1 to H.11. In addition, the method illustrated in FIG. 22 has been described based on the search space but can be described identically / similarly based on the control channel (see, for example, the description of proposal (2) in section H.1).
  • a base station is a wireless device that communicates with a terminal and is referred to by other terms such as an evolved node-B (eNB), a general node-B (gNB), a base transceiver system (BTS), an access point (AP), and the like. (Eg, see section A of this specification).
  • eNB evolved node-B
  • gNB general node-B
  • BTS base transceiver system
  • AP access point
  • the base station may be configured to communicate with a terminal such as a non-BL UE, and the base station may transmit a control channel to the terminal through a common search space (CSS) associated with a paging signal in an RRC connected mode. Can be set to transmit.
  • the paging signal may include information such as, for example, earthquake and tsunami warning system (ETWS) / commercial mobile alert system (CMAS), and may be transmitted through a paging channel.
  • the paging channel may be transmitted over a shared channel (eg PDSCH) associated with a control channel (eg PDCCH scrambled with P-RNTI) transmitted via CSS.
  • the base station may transmit gap setting information indicating a gap period of a search space.
  • the gap period refers to a period in which the terminal is configured not to monitor the first search space while monitoring the second search space (see, for example, proposal (2) in Section H.1). Accordingly, even if the base station does not transmit (or defer or omit transmission) or transmits the first control channel through the first search space while transmitting the second control channel through the second search space based on the gap period, Can be set to not monitor.
  • the definitions of the first search space and the second search space and the monitoring are as described above, so the entire description is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the base station may transmit a control channel through the search space based on the set gap interval (eg, see proposal (2) in section H.1).
  • the terminal may monitor the second search space and not monitor the first search space in a specific time interval based on the set gap interval (or omit monitoring or perform monitoring). Can be postponed).
  • the base station transmits the second control channel through the second search space and transmits the first control channel through the first search space (or postpones the transmission) in the specific time period based on the set gap period. Omitted) or even if the first control channel is transmitted may be set so that the terminal does not monitor.
  • the base station transmits a second control channel through the second search space in the specific time interval.
  • the terminal may be configured not to monitor even if the first control channel is not transmitted (or delayed or omitted) or the first control channel is transmitted through the first search space based on the gap period.
  • the base station does not apply the gap interval, respectively, the base station to the first search space and the second search space in the specific time interval, respectively Both the first control channel and the second control channel can be transmitted.
  • step S2304 if the time interval of the second search space and the physical downlink control channel (PDSCH) transmission time interval overlap, the base station does not transmit (or transmits) the second control channel through the second search space in the overlapping time interval.
  • Delay or omit) PDSCH can be transmitted (see, eg, proposal (2) in section H.1).
  • the base station communicates with a terminal operating in half-duplex frequency division duplex (HD-FDD) and the time interval of the second search space and the PUSCH reception time interval overlap, the base station transmits the second search space through the second search space in the overlapping time interval.
  • the PUSCH may be received without transmitting (or postponing or omitting) the 2 control channel.
  • the terminal when the base station communicates with the terminal operating in HD-FDD and the time interval of the second search space and the PRACH reception time interval overlap, the terminal does not transmit the second control channel through the second search space in the overlapping time interval. (Or defer or omit transmission) may receive a PRACH.
  • the base station when the base station communicates with the terminal operating in HD-FDD and the time interval of the second search space and the PUCCH reception time interval overlap, the terminal does not transmit the second control channel through the second search space in the overlapping time interval. (Or defer or omit transmission) may receive the PUCCH.
  • the method illustrated in FIG. 23 is not limited to the above description but may be implemented in combination with the methods described in sections H.1 to H.11.
  • the CE level selection method and the CE mode setting in the MTC are as follows.
  • the terminal uses CRS-based RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power) as a criterion of the CE level, and the RSRP boundary of each CE level is set by the base station.
  • CRS-based RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
  • RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
  • SINR Signal to Interference & Noise Ratio
  • the terminal selects the CE level by comparing the measured RSRP value and the set RSRP boundary value, and random access using a PRACH resource (for example, time, frequency, preamble ID) configured for the corresponding CE level (Random access) Begin the procedure.
  • a PRACH resource for example, time, frequency, preamble ID
  • the terminal monitors Msg.2 after Msg.1 transmission, and includes time resources (eg, maximum number of repetitive transmissions and subframe positions that can be used) and frequency resources for monitoring Msg.2.
  • time resources eg, maximum number of repetitive transmissions and subframe positions that can be used
  • frequency resources for monitoring Msg.2.
  • a frequency resource eg, narrowband location
  • the terminal When the terminal detects Msg. 2, the terminal transmits Msg. 3 as indicated by the uplink grant (UL grant) of the corresponding RAR.
  • the time / frequency resource (MPDCCH indicating Msg.3 retransmission or MPDCCH scheduling Msg.4) to be monitored by the terminal is determined by system information and Msg.2 random access response. Is determined by
  • a time / frequency resource for monitoring Msg.2 and a downlink time / frequency resource to be monitored after Msg.3 transmission may be defined as MPDCCH and / or PDSCH related parameters in Type-2 CSS.
  • MPDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • PDSCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • mpdcch-NarrowbandsToMonitor and Rmax are set by SIB2.
  • the terminal determines the CE mode by the CE level that transmits Msg.1 until the CE mode is set by the base station.
  • CE levels 0 and 1 correspond to CE mode A, and the remaining CE levels assume CE mode B to perform subsequent operations.
  • the random access procedure may perform a procedure different from that of the general MTC terminal in consideration of the type of the terminal (for example, the number of receiving antennas, the receiving bandwidth, the computing capability, etc.). That is, the non-BL UE may proceed with random access in the following manner.
  • RSRP ' the RSRP value selected by the terminal is newly defined (hereinafter referred to as RSRP ').
  • RSRP 'used as a reference value of CE level selection in a random access procedure may be different from RSRP used in RRM (Radio Resource Management). That is, RSRP 'which is used as a criterion for CE level selection may consider adding a specific offset to the RSRP measured by the terminal based on the CRS.
  • the specific offset value may be a parameter that may be set to a non-zero value only for the non-BL UE, and the offset may be a value for reflecting the reception signal quality of the terminal.
  • the condition for setting the offset value to reflect the reception signal quality may be at least the number of reception antennas and / or reception techniques to be used in Msg.2 and / or Msg.4.
  • the number of the receiving antennas of the terminal is one or more, it may be a value proportional to the number of antennas or a specific fixed value (for example, 3 dB when the number of terminal receiving antennas is two).
  • the offset can be allowed to use non-zero values (greater than zero).
  • the offset value is applied to a value other than 0 in RSRP ', it may be allowed only when the CE mode is not changed. That is, CE level 2 or CE level 3 belonging to CE mode B may not be allowed to be changed to CE level 1 or CE level 0 by applying an offset value.
  • Msg.1 is transmitted at the CE level selected based on RSRP, if Msg.1 transmit power is equal to or greater than the maximum output power of the terminal, the use of non-zero values in RSRP 'offset may be restricted. Can be.
  • Msg.1 is transmitted at the CE level selected based on RSRP, if the difference between Msg.1 transmit power and the maximum output power of the terminal is less than or equal to a specific value, a non-zero value at RSRP 'offset May be restricted.
  • the base station defines a specific reference format so that the MPRPCH and / or PDSCH reception performance (e.g., block error rate (BLER)) does not meet a certain criterion based on the format. Use of nonzero values may be restricted.
  • the reference format is a specific repetition number of the DCDCCH and / or PDSCH, DCI format (DCI format), PMI, which can be used to infer / simulate Msg.2 or Msg.4 reception performance.
  • Information related to a code rate, an aggregation level, and the like may be included.
  • Msg.2 is not received within a specific window or Msg.3 has been sent many times but random access procedure is not completed, Msg.3 may be retransmitted several times within a specific window or Msg.1 may not be received. In case of retransmission, use of non-zero value in RSRP 'offset may be restricted.
  • the number of antennas used for Msg.2 reception and Msg.3 retransmission or MPDCCH monitoring for Msg.4 PDSCH scheduling shall be equal to or greater than the number of receive antennas assumed for CE level selection.
  • the terminal uses a non-zero value as the offset value of the proposed RSRP 'when the CE level is selected, the terminal determines that the information (for example, the offset value or offset value used when selecting the CE level is greater than 0). It is necessary to inform the base station in Msg. 3 or later operation of the reason (e.g., the number of multiple receive antennas assumed / used or used multiple receive antennas).
  • the information for example, the offset value or offset value used when selecting the CE level is greater than 0. It is necessary to inform the base station in Msg. 3 or later operation of the reason (e.g., the number of multiple receive antennas assumed / used or used multiple receive antennas).
  • CE level selection for transmitting Msg.1 is selected based on the use of one receiving antenna, and additionally reporting the number of receiving antennas of the terminal to Msg.3.
  • the terminal informs that it is a non-BL UE in Msg.3, or the number of available reception antennas (the number of antennas to be used for downlink reception after Msg.3, and MPDCCH (MPDCCH) in Type2-CSS. in type2-CSS), at least the number of receive antennas reported in Msg.3 should be used), so that subsequent procedures may be different from MTC terminals based on a single receive antenna. can do.
  • the maximum number of repetitive transmissions (Rmax) and / or the aggregation level (AL) of the type 2-CSS MPDCCH is the reception capability (for example, the number of reception antennas) that the UE reports to Msg. 3 a value previously set for the MTC terminal. It can be interpreted differently according to.
  • the maximum number of repetitive transmissions (Rmax) and / or the aggregation level (AL) of the type 2-CSS MPDCCH are the same as the values previously set for the MTC terminal, but the PDSCH (for example, corresponding to Msg. 4) in the MPDCCH You can reset the maximum number of repetitive transmissions. That is, in this case, the terminal may be interpreted differently according to the maximum number of repetitive transmissions in which information indicating PDSCH repetitive transmission scheduled in the MPDCCH is reset, and the maximum number of repetitive transmissions and the number of repetitive transmissions of the scheduled PDSCH are reset. May be transmitted on the same MPDCCH.
  • the terminal may set a preset MPDCCH and / or PDSCH parameter value according to a reception capability (eg, the number of reception antennas) reported by Msg.3. Can be interpreted differently.
  • the operation and setting may be applied differently depending on the RRC state.
  • an operation of a terminal assuming multiple reception antennas is valid only in an RRC connected state, and there may be an operation and configuration assuming a single reception antenna in an RRC idle state. This may be because the terminal prefers a single receive antenna operation for power saving in the RRC idle state.
  • the terminal does not need to report information related to reception performance required when using a single antenna to the base station. have.
  • the reception performance assuming a single antenna is a CE level (CE level), RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power) / RSRQ (Reference Signal Received Power), CE mode (CE mode), MPDCCH repetition frequency (specific block error rate (BLER) ), And the number of repetitive transmissions of the MPDCCH to satisfy ().
  • a measurement reference resource for deriving the information may also be set by the base station. That is, unlike conventional measurement reference resources for measuring downlink channel quality, a measurement reference resource for downlink channel quality measurement according to the number of receiving antennas may be newly set, which is related to the RRC state. It may not be. If the terminal wants to operate assuming multiple reception antennas in the RRC idle mode, the information reporting can be omitted. In addition, when changing the number of receiving antennas in the RRC idle mode (for example, changing from a multiple receiving antenna to a single receiving antenna or from a single receiving antenna to a multiple receiving antenna), a change request is requested through a random access procedure. It is also possible for the base station to separately configure the Msg.1 resource for this.
  • the measurement reference resource configuration and the change of the reception antenna according to the number of reception antennas are changed, respectively, and the measurement reference resource setting and the reception scheme change for downlink channel quality or reception performance measurement / prediction according to the reception scheme are changed.
  • the measurement reference resource setting and the reception scheme change for downlink channel quality or reception performance measurement / prediction according to the reception scheme are changed.
  • the base station may further set measurement reference resources for reception performance measurement / prediction and reporting according to the reception technique of the terminal.
  • the measurement reference resource may be independently set for each reception scheme, or may independently measure and report information (eg, information corresponding to downlink channel quality) according to the reception scheme for each measurement reference resource.
  • the information reported for each reception technique may be reported only for the previously reported information and the differential value.
  • the information on the reception quality may be a repetition number, CQI, PMI information for the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH.
  • the base station may request to change the reception scheme of the terminal, and the terminal may reject it.
  • the terminal may request the base station to change the reception scheme that the terminal intends to use, and the base station may accept or reject it.
  • the reason for the change of the receiving scheme may be informed together, which may affect the subsequent operation expected by the terminal when the request is accepted. For example,
  • the yield improvement is the reason for the change of the reception scheme, it can be expected that the rank and / or PMI information is included in the DCI or the range of presentation is increased, and the rank is included in the downlink channel quality report information. And / or PMI information may be included or set to increase the presentation range.
  • the expression range of the Rmax value or the repetition number of the MPDCCH and / or the PDSCH may be changed, and thus the interpretation method of the DCI may be changed.
  • the expression range of the measurement value reported by the terminal may also be defined / set differently.
  • the expression range of the Rmax value or the number of repetitions of the MPDCCH and / or the PDSCH may be changed, and thus, the method of interpreting the DCI may be changed.
  • the period of measurement and reporting of the terminal may be changed or the expression range of the measurement report may be defined / set differently.
  • SR scheduling request
  • SRS Sound Reference Signal
  • the reason for the PRACH transmission, the SR transmission, and the SRS transmission in the above may be due to a change in the reception scheme.
  • the procedure may be different according to the number of antennas used previously.
  • the reason for changing to use multiple receive antennas is to receive more than one MIMO layer or to achieve higher throughput, It is necessary to report the purpose with the request to change the number of receiving antennas. That is, if the base station needs to change information such as DCI configuration in order to schedule one or more MIMO layers, set up a suitable CSI-RS, or request CSI information reporting, it must be reported / requested to the base station. There is.
  • the operation of assuming the number of receiving antennas of the terminal is accepted until the base station receives acceptance of the request for changing the number of receiving antennas of the terminal (both requested by the base station or the terminal requests).
  • the terminal needs to follow everything. That is, the terminal and the base station need to operate assuming that all operations related to DCI configuration / interpretation and measurement report, etc. are the same as before until the reception antenna number change request is accepted or for a predetermined time.
  • the method of receiving a request for changing the number of receiving antennas may be explicit or implicit, and in the case of implicit acceptance, the MPDCCH-related Rmax may be newly set or PDSCH-related TM (Transmission Mode), rank ( Rank), CSI feedback mode (CSI feedback mode), Rmax may be newly set.
  • PDSCH-related TM Transmission Mode
  • rank rank
  • CSI feedback mode CSI feedback mode
  • the terminal may operate by assuming a different number of receiving antennas for each downlink channel, and the base station may schedule the corresponding channel in consideration of this.
  • type1-CSS (MPDCCH search space used for paging and system information update notification and PDSCH scheduled with the corresponding MPDCCH)
  • type2-CSS MPDCCH search space used in the random access procedure and PDSCH scheduled with the corresponding MPDCCH
  • the number of receive antennas assumed for Msg.4 monitoring may differ from the number of receive antennas used or assumed for Msg.2 monitoring and may differ from the number of receive antennas assumed for CE level selection.
  • MPDCCH and PDSCH parameters may be set in consideration of the number of receiving antennas of the terminal, Given a setting value of or may be allowed to interpret differently depending on the actual use or set number of receiving antennas, one setting assuming a reference number of receiving antennas (for example, the number of single receiving antennas).
  • the DCI format and / or size may be different in the case of assuming a single receive antenna and a multiple receive antenna, and interpretation of the DCI may also be different.
  • the DCI may be the same as the UL grant (UL grant) irrespective of the number of receiving antennas of the terminal, and the reception of the terminal only for downlink grant (DL grant) and / or information related to the CSI feedback (CSI feedback)
  • DL grant downlink grant
  • CSI feedback information related to the CSI feedback
  • Other formats and / or sizes and / or interpretations may be allowed depending on the number of antennas.
  • a field indicating the number of repetitions of a DL grant may be as small as N bits (eg, 1), which N bits may be used to extend RI (Rank Indicator) and / or PMI information. Can be.
  • Type 0-CSS search space in which DCI for uplink power control is carried, search space in which MPDCCH is scrambling with TPC-PUCCH-RNTI
  • the DCI format and / or size and / or interpretation indicating uplink power control may be defined so as not to be affected by the number of reception antennas of the terminal.
  • the UE / base station operation related to the present embodiment will be briefly summarized.
  • the UE receives configuration information related to the measurement from the base station.
  • the UE performs measurement using a reference signal (RS) for measurement based on the received configuration information.
  • RS reference signal
  • the UE then reports the information about the measurement to the base station on the specific resource.
  • the base station transmits configuration information related to the measurement to the UE.
  • the base station receives information on the measurement on a specific resource from the UE.
  • the number of receive antennas used for RLM (Radio Link monitoring) can be assumed / defined otherwise.
  • the number of receiving antennas to be assumed may be set differently.
  • the terminal using the multiple receive antennas counts the number of out-of-syncs or checks the in-sync when the out-of-sync occurs a certain number of times (for example, once). It may always be necessary to perform RLM using multiple receive antennas.
  • the reference DCI format / size for determining in-sync and out-out-sync is different from when using a single reception antenna. Can be defined / applied.
  • a measurement reference resource for channel state information (CSI) acquisition may be defined differently according to the number of receiving antennas.
  • the CSI measurement reference resource / signal may be configured to use CSI-RS rather than CRS.
  • CSI-RS when the CSI-RS is configured, a specific rule may be defined so that there is no confusion in terms of MPDCCH and PDSCH and resource mapping.
  • resources shared with other users may not expect CSI-RS transmission, or may perform MPDCCH and / or PDSCH rate matching on the assumption that there is no CSI-RS. have.
  • the UE may expect CSI-RS transmission and assume that the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH in the corresponding RE are punctured by the CSI-RS to perform a reception operation.
  • Rate matching, puncturing, and dropping used in the present invention may be interpreted in the same sense.
  • the channel (MPDCCH and / or associated PDSCH) associated with the UE-specific search space (USS) can be expected that the configured CSI-RS is transmitted, rate matching can be expected for REs other than the CSI-RS RE.
  • the measurement gap may be set shorter than that of a single receive antenna.
  • the resource mapping scheme of the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH in the measurement interval interval is conventional (MPDCCH / PDSCH is repeated for repeated transmission during the measurement interval interval). Unlike count, which is assumed to be a drop, it can be set to postpone.
  • a measurement gap represents a period in which the UE can use to perform the measurement, and UL and DL transmissions are not scheduled in that period.
  • the UE receives an RRC signaling including a measurement interval from the base station and performs measurement on a specific signal based on the measurement interval.
  • the measurement interval may be set in a frequency band different from the active BWP (UE BWP) in which the UE transmits and receives a signal, in which case the UE may use RF retuning (or frequency band switching). frequency band switching) to take measurements during the measurement interval.
  • UE BWP active BWP
  • RF retuning or frequency band switching
  • the time used to switch or reconfigure RF may be further defined or set.
  • a measurement reference resource / signal for CSI acquisition may be set to CSI-RS.
  • the operation and resource mapping of the associated terminal may be as follows.
  • CE level selection is performed based on CRS-based RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power), but after measurement report is performed based on CSI-RS, MPDCCH and / or CSI-RS measurement is performed based on CSI-RS measurement.
  • Resource related configuration eg, Rmax, NB, resource allocation type, etc.
  • both CSIs are repeatedly transmitted in MPDCCH and / or PDSCH resources. It can be puncturing or rate-matching assuming there is an RS.
  • the criteria for puncturing or rate matching may vary depending on whether the corresponding resource is shared with other terminals. For example, when the resource is shared with other terminals, puncturing or resource mapping assuming that the corresponding CSI-RS is not transmitted may be applied.
  • MPDCCH and / or PDSCH rate matching considering CSI-RS RE may be applied.
  • the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH resource mapping may be different from the case in which the CSI-RS is not transmitted in the time / frequency resource in which the CSI-RS is transmitted.
  • the CSI-RS configuration information needs to be shared with all terminals using time / frequency resources over which the CSI-RS is transmitted.
  • CSI-RS configuration information may be required, which is set to RRC or CSI-RS to the corresponding resource in DCI scheduling PDSCH. It can be implemented in a way to indicate the presence or absence of RS.
  • the terminal may interpret the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH to be punctured or rate matched to the CSI-RS RE location in the process of mapping the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH.
  • the number of repetitive transmissions of the PDSCH (the actual number of repetitive transmissions or the set maximum number of repetitive transmissions), the CSI-RS transmission period (for example, the ratio of resources for which the CSI-RS is transmitted within a specific time interval), Depending on whether it is shared with the user, it can be interpreted differently between puncturing and rate matching.
  • the resource is shared with other users, it is interpreted as puncturing; if it is a resource limited to a specific terminal group or itself, it is rate matching; if it is less than a specific number of repetitive transmissions, it is interpreted as rate matching (or puncturing). Can be.
  • the resource mapping relationship between the CSI-RS, the MPDCCH, and the PDSCH may be set as follows.
  • Resource element which is used as CSI-RS in LTE EPDCCH, is processed as rate matching in EPDCCH resource mapping process, and when determining ECCE aggregation level (n. N EPDCCH count in EPDCCH ⁇ 104) is calculated without including the CSI-RS RE.
  • the RE used as the CSI-RS is punctured during the MPDCCH resource mapping process, and the CSI-RS RE is included in determining the ECCE aggregation level. This is because the MTC terminal does not receive the CSI-RS configuration, and therefore it is not possible to know exactly whether the CSI-RS exists.
  • the CSI-RS configuration can be understood when the non-BL terminal is operating in the CE mode (that is, if it can receive related configuration information from the base station), the CSI can be distinguished from the CSI. It may be determined whether the RS RE is to be processed by puncturing or MP matching the MPDCCH resource mapping. In addition, in determining the ECCE aggregation level, whether to include the CSI-RS RE may be different. Based on this, a simple example may be as follows.
  • Type 0 and / or Type 1 and / or Type 2 CSS does not expect CSI-RS transmission, or calculates the number of REs used for MPDCCH transmission to determine ECCE aggregation level even when expecting CSI-RS transmission. Also counts the CSI-RS transmitted RE
  • the CSI-RS transmitted REs are not counted.
  • whether the CSI-RS RE is considered in determining the resource mapping relationship and the merge level between the MPDCCH and the CSI-RS may vary depending on Rmax (maximum number of repetitive transmissions) in the corresponding search space of the MPDCCH. For example, when Rmax is larger than a specific value, the MPDCCH is punctured for the CSI-RS RE, and the CSI-RS may be set to be included in the number of REs considered in determining the merge level.
  • a PDSCH e.g., an MPDCCH scrambled with C-RNTI or SPS-C-RNTI
  • the terminal (s) that understands the CSI-RS configuration expect to receive or If the CSI-RS transmission is reserved within the corresponding resource, it can be expected that the PDSCH is rate matched except for the RE used for the CSI-RS transmission.
  • the reserved CSI-RS transmission may not be expected. However, some REs of the PDSCH can be expected to be punctured by the CSI-RS. At this time, it can be expected that puncturing by CSI-RS does not occur in PDSCH resources for which CSI-RS transmission is not reserved.
  • whether the PDSCH is rate matched or punctured with respect to the RE used for the CSI-RS transmission may be differently applied according to the PDSCH transmission method.
  • rate matching may be applied when PDSCH repetitive transmission is less than a specific value or CSI-RS transmission is reserved for all PDSCH resources used for PDSCH repetitive transmission.
  • whether CSI-RS transmission is reserved in the PDSCH repetitive transmission may be limited to a redundancy version (RV) unit. That is, when the RV is changed between repetitive transmissions and when CSI-RS transmission is reserved for only some PDSCH resources between all repetitive transmissions, the same RV is continuously transmitted (based on BL / CE DL subframe) in the subframe.
  • RV redundancy version
  • a method different from other intervals of PDSCH repeated transmission may be applied in the corresponding interval.
  • TM PDSCH transmission mode
  • TM2 Space Frequency Block Coding (SFBC) or Frequency Shift Transmit Diversity (FSTD)
  • SFBC Space Frequency Block Coding
  • FSTD Frequency Shift Transmit Diversity
  • the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH resource configuration may be different, which is higher layer message (e.g., For example, after a plurality of resource sets are set for each terminal type through an RRC or an upper layer message, a specific setting is set within the corresponding set based on DCI (or MAC (Medium Access Control)). Control element (CE) based).
  • Rmax can be set independently for each transmission mode (TM).
  • TM transmission mode
  • the terminal When changing TM, the terminal changes the setting of MPDCCH and / or PDSCH to the Rmax value set for the TM, or scales based on the Rmax value (actual Rmax value or reference TM) to be used in the TM. may be reset.
  • a fallback TM is defined as a TM that can be used regardless of the type of the terminal or to be used when a specific event occurs
  • the Rmax value to be used in the corresponding fallback TM may be independently set.
  • the fallback TM may also be used as a reference TM in setting the Rmax of another TM.
  • Rmax may be different between the MPDCCH and the PDSCH.
  • Rmax can be set independently for each rank.
  • the term 'independence' includes a case where there is no relation and may be applied to a case where the value is different.
  • the PDSCH Rmax may be changed according to the rank of the PDSCH scheduled in the MPDCCH, and the corresponding Rmax may be scaled based on the previously set PDSCH Rmax (based on Rank 1) or for rank 2 It may be a preset value.
  • the PDSCH Rmax may be changed according to the rank previously reported by the UE, and the corresponding Rmax may be scaled based on a previously set PDSCH Rmax (based on Rank 1) or may be a preset value for rank 2.
  • the terminal may relate to the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH resources according to previously reported CSI information (eg, RI, PMI, CQI information, etc.) and / or previously scheduled PDSCH information (eg, RI, TM, etc.).
  • CSI information eg, RI, PMI, CQI information, etc.
  • PDSCH information eg, RI, TM, etc.
  • Information eg, Rmax, DCI format / size, DCI field configuration, TM, etc.
  • Rmax DCI format / size, DCI field configuration, TM, etc.
  • the newly expected Rmax value in the proposal may also be applied to a method of changing the configuration and state interpretation of the actual repetition number that can be expected in the DCI according to Rmax. have.
  • the non-BL UE When the non-BL UE operates in the CE mode, it requests the base station directly for its reception mode (for example, the number of reception antennas, the reception bandwidth, the receiver method, etc.) or the reception mode from the base station. You can be directed. This is not necessarily the case for non-BL UEs only, and if the terminal supports more than the minimum reception mode required by the system (ie implementation / operation that is generally considered more complex than minimum reception mode implementation / operation). The same can be applied to.
  • the minimum reception mode required by the system ie implementation / operation that is generally considered more complex than minimum reception mode implementation / operation. The same can be applied to.
  • the terminal may make a request to the base station to transmit / receive in the RRC idle mode in a mode different from the reception mode operating in the RRC connected mode, and the base station accepts the request.
  • parameters related to the reception mode of the terminal may be set. This is especially true if you want to operate in a receive mode where the downlink receive performance degradation is expected to occur (eg, when the number of receive antennas and / or receive bandwidth is reduced) rather than the receiver mode that was operating in the RRC connected mode. You need to go through the request and acceptance process.
  • the parameters may be indirectly set from the performance difference before / after the reception mode change without directly indicating the transmission / reception related parameters required in the RRC idle mode. For example, when operating with two receive antennas and then with one receive antenna in RRC idle mode, the maximum number of repetitive transmissions of a paging channel can be interpreted as twice as large, assuming a 3dB degradation in reception performance. May be
  • the terminal When entering the connected mode from the RRC idle mode, the terminal may report the reception mode related information to the base station or request to change the reception mode in the initial random access (initial random access) process. However, until the related request is accepted or until entering the RRC connection mode (for example, receiving or receiving UE specific RRC configuration information or reporting it and reporting an acknowledgment). You can keep it unchanged.
  • the change of the reception mode of the terminal may be indirectly indicated by the transmission mode change or the rank change of the base station.
  • the method of requesting the terminal to change the reception mode may be a method of changing the rank in the CSI reporting process in addition to directly making a related request as a message.
  • the method of accepting the change of the reception request may be an indirect method through which the base station changes to a transmission mode corresponding to the rank or through a downlink schedule corresponding to the rank.
  • the non-BL UE operating in the CE mode basically transmits / receives a channel having the same structure as that of the MTC terminal (BL / CE UE). Therefore, backward compatibility with existing MTC terminals is one of important considerations, and for this purpose, the CSI-RS configuration method may be different from that of the existing LTE.
  • the CSI-RS referenced by a non-BL UE may be a signal that is already transmitted in a cell for LTE terminals, and the non-BL UE may only understand the configuration for the CSI-RS being transmitted. In order to be able to receive the additional configuration, only the configuration may be received.
  • the CSI-RS is not only used for CSI measurement, but also CSI-RS is transmitted for LTE terminals, so that the corresponding RE (Resource Element) can be ignored during MPDCCH / PDSCH decoding. It may be a setting value.
  • two or more terminals may be configured to receive all corresponding information in a cell common, a CE level common, or a CE mode common. This may be for the PDSCH to be rate matched to the RE except the RE used as the CSI-RS in a specific PDSCH, even for a terminal that does not directly perform CSI measurement based on the CSI-RS.
  • the CSI-RS may be set or defined to be transmitted only when PDSCH scheduling is limited to a specific condition. This may be because, in general, CSI-RS based CSI measurement may require a considerably higher signal-to-noise ratio (SNR).
  • the specific condition means a situation in which the high SNR interval is indirectly represented, for example, CE mode A, CE level 0 or 1, 64QAM scheduling is set, or rank 2 or more is set.
  • the PDSCH may be limited to a case where a modulation order or code rate of the PDSCH previously scheduled has been N or more times above a specific value and the ACK rate is higher than a specific value in a corresponding section.
  • a non-BL UE operating in a CE mode may receive a PDSCH of rank 2 or higher according to a capability such as the number of antennas of a corresponding UE.
  • rank adaptation and Transmission Mode (TM) adaptation may be required.
  • TM adaptation even though the terminal has a (semi-) statically configured TM in LTE, the Space Transmission Block Coding (SFBC) or the default transmission mode in TM1 or TM2 (TM2)
  • SFBC Space Transmission Block Coding
  • TM2 Transmission Mode 1
  • FSTD Frequency Shift Transmit Diversity
  • DCI information supporting rank 2 may include information indicating a fallback TM and / or rank. This may be a form defined and added to a field such as a fallback flag in the DCI.
  • the CE mode non-BL UE terminal configured to receive the TM corresponding to the rank 2 or to monitor the DCI for the rank 2 may perform the rank 2 DCI and the fallback DCI (rank 1 or TM1 / TM2 at least at a specific time). All of the scheduling DCIs) may be required to attempt blind detection.
  • the fallback may be valid information only up to the PDSCH interval scheduled in the DCI, and the independent MPDCCH may be irrelevant thereto.
  • an RCSI value used for a CSI reference resource may be further defined. This may be a value derived from RCSI (csi-NumRepetitionCE) defined for the existing BL / CE UE, and the related information may be a value derived from or additionally set. This is because the rank 2 based PDSCH is generally used in a high SNR region, and thus, the number of reference repetitive transmissions of the PDSCH performance included in the CSI reference resource or represented by the CSI may be lower than the existing value.
  • RCSI csi-NumRepetitionCE
  • rank 2 based PDSCH may also be applied to repetitive transmission.
  • the repeated repeated PDSCH may change the codeword-to-layer mapping relationship and / or the layer-to-antenna port mapping relationship on a specific subframe basis. have. This may vary depending on whether or not frequency hopping.
  • the specific subframe unit is a unit of a redundancy version (RV) or a frequency hopping interval (number of subframes or corresponding subframes consecutively transmitted in the same narrowband in the frequency domain). It may be an integer multiple of.
  • RV redundancy version
  • the mapping rule may also be expressed as a permutation, and may be applied for the purpose of obtaining spatial diversity gain between MIMO layers.
  • a RI (Rank Indicator, Field for indicating Rank) field may exist in a DL grant that schedules a downlink shared channel.
  • the interpretation of a specific field in the corresponding DCI may vary depending on the value of the field. For example, there may be a Transport Block Size (TBS) and a Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS), which may be relatively high because SNR and data rate may be high when spatial multiplexing is supported. This may be because a low TBS or MCS is unnecessary and may be aimed at minimizing the increase in DCI size by reinterpreting the field.
  • TBS Transport Block Size
  • MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
  • TBS and MCS may be defined with new values, or some of the states or bits may be used for other purposes if they do not use a particular state (for example, a lower range of values). Can be reinterpreted.
  • a specific field may be utilized for other purposes when the RI value is not 1, for example, a field for indicating on / off of frequency hopping is always interpreted as off, and the field is It can be used for other purposes.
  • the base station When the non-BL UE operates in the CE mode and reports to the base station that some reception functions that can be used in the normal mode may or may be operated in the CE mode, the base station reports the terminal.
  • the maximum number of repetitive transmissions and / or the maximum number of repetitive transmissions of the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH may be separately added or reconfigured.
  • reception techniques such as MRC, MMSE-IRC, eMMSE-IRC, ML, CRS-IC, Network-Assisted Interference Cancellation and Suppression (NAICS), and Inter-Stream Interference Cancellation (ISIC) improve reception performance.
  • Some parameters in the previously defined CE modes A and B e.g., the maximum number of repetitive transmissions and / or the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH are actual maximum repetitions that can be indicated by DCI for the maximum repetitive transmission). This is because the number of transmissions) may not be appropriate or may be excessively large compared to the reception performance when the reception scheme is supported.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates a block diagram of a wireless communication device to which the methods proposed herein can be applied.
  • a wireless communication system includes a base station 2410 and a plurality of terminals 2420 located in a base station area.
  • the base station may be represented by a transmitting device, the terminal may be represented by a receiving device, and vice versa.
  • the base station and the terminal are a processor (processor, 2411, 2421), memory (memory, 2414, 2424), one or more transmit (Tx) / receive (Rx) radio frequency module (2415, 2425) (or RF transceiver), Tx processors 2412 and 2422, Rx processors 2413 and 2423 and antennas 2416 and 2426.
  • the processor implements the salping functions, processes and / or methods above.
  • downlink DL communication from the base station to the terminal
  • upper layer packets from the core network are provided to the processor 2411.
  • the processor implements the functionality of the L2 layer.
  • a processor provides multiplexing and radio resource allocation between a logical channel and a transport channel to a terminal 2420 and is responsible for signaling to the terminal.
  • the transmit (TX) processor 2412 implements various signal processing functions for the L1 layer (ie, the physical layer).
  • the signal processing function facilitates forward error correction (FEC) in the terminal and includes coding and interleaving.
  • FEC forward error correction
  • the encoded and modulated symbols are divided into parallel streams, each stream mapped to an OFDM subcarrier, multiplexed with a reference signal (RS) in the time and / or frequency domain, and using an Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT).
  • RS reference signal
  • IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
  • the OFDM stream is spatially precoded to produce multiple spatial streams.
  • Each spatial stream may be provided to a different antenna 2416 through separate Tx / Rx modules (or transceivers 2415).
  • Each Tx / Rx module can modulate an RF carrier with each spatial stream for transmission.
  • each Tx / Rx module receives a signal through each antenna 2426 of each Tx / Rx module.
  • Each Tx / Rx module recovers information modulated onto an RF carrier and provides it to a receive (RX) processor 2423.
  • the RX processor implements the various signal processing functions of layer 1.
  • the RX processor may perform spatial processing on the information to recover any spatial stream destined for the terminal. If multiple spatial streams are directed to the terminal, it may be combined into a single OFDMA symbol stream by multiple RX processors.
  • the RX processor uses fast Fourier transform (FFT) to convert the OFDMA symbol stream from the time domain to the frequency domain.
  • FFT fast Fourier transform
  • the frequency domain signal includes a separate OFDMA symbol stream for each subcarrier of the OFDM signal.
  • the symbols and reference signal on each subcarrier are recovered and demodulated by determining the most likely signal placement points sent by the base station. Such soft decisions may be based on channel estimate values. Soft decisions are decoded and deinterleaved to recover the data and control signals originally transmitted by the base station on the physical channel. The corresponding data and control signals are provided to the processor 2421.
  • Each Tx / Rx module (or transceiver) 2425 receives a signal through each antenna 2426.
  • Each Tx / Rx module provides an RF carrier and information to the RX processor 2423.
  • Processor 2421 may be associated with memory 2424 that stores program code and data. The memory may be referred to as a computer readable medium.
  • the proposal of the present invention may be performed by the base station 2410 and the terminal 2420 which are the wireless communication apparatus described with reference to FIG.
  • 25 illustrates a communication system 1 applied to the present invention.
  • a communication system 1 applied to the present invention includes a wireless device, a base station and a network.
  • the wireless device refers to a device that performs communication using a radio access technology (eg, 5G New RAT (Long Term), Long Term Evolution (LTE)), and may be referred to as a communication / wireless / 5G device.
  • the wireless device may be a robot 100a, a vehicle 100b-1, 100b-2, an eXtended Reality (XR) device 100c, a hand-held device 100d, a home appliance 100e. ), IoT (Internet of Thing) device (100f), AI device / server 400 may be included.
  • the vehicle may include a vehicle having a wireless communication function, an autonomous vehicle, a vehicle capable of performing inter-vehicle communication, and the like.
  • the vehicle may include an unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) (eg, a drone).
  • UAV unmanned aerial vehicle
  • XR devices include AR (Augmented Reality) / VR (Virtual Reality) / MR (Mixed Reality) devices, Head-Mounted Device (HMD), Head-Up Display (HUD), television, smartphone, It may be implemented in the form of a computer, a wearable device, a home appliance, a digital signage, a vehicle, a robot, and the like.
  • the portable device may include a smartphone, a smart pad, a wearable device (eg, smart watch, smart glasses), a computer (eg, a notebook, etc.).
  • the home appliance may include a TV, a refrigerator, a washing machine, and the like.
  • IoT devices may include sensors, smart meters, and the like.
  • the base station and the network may be implemented as a wireless device, and the specific wireless device 200a may operate as a base station / network node to other wireless devices.
  • the wireless devices 100a to 100f may be connected to the network 300 through the base station 200.
  • AI Artificial Intelligence
  • the network 300 may be configured using a 3G network, a 4G (eg LTE) network or a 5G (eg NR) network.
  • the wireless devices 100a-100f may communicate with each other via the base station 200 / network 300, but may also communicate directly (e.g. sidelink communication) without going through the base station / network.
  • the vehicles 100b-1 and 100b-2 may perform direct communication (e.g. vehicle to vehicle (V2V) / vehicle to everything (V2X) communication).
  • the IoT device eg, sensor
  • the IoT device may directly communicate with another IoT device (eg, sensor) or another wireless device 100a to 100f.
  • Wireless communication / connection 150a, 150b, 150c may be performed between the wireless devices 100a-100f / base station 200 and base station 200 / base station 200.
  • the wireless communication / connection is various wireless connections such as uplink / downlink communication 150a, sidelink communication 150b (or D2D communication), inter-base station communication 150c (eg relay, integrated access backhaul), and the like.
  • Technology eg, 5G NR
  • wireless communication / connections 150a, 150b, 150c, the wireless device and the base station / wireless device, the base station and the base station may transmit / receive radio signals to each other.
  • the wireless communication / connection 150a, 150b, 150c may transmit / receive signals over various physical channels.
  • a wireless signal for transmission / reception At least some of various configuration information setting processes, various signal processing processes (eg, channel encoding / decoding, modulation / demodulation, resource mapping / demapping, etc.) and resource allocation processes may be performed.
  • 26 illustrates a wireless device that can be applied to the present invention.
  • the first wireless device 100 and the second wireless device 200 may transmit and receive wireless signals through various wireless access technologies (eg, LTE and NR).
  • the ⁇ first wireless device 100 and the second wireless device 200 ⁇ may refer to the ⁇ wireless devices 100a to 100f, the base station 200 ⁇ and / or the ⁇ wireless devices 100a to 100f, wireless of FIG. 25.
  • the first wireless device 100 includes one or more processors 102 and one or more memories 104, and may further include one or more transceivers 106 and / or one or more antennas 108.
  • the processor 102 controls the memory 104 and / or the transceiver 106 and may be configured to implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein.
  • the processor 102 may process the information in the memory 104 to generate the first information / signal, and then transmit the wireless signal including the first information / signal through the transceiver 106.
  • the processor 102 may receive the radio signal including the second information / signal through the transceiver 106 and store the information obtained from the signal processing of the second information / signal in the memory 104.
  • the memory 104 may be coupled to the processor 102 and may store various information related to the operation of the processor 102. For example, the memory 104 may perform instructions to perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor 102 or to perform descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein. Can store software code that includes them.
  • processor 102 and memory 104 may be part of a communication modem / circuit / chip designed to implement wireless communication technology (eg, LTE, NR).
  • the transceiver 106 may be coupled to the processor 102 and may transmit and / or receive wireless signals via one or more antennas 108.
  • the transceiver 106 may include a transmitter and / or a receiver.
  • the transceiver 106 may be mixed with a radio frequency (RF) unit.
  • a wireless device may mean a communication modem / circuit / chip.
  • the second wireless device 200 may include one or more processors 202, one or more memories 204, and may further include one or more transceivers 206 and / or one or more antennas 208.
  • the processor 202 controls the memory 204 and / or the transceiver 206 and may be configured to implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein.
  • the processor 202 may process the information in the memory 204 to generate third information / signal, and then transmit the wireless signal including the third information / signal through the transceiver 206.
  • the processor 202 may receive the radio signal including the fourth information / signal through the transceiver 206 and then store information obtained from the signal processing of the fourth information / signal in the memory 204.
  • the memory 204 may be connected to the processor 202 and store various information related to the operation of the processor 202. For example, the memory 204 may perform instructions to perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor 202 or to perform descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein. Can store software code that includes them.
  • processor 202 and memory 204 may be part of a communication modem / circuit / chip designed to implement wireless communication technology (eg, LTE, NR).
  • the transceiver 206 may be coupled with the processor 202 and may transmit and / or receive wireless signals via one or more antennas 208.
  • the transceiver 206 may include a transmitter and / or a receiver.
  • the transceiver 206 may be mixed with an RF unit.
  • a wireless device may mean a communication modem / circuit / chip.
  • One or more protocol layers may be implemented by one or more processors 102, 202, although not limited thereto.
  • one or more processors 102 and 202 may implement one or more layers (eg, functional layers such as PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, SDAP).
  • One or more processors 102, 202 may employ one or more Protocol Data Units (PDUs) and / or one or more Service Data Units (SDUs) in accordance with the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein. Can be generated.
  • PDUs Protocol Data Units
  • SDUs Service Data Units
  • One or more processors 102, 202 may generate messages, control information, data, or information in accordance with the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein.
  • One or more processors 102, 202 may generate signals (eg, baseband signals) including PDUs, SDUs, messages, control information, data or information in accordance with the functions, procedures, suggestions and / or methods disclosed herein.
  • signals eg, baseband signals
  • One or more processors 102, 202 may receive signals (eg, baseband signals) from one or more transceivers 106, 206, and include descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein.
  • a PDU, an SDU, a message, control information, data, or information can be obtained.
  • One or more processors 102, 202 may be referred to as a controller, microcontroller, microprocessor, or microcomputer.
  • One or more processors 102, 202 may be implemented by hardware, firmware, software, or a combination thereof.
  • ASICs Application Specific Integrated Circuits
  • DSPs Digital Signal Processors
  • DSPDs Digital Signal Processing Devices
  • PLDs Programmable Logic Devices
  • FPGAs Field Programmable Gate Arrays
  • the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein may be implemented using firmware or software, and the firmware or software may be implemented to include modules, procedures, functions, and the like.
  • the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein may be included in one or more processors (102, 202) or stored in one or more memories (104, 204) of It may be driven by the above-described processor (102, 202).
  • the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein may be implemented using firmware or software in the form of code, instructions, and / or a set of instructions.
  • One or more memories 104, 204 may be coupled to one or more processors 102, 202 and may store various forms of data, signals, messages, information, programs, codes, instructions, and / or instructions.
  • One or more memories 104, 204 may be comprised of ROM, RAM, EPROM, flash memory, hard drive, registers, cache memory, computer readable storage medium, and / or combinations thereof.
  • One or more memories 104, 204 may be located inside and / or outside one or more processors 102, 202.
  • one or more memories 104, 204 may be coupled with one or more processors 102, 202 through various techniques, such as a wired or wireless connection.
  • One or more transceivers 106 and 206 may transmit user data, control information, wireless signals / channels, etc., as mentioned in the methods and / or operational flowcharts of this document, to one or more other devices.
  • One or more transceivers 106 and 206 may receive, from one or more other devices, user data, control information, wireless signals / channels, etc., as mentioned in the description, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein. have.
  • one or more transceivers 106 and 206 may be coupled with one or more processors 102 and 202 and may transmit and receive wireless signals.
  • one or more processors 102 and 202 may control one or more transceivers 106 and 206 to transmit user data, control information or wireless signals to one or more other devices.
  • one or more processors 102 and 202 may control one or more transceivers 106 and 206 to receive user data, control information or wireless signals from one or more other devices.
  • one or more transceivers 106, 206 may be coupled with one or more antennas 108, 208, and one or more transceivers 106, 206 may be connected to one or more antennas 108, 208 through the description, functions, and features disclosed herein.
  • one or more antennas may be a plurality of physical antennas or a plurality of logical antennas (eg, antenna ports).
  • One or more transceivers 106, 206 may process the received wireless signal / channel or the like in an RF band signal to process received user data, control information, wireless signals / channels, etc. using one or more processors 102,202.
  • the baseband signal can be converted.
  • One or more transceivers 106 and 206 may use the one or more processors 102 and 202 to convert processed user data, control information, wireless signals / channels, etc. from baseband signals to RF band signals.
  • one or more transceivers 106 and 206 may include (analog) oscillators and / or filters.
  • FIG. 27 shows another example of a wireless device to which the present invention is applied.
  • the wireless device may be implemented in various forms depending on the use-example / service (see FIG. 25).
  • the wireless devices 100 and 200 correspond to the wireless devices 100 and 200 of FIG. 26, and various elements, components, units / units, and / or modules It can be composed of).
  • the wireless device 100, 200 may include a communication unit 110, a control unit 120, a memory unit 130, and additional elements 140.
  • the communication unit may include communication circuitry 112 and transceiver (s) 114.
  • communication circuitry 112 may include one or more processors 102, 202 and / or one or more memories 104, 204 of FIG. 26.
  • the transceiver (s) 114 may include one or more transceivers 106, 206 and / or one or more antennas 108, 208 of FIG. 26.
  • the controller 120 is electrically connected to the communication unit 110, the memory unit 130, and the additional element 140, and controls various operations of the wireless device. For example, the controller 120 may control the electrical / mechanical operation of the wireless device based on the program / code / command / information stored in the memory unit 130. In addition, the control unit 120 transmits the information stored in the memory unit 130 to the outside (eg, other communication devices) through the communication unit 110 through a wireless / wired interface, or externally (eg, through the communication unit 110). Information received through a wireless / wired interface from another communication device) may be stored in the memory unit 130.
  • the outside eg, other communication devices
  • Information received through a wireless / wired interface from another communication device may be stored in the memory unit 130.
  • the additional element 140 may be configured in various ways depending on the type of wireless device.
  • the additional element 140 may include at least one of a power unit / battery, an I / O unit, a driver, and a computing unit.
  • the wireless device may be a robot (FIGS. 25, 100 a), a vehicle (FIGS. 25, 100 b-1, 100 b-2), an XR device (FIGS. 25, 100 c), a portable device (FIGS. 25, 100 d), a home appliance. (FIG. 25, 100e), IoT device (FIG.
  • the server may be implemented in the form of an AI server / device (FIGS. 25 and 400), a base station (FIGS. 25 and 200), a network node, or the like.
  • the wireless device may be used in a mobile or fixed location depending on the usage-example / service.
  • various elements, components, units / units, and / or modules in the wireless devices 100 and 200 may be entirely interconnected through a wired interface, or at least a part of them may be wirelessly connected through the communication unit 110.
  • the control unit 120 and the communication unit 110 are connected by wire in the wireless device 100 or 200, and the control unit 120 and the first unit (eg, 130 and 140) are connected through the communication unit 110. It can be connected wirelessly.
  • each element, component, unit / unit, and / or module in wireless device 100, 200 may further include one or more elements.
  • the controller 120 may be composed of one or more processor sets.
  • the controller 120 may be configured as a set of a communication control processor, an application processor, an electronic control unit (ECU), a graphics processing processor, a memory control processor, and the like.
  • the memory unit 130 may include random access memory (RAM), dynamic RAM (DRAM), read only memory (ROM), flash memory, volatile memory, and non-volatile memory. volatile memory) and / or combinations thereof.
  • the mobile device may include a smart phone, a smart pad, a wearable device (eg, smart watch, smart glasses), a portable computer (eg, a notebook, etc.).
  • the mobile device may be referred to as a mobile station (MS), a user terminal (UT), a mobile subscriber station (MSS), a subscriber station (SS), an advanced mobile station (AMS), or a wireless terminal (WT).
  • MS mobile station
  • UT user terminal
  • MSS mobile subscriber station
  • SS subscriber station
  • AMS advanced mobile station
  • WT wireless terminal
  • the portable device 100 includes an antenna unit 108, a communication unit 110, a control unit 120, a memory unit 130, a power supply unit 140a, an interface unit 140b, and an input / output unit 140c. ) May be included.
  • the antenna unit 108 may be configured as part of the communication unit 110.
  • Blocks 110 to 130 / 140a to 140c correspond to blocks 110 to 130/140 of FIG. 27, respectively.
  • the communication unit 110 may transmit and receive signals (eg, data, control signals, etc.) with other wireless devices and base stations.
  • the controller 120 may control various components of the mobile device 100 to perform various operations.
  • the control unit 120 may include an application processor (AP).
  • the memory unit 130 may store data / parameters / programs / codes / commands necessary for driving the portable device 100. In addition, the memory unit 130 may store input / output data / information and the like.
  • the power supply unit 140a supplies power to the portable device 100 and may include a wired / wireless charging circuit, a battery, and the like.
  • the interface unit 140b may support the connection of the mobile device 100 to another external device.
  • the interface unit 140b may include various ports (eg, audio input / output port and video input / output port) for connecting to an external device.
  • the input / output unit 140c may receive or output image information / signal, audio information / signal, data, and / or information input from a user.
  • the input / output unit 140c may include a camera, a microphone, a user input unit, a display unit 140d, a speaker, and / or a haptic module.
  • the input / output unit 140c obtains information / signals (eg, touch, text, voice, image, and video) input from the user, and the obtained information / signal is stored in the memory unit 130. Can be stored.
  • the communication unit 110 may convert the information / signal stored in the memory into a wireless signal, and directly transmit the converted wireless signal to another wireless device or to the base station.
  • the communication unit 110 may receive a radio signal from another wireless device or a base station, and then restore the received radio signal to original information / signal.
  • the restored information / signal may be stored in the memory unit 130 and then output in various forms (eg, text, voice, image, video, heptic) through the input / output unit 140c.
  • the vehicle or autonomous vehicle may be implemented as a mobile robot, a vehicle, a train, an aerial vehicle (AV), a ship, or the like.
  • AV aerial vehicle
  • the vehicle or the autonomous vehicle 100 includes an antenna unit 108, a communication unit 110, a control unit 120, a driving unit 140a, a power supply unit 140b, a sensor unit 140c, and autonomous driving. It may include a portion 140d.
  • the antenna unit 108 may be configured as part of the communication unit 110. Blocks 110/130 / 140a through 140d respectively correspond to blocks 110/130/140 in FIG.
  • the communication unit 110 may transmit and receive signals (eg, data, control signals, etc.) with other devices such as another vehicle, a base station (eg, a base station, a road side unit), a server, and the like.
  • the controller 120 may control various elements of the vehicle or the autonomous vehicle 100 to perform various operations.
  • the control unit 120 may include an electronic control unit (ECU).
  • the driving unit 140a may cause the vehicle or the autonomous vehicle 100 to travel on the ground.
  • the driver 140a may include an engine, a motor, a power train, wheels, a brake, a steering device, and the like.
  • the power supply unit 140b supplies power to the vehicle or the autonomous vehicle 100, and may include a wired / wireless charging circuit, a battery, and the like.
  • the sensor unit 140c may obtain vehicle status, surrounding environment information, user information, and the like.
  • the sensor unit 140c includes an inertial measurement unit (IMU) sensor, a collision sensor, a wheel sensor, a speed sensor, an inclination sensor, a weight sensor, a heading sensor, a position module, a vehicle forward / Reverse sensors, battery sensors, fuel sensors, tire sensors, steering sensors, temperature sensors, humidity sensors, ultrasonic sensors, illuminance sensors, pedal position sensors, and the like.
  • the autonomous driving unit 140d is a technology for maintaining a driving lane, a technology for automatically adjusting speed such as adaptive cruise control, a technology for automatically driving along a predetermined route, and automatically setting a route when a destination is set. Technology and the like.
  • the communication unit 110 may receive map data, traffic information data, and the like from an external server.
  • the autonomous driving unit 140d may generate an autonomous driving route and a driving plan based on the obtained data.
  • the controller 120 may control the driving unit 140a to move the vehicle or the autonomous vehicle 100 along the autonomous driving path according to the driving plan (eg, speed / direction adjustment).
  • the communication unit 110 may acquire the latest traffic information data aperiodically from an external server and may obtain the surrounding traffic information data from the surrounding vehicles.
  • the sensor unit 140c may acquire vehicle state and surrounding environment information.
  • the autonomous driving unit 140d may update the autonomous driving route and the driving plan based on the newly obtained data / information.
  • the communication unit 110 may transmit information regarding a vehicle location, an autonomous driving route, a driving plan, and the like to an external server.
  • the external server may predict traffic information data in advance using AI technology or the like based on information collected from the vehicle or autonomous vehicles, and provide the predicted traffic information data to the vehicle or autonomous vehicles.
  • the present invention can be applied not only to 3GPP LTE / LTE-A system / 5G system (or NR (New RAT) system) but also to wireless communication devices such as terminals, base stations, etc. that operate in various wireless communication systems.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to a method for transmitting and receiving a signal to and from a communication apparatus configured to operate in a first system in a radio resource control (RRC) connected mode and an apparatus therefor and, more particularly, to a method comprising the steps of: receiving, from a base station, configuration information for a specific channel of a second system; receiving the specific channel from the second system on the basis of the configuration information in a RRC idle mode; and performing a random access procedure in the first system or the second system in response to the received specific channel, and an apparatus therefor.

Description

무선 통신 시스템에서 신호를 송수신하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치Method for transmitting and receiving signals in a wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
본 발명은 무선 통신 시스템에 관한 것으로서, 보다 상세하게는 단말기 타입에 따라 신호 또는 채널을 송수신하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치에 관한 것이다.The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving a signal or a channel according to a terminal type.
이동 통신 시스템은 사용자의 활동성을 보장하면서 음성 서비스를 제공하기 위해 개발되었다. 그러나 이동통신 시스템은 음성뿐 아니라 데이터 서비스까지 영역을 확장하였으며, 현재에는 폭발적인 트래픽의 증가로 인하여 자원의 부족 현상이 야기되고 사용자들이 보다 고속의 서비스를 요구하므로, 보다 발전된 이동 통신 시스템이 요구되고 있다.Mobile communication systems have been developed to provide voice services while ensuring user activity. However, the mobile communication system has expanded not only voice but also data service.As a result of the explosive increase in traffic, shortage of resources and users demand faster services, a more advanced mobile communication system is required. .
차세대 이동 통신 시스템의 요구 조건은 크게 폭발적인 데이터 트래픽의 수용, 사용자 당 전송률의 획기적인 증가, 대폭 증가된 연결 디바이스 개수의 수용, 매우 낮은 단대단 지연(End-to-End Latency), 고에너지 효율을 지원할 수 있어야 한다. 이를 위하여 이중 연결성(Dual Connectivity), 대규모 다중 입출력(Massive MIMO: Massive Multiple Input Multiple Output), 전이중(In-band Full Duplex), 비직교 다중접속(NOMA: Non-Orthogonal Multiple Access), 초광대역(Super wideband) 지원, 단말 네트워킹(Device Networking) 등 다양한 기술들이 연구되고 있다.The requirements of the next generation of mobile communication systems can support the massive explosive data traffic, the dramatic increase in transmission rate per user, the large increase in the number of connected devices, the very low end-to-end latency, and the high energy efficiency. It should be possible. For this purpose, Dual Connectivity, Massive Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO), In-band Full Duplex, Non-Orthogonal Multiple Access (NOMA), Super Wide Various technologies such as wideband support and device networking have been studied.
본 발명의 목적은 단말기 타입에 따라 신호를 효율적으로 송수신하기 위한 방법 및 이를 위한 장치를 제공하는 데 있다.An object of the present invention is to provide a method and an apparatus therefor for efficiently transmitting and receiving a signal according to a terminal type.
또한, 본 발명의 목적은 페이징 신호 또는 채널을 효율적으로 송수신하기 위한 방법 및 이를 위한 장치를 제공하는 데 있다.It is also an object of the present invention to provide a method and an apparatus therefor for efficiently transmitting and receiving a paging signal or channel.
또한, 본 발명의 목적은 CSI-RS(channel status information reference signal)가 설정된 경우 물리 자원을 효율적으로 매핑하기 위한 방법 및 이를 위한 장치를 제공하는 데 있다.Another object of the present invention is to provide a method and apparatus for efficiently mapping physical resources when a channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS) is set.
또한, 본 발명의 목적은 CE(coverage extension or enhancement) 모드로 동작하는 non-BL(Band reduced and Low cost) UE(User Equipment)를 위한 효율적인 CSI-RS 설정 방법 및 이를 위한 장치를 제공하는 데 있다.Another object of the present invention is to provide an efficient CSI-RS configuration method and apparatus therefor for non-BL (Band reduced and Low cost) user equipment (UE) operating in a coverage extension or enhancement (CE) mode. .
본 발명에서 이루고자 하는 기술적 과제들은 이상에서 언급한 기술적 과제들로 제한되지 않으며, 언급하지 않은 또 다른 기술적 과제들은 아래의 기재로부터 본 발명이 속하는 기술분야에서 통상의 지식을 가진 자에게 명확하게 이해될 수 있을 것이다.Technical problems to be achieved in the present invention are not limited to the above-mentioned technical problems, and other technical problems not mentioned above will be clearly understood by those skilled in the art from the following description. Could be.
본 발명의 제1 양상으로, RRC(radio resource control) 연결 모드(connected mode)에서 제1 시스템에서 동작하도록 구성된 사용자 기기(user equipment, UE)가 신호를 수신하는 방법이 제공되며, 상기 방법은 기지국으로부터 제2 시스템의 특정 채널을 위한 설정 정보를 수신하는 단계; RRC 유휴 모드(idle mode)에서 상기 설정 정보에 기반하여 상기 제2 시스템에서 상기 특정 채널을 수신하는 단계; 및 상기 수신된 특정 채널에 대한 응답으로 상기 제1 시스템 또는 상기 제2 시스템에서 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하는 단계를 포함할 수 있다.In a first aspect of the invention, there is provided a method for receiving a signal by a user equipment (UE) configured to operate in a first system in a radio resource control (RRC) connected mode. Receiving from the configuration information for a particular channel of the second system from; Receiving the specific channel in the second system based on the configuration information in an RRC idle mode; And performing a random access procedure in the first system or the second system in response to the received specific channel.
본 발명의 제2 양상으로, RRC 연결 모드에서 제1 시스템에서 동작하도록 구성된 사용자 기기가 제공되며, RF(Radio Frequency) 송수신기(transceiver); 및 상기 RF 송수신기와 동작시(operatively) 연결되는 프로세서를 포함하되, 상기 프로세서는 상기 RF 송수신기를 제어하여 기지국으로부터 제2 시스템의 특정 채널을 위한 설정 정보를 수신하고, RRC 유휴 모드(idle mode)에서 상기 설정 정보에 기반하여 상기 제2 시스템에서 상기 특정 채널을 수신하고, 상기 수신된 특정 채널에 대한 응답으로 상기 제1 시스템 또는 상기 제2 시스템에서 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하도록 구성될 수 있다.In a second aspect of the present invention, there is provided a user equipment configured to operate in a first system in an RRC connected mode, comprising: a radio frequency (RF) transceiver; And a processor operatively connected to the RF transceiver, wherein the processor controls the RF transceiver to receive configuration information for a specific channel of a second system from a base station, and in an RRC idle mode. The second system may be configured to receive the specific channel based on the configuration information and perform a random access procedure in the first system or the second system in response to the received specific channel.
본 발명의 제3 양상으로, RRC 연결 모드에서 제1 시스템에서 동작하도록 구성된 사용자 기기를 위한 장치가 제공되며, 상기 장치는 실행가능한 코드를 포함하는 메모리; 및 상기 메모리에 동작시 연결되는 프로세서를 포함하되, 상기 프로세서는 상기 실행가능한 코드를 실행하여 특정 동작들을 수행하도록 구성되며, 상기 특정 동작들은, 기지국으로부터 제2 시스템의 특정 채널을 위한 설정 정보를 수신하는 것과, RRC 유휴 모드(idle mode)에서 상기 설정 정보에 기반하여 상기 제2 시스템에서 상기 특정 채널을 수신하는 것과, 상기 수신된 특정 채널에 대한 응답으로 상기 제1 시스템 또는 상기 제2 시스템에서 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하는 것을 포함할 수 있다.In a third aspect of the invention, there is provided an apparatus for a user equipment configured to operate in a first system in an RRC connected mode, the apparatus comprising: a memory comprising executable code; And a processor coupled to the memory in operation, wherein the processor is configured to execute the executable code to perform specific operations, wherein the specific operations receive configuration information for a specific channel of a second system from a base station. And receiving the specific channel in the second system based on the configuration information in an RRC idle mode, and randomly in the first system or the second system in response to the received specific channel. Performing a connection procedure.
바람직하게는, 상기 제2 시스템의 특정 채널을 위한 설정 정보는 상기 제1 시스템에서 수신될 수 있다.Preferably, setting information for a specific channel of the second system may be received at the first system.
바람직하게는, 상기 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하는 것은, 상기 특정 채널을 통해 수신된 정보에 기반하여 상기 제1 시스템과 상기 제2 시스템 중에서 상기 특정 채널의 검출 후에 동작할 시스템을 결정하는 것과, 상기 결정된 시스템에서 상기 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하는 것을 포함할 수 있다.Advantageously, performing the random access procedure comprises: determining a system to operate after detection of the particular channel among the first system and the second system based on the information received through the particular channel; The system may include performing the random access procedure.
바람직하게는, 상기 특정 채널의 검출 후에 동작할 시스템을 지시하는 정보가 상기 제1 시스템에서 수신될 수 있으며, 상기 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하는 것은 상기 지시된 시스템에서 상기 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하는 것을 포함할 수 있다.Advantageously, information indicating a system to operate after detection of said particular channel may be received at said first system, and performing said random access procedure includes performing said random access procedure at said indicated system. can do.
바람직하게는, 상기 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하는 것은, 상기 특정 채널의 검출 후에 동작할 시스템을 결정하는 것과, 상기 결정된 시스템에 대한 요청을 상기 기지국으로 전송하는 것과, 상기 요청에 대한 수락을 상기 기지국으로부터 수신하는 것을 포함할 수 있다.Advantageously, performing the random access procedure includes determining a system to operate after detection of the particular channel, sending a request for the determined system to the base station, and accepting the request from the base station. May include receiving.
더욱 바람직하게는, 상기 결정된 시스템에서 동작하기 위해 필요한 정보가 상기 기지국으로부터 수신될 수 있다.More preferably, information necessary to operate in the determined system may be received from the base station.
더욱 바람직하게는, 상기 요청은 랜덤 접속 프리앰블을 통해 전송될 수 있다.More preferably, the request may be sent via a random access preamble.
더욱 바람직하게는, 상기 요청은 랜덤 접속 응답(random access response)에 대한 상향링크 전송을 통해 전송될 수 있다.More preferably, the request may be sent via uplink transmission for a random access response.
바람직하게는, 상기 특정 채널은 페이징 채널일 수 있다.Preferably, the specific channel may be a paging channel.
바람직하게는, 상기 제2 시스템은 커버리지 확장(coverage extension 또는 coverage enhancement)을 위한 반복 전송을 지원하도록 설정된 시스템이고, 상기 제1 시스템은 커버리지 확장을 위한 반복 전송을 지원하도록 설정되지 않은 시스템일 수 있다.Preferably, the second system may be a system configured to support repetitive transmission for coverage extension or coverage enhancement, and the first system may be a system not configured to support repetitive transmission for coverage extension. .
바람직하게는, 상기 제2 시스템은 협대역(narrowband)에서 동작하도록 설정된 시스템이고, 상기 제1 시스템은 광대역(wideband)에서 동작하도록 설정된 시스템일 수 있다.Preferably, the second system is a system configured to operate in a narrowband, and the first system may be a system configured to operate in a wideband.
바람직하게는, 상기 제2 시스템의 특정 채널을 위한 설정 정보는 상기 제1 시스템에서 RRC 연결 해제(connection release) 시에 수신될 수 있다.Preferably, configuration information for a specific channel of the second system may be received upon RRC connection release in the first system.
본 발명에 따르면, 단말기 타입에 따라 신호를 효율적으로 송수신하기 위한 방법 및 이를 위한 장치를 제공하는 데 있다.According to the present invention, there is provided a method for efficiently transmitting and receiving a signal according to a terminal type and an apparatus therefor.
또한, 본 발명에 따르면, 페이징 신호 또는 채널을 효율적으로 송수신할 수 있다.Further, according to the present invention, it is possible to efficiently transmit and receive a paging signal or channel.
또한, 본 발명에 따르면, CSI-RS(channel status information reference signal)가 설정된 경우 물리 자원을 효율적으로 매핑할 수 있다.In addition, according to the present invention, when a CSI-RS (channel status information reference signal) is set, physical resources can be efficiently mapped.
또한, 본 발명에 따르면, CE(coverage extension or enhancement) 모드로 동작하는 non-BL(Band reduced and Low cost) UE(User Equipment)를 위해 효율적으로 CSI-RS를 설정할 수 있다.In addition, according to the present invention, CSI-RS can be efficiently set for a non-BL (Band reduced and Low cost) user equipment (UE) operating in a coverage extension or enhancement (CE) mode.
본 발명에서 얻을 수 있는 효과는 이상에서 언급한 효과로 제한되지 않으며, 언급하지 않은 또 다른 효과들은 아래의 기재로부터 본 발명이 속하는 기술분야에서 통상의 지식을 가진 자에게 명확하게 이해될 수 있을 것이다.The effect obtained in the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned effects, and other effects not mentioned will be clearly understood by those skilled in the art from the following description. .
본 발명에 관한 이해를 돕기 위해 상세한 설명의 일부로 포함되는, 첨부 도면은 본 발명에 대한 실시 예를 제공하고, 상세한 설명과 함께 본 발명의 기술적 특징을 설명한다.BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The accompanying drawings, which are included as part of the detailed description in order to provide a thorough understanding of the present invention, provide embodiments of the present invention and together with the description, describe the technical features of the present invention.
도 1은 3GPP LTE 시스템 구조의 일례를 나타낸다.1 shows an example of a 3GPP LTE system structure.
도 2는 3GPP NR 시스템 구조의 일례를 나타낸 도이다.2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a 3GPP NR system structure.
도 3은 3GPP 시스템에 이용되는 물리 채널들 및 일반적인 신호 전송을 예시한다.3 illustrates physical channels and general signal transmission used in a 3GPP system.
도 4는 랜덤 접속 과정(Random Access Procedure)을 예시한다.4 illustrates a random access procedure.
도 5는 LTE 무선 프레임 구조(radio frame structure)를 예시한다. 5 illustrates an LTE radio frame structure.
도 6은 LTE 프레임의 슬롯 구조를 예시한다.6 illustrates a slot structure of an LTE frame.
도 7은 LTE 시스템의 하향링크 서브프레임의 구조를 예시한다.7 illustrates a structure of a downlink subframe of an LTE system.
도 8은 LTE에서 사용되는 상향링크 서브프레임의 구조를 예시한다.8 illustrates a structure of an uplink subframe used in LTE.
도 9는 NR 시스템에서 사용되는 무선 프레임의 구조를 예시한다.9 illustrates a structure of a radio frame used in an NR system.
도 10은 NR 프레임의 슬롯 구조를 예시한다.10 illustrates a slot structure of an NR frame.
도 11은 자기-완비(self-contained) 슬롯의 구조를 예시한다.11 illustrates the structure of a self-contained slot.
도 12는 MTC에서의 셀 커버리지 향상을 예시한다.12 illustrates cell coverage enhancement in MTC.
도 13은 MTC를 위한 신호 대역을 예시한다.13 illustrates a signal band for MTC.
도 14는 레가시 LTE와 MTC에서의 스케줄링을 예시한다.14 illustrates scheduling in legacy LTE and MTC.
도 15는 NB-IoT 하향링크 물리 채널/신호의 전송을 예시한다. 15 illustrates transmission of an NB-IoT downlink physical channel / signal.
도 16은 NR 시스템에서 네트워크 초기 접속 및 이후의 통신 과정을 예시한다.16 illustrates a network initial access and subsequent communication process in an NR system.
도 17은 NB-IoT RACH에서 프리앰블 전송을 예시한다.17 illustrates preamble transmission on an NB-IoT RACH.
도 18은 PDCCH의 불연속 수신을 위한 DRX 사이클을 예시한다.18 illustrates a DRX cycle for discontinuous reception of a PDCCH.
도 19는 페이징을 위한 DRX 사이클을 예시한다.19 illustrates a DRX cycle for paging.
도 20은 확장된 DRX(extended DRX, eDRX) 사이클을 예시한다.20 illustrates an extended DRX (eDRX) cycle.
도 21 내지 도 23은 본 발명의 제안에 따라 단말기와 기지국이 신호를 송수신하는 방법의 흐름도를 예시한다. 21 to 23 illustrate a flowchart of a method for transmitting and receiving a signal between a terminal and a base station according to the proposal of the present invention.
도 24 내지 도 29는 본 발명에서 제안하는 방법들이 적용될 수 있는 시스템 및 통신 장치를 예시한다.24 to 29 illustrate a system and a communication device to which the methods proposed in the present invention can be applied.
본 명세서에서, 하향링크(DL: downlink)는 기지국에서 단말로의 통신을 의미하며, 상향링크(UL: uplink)는 단말에서 기지국으로의 통신을 의미한다. 하향링크에서 송신기는 기지국의 일부이고, 수신기는 단말의 일부일 수 있다. 상향링크에서 송신기는 단말의 일부이고, 수신기는 기지국의 일부일 수 있다.In the present specification, downlink (DL) means communication from a base station to a terminal, and uplink (UL) means communication from a terminal to a base station. In downlink, a transmitter may be part of a base station, and a receiver may be part of a terminal. In uplink, a transmitter may be part of a terminal, and a receiver may be part of a base station.
본 명세서에서 설명된 기술은 CDMA, FDMA, TDMA, OFDMA, SC-FDMA 등과 같은 다양한 무선 접속 시스템에 사용될 수 있다. CDMA는 UTRA(Universal Terrestrial Radio Access)나 CDMA2000과 같은 무선 기술로 구현될 수 있다. TDMA는 GSM(Global System for Mobile communications)/GPRS(General Packet Radio Service)/EDGE(Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution)와 같은 무선 기술로 구현될 수 있다. OFDMA는 IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, E-UTRA(Evolved UTRA) 등과 같은 무선 기술로 구현될 수 있다. UTRA는 UMTS(Universal Mobile Telecommunications System)의 일부이다. 3GPP(3rd Generation Partnership Project) LTE(Long Term Evolution)은 E-UTRA를 사용하는 E-UMTS(Evolved UMTS)의 일부이고 LTE-A(Advanced)/LTE-A pro는 3GPP LTE의 진화된 버전이다. 3GPP NR(New Radio or New Radio Access Technology) 또는 5G는 3GPP LTE/LTE-A/LTE-A pro의 진화된 버전이다. The techniques described herein can be used in various radio access systems such as CDMA, FDMA, TDMA, OFDMA, SC-FDMA, and the like. CDMA may be implemented with a radio technology such as Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA) or CDMA2000. TDMA may be implemented with wireless technologies such as Global System for Mobile communications (GSM) / General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) / Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution (EDGE). OFDMA may be implemented in a wireless technology such as IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, Evolved UTRA (E-UTRA), or the like. UTRA is part of the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS). 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) Long Term Evolution (LTE) is part of Evolved UMTS (E-UMTS) using E-UTRA and LTE-A (Advanced) / LTE-A pro is an evolution of 3GPP LTE. 3GPP NR (New Radio or New Radio Access Technology) or 5G is an evolution of 3GPP LTE / LTE-A / LTE-A pro.
설명을 명확하게 하기 위해, 3GPP 통신 시스템(예, LTE-A, NR)을 기반으로 설명하지만 본 발명의 기술적 사상이 이에 제한되는 것은 아니다. LTE는 3GPP TS (Technical Specification) 36.xxx Release 8 이후의 기술을 의미한다. 세부적으로, 3GPP TS 36.xxx Release 10 이후의 LTE 기술은 LTE-A로 지칭되고, 3GPP TS 36.xxx Release 13 이후의 LTE 기술은 LTE-A pro로 지칭된다. 3GPP 5G는 TS 36.xxx Release 15 이후의 기술을 의미하고, 3GPP NR은 TS 38.xxx Release 15 이후의 기술을 의미한다. LTE/NR은 3GPP 시스템으로 지칭될 수 있다. "xxx"는 표준 문서 세부 번호를 의미한다. LTE/NR은 3GPP 시스템으로 통칭될 수 있다. 본 발명의 설명에 사용된 배경기술, 용어, 약어 등에 관해서는 본 발명 이전에 공개된 표준 문서에 기재된 사항을 참조할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 다음 문서를 참조할 수 있다.For clarity, the description will be based on 3GPP communication systems (eg, LTE-A, NR), but the technical spirit of the present invention is not limited thereto. LTE refers to technology after 3GPP TS (Technical Specification) 36.xxx Release 8. In detail, the LTE technology after 3GPP TS 36.xxx Release 10 is referred to as LTE-A, and the LTE technology after 3GPP TS 36.xxx Release 13 is referred to as LTE-A pro. 3GPP 5G means technology after TS 36.xxx Release 15, and 3GPP NR means technology after TS 38.xxx Release 15. LTE / NR may be referred to as a 3GPP system. "xxx" means standard document detail number. LTE / NR may be collectively referred to as 3GPP system. Background, terminology, abbreviations, and the like used in the description of the present invention may refer to the matters described in the standard documents published prior to the present invention. For example, see the following document:
3GPP LTE3GPP LTE
- 36.211: Physical channels and modulation36.211: Physical channels and modulation
- 36.212: Multiplexing and channel coding36.212: Multiplexing and channel coding
- 36.213: Physical layer procedures36.213: Physical layer procedures
- 36.300: Overall description36.300: Overall description
- 36.304: User Equipment (UE) procedures in idle mode36.304: User Equipment (UE) procedures in idle mode
- 36.331: Radio Resource Control (RRC)36.331: Radio Resource Control (RRC)
3GPP NR3GPP NR
- 38.211: Physical channels and modulation38.211: Physical channels and modulation
- 38.212: Multiplexing and channel coding38.212: Multiplexing and channel coding
- 38.213: Physical layer procedures for control38.213: Physical layer procedures for control
- 38.214: Physical layer procedures for data38.214: Physical layer procedures for data
- 38.300: NR and NG-RAN Overall Description38.300: NR and NG-RAN Overall Description
- 38.304: User Equipment (UE) procedures in Idle mode and RRC Inactive state38.304: User Equipment (UE) procedures in Idle mode and RRC Inactive state
- 36.331: Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification36.331: Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification
A. 시스템 구조(system architecture)A system architecture
도 1은 3GPP LTE 시스템 구조의 일례를 나타낸다.1 shows an example of a 3GPP LTE system structure.
E-UTRAN (evolved-UMTS terrestrial radio access network) 또는 LTE (long term evolution) / LTE-A / LTE-A Pro / 5G 시스템은 LTE 시스템으로 통칭될 수 있다. 도 1을 참조하면, E-UTRAN은 제어 평면 및 사용자 평면을 단말 (예: UE) (10)에 제공하는 적어도 하나의 기지국 (예: BS) (20)을 포함한다. UE (10)는 고정식 또는 이동식 일 수 있고, MS(mobile station), UT(user terminal), SS(subscriber station), MT(mobile terminal), 무선 디바이스 등과 같은 다른 용어로 지칭될 수 있다. BS (20)는 일반적으로 UE (10)와 통신하는 고정된 station으로 eNB(evolved Node-B), gNB(general Node-B), BTS(base transceiver system), AP(access point) 등과 같은 다른 용어로 지칭 될 수 있다. BS들은 X2 인터페이스를 통해 상호 접속된다. BS들은 또한 S1 인터페이스를 통해 EPC(evolved packet core)에, 더 상세하게는 S1-MME를 통해 MME(mobility management entity)로, 그리고 S1-U를 통해 S-GW(serving gateway)로 연결된다. EPC는 MME, S-GW 및 P-GW(packet data network-gateway)를 포함한다. UE와 네트워크 간의 무선 인터페이스 프로토콜의 계층은 통신 시스템에서 잘 알려진 OSI (Open System Interconnection)의 하부 3 계층에 기초하여 제 1 계층 (L1), 제 2 계층 (L2) 및 제 3 계층 (L3) 모델을 사용하여 분류될 수 있다. 그 중에서 제 1 계층에 속한 물리 계층 (PHY)은 물리 채널을 이용하여 정보 전송 서비스를 제공하고, 제 3 계층에 속한 RRC (Radio Resource Control) 계층은 UE와 network 사이에서 무선 자원을 제어한다. 이를 위해, RRC 계층은 UE와 기지국 간에 RRC 메시지를 교환한다.E-UTRAN (evolved-UMTS terrestrial radio access network) or LTE (long term evolution) / LTE-A / LTE-A Pro / 5G system may be collectively referred to as LTE system. Referring to FIG. 1, an E-UTRAN includes at least one base station (eg, BS) 20 that provides a control plane and a user plane to a terminal (eg, a UE) 10. The UE 10 may be fixed or mobile and may be referred to in other terms, such as mobile station (MS), user terminal (UT), subscriber station (SS), mobile terminal (MT), wireless device, and the like. BS 20 is generally a fixed station that communicates with UE 10. Other terms such as evolved Node-B (eNB), General Node-B (gNB), base transceiver system (BTS), access point (AP), etc. It may be referred to as. BSs are interconnected via an X2 interface. BSs are also connected to an evolved packet core (EPC) via an S1 interface, more specifically to a mobility management entity (MME) via S1-MME, and to a serving gateway (S-GW) via S1-U. EPCs include MME, S-GW and packet data network-gateway (P-GW). The layer of the air interface protocol between the UE and the network uses the first layer (L1), second layer (L2) and third layer (L3) models based on the lower three layers of Open System Interconnection (OSI), which are well known in communication systems. Can be classified using. Among them, the physical layer (PHY) belonging to the first layer provides an information transmission service using a physical channel, and the RRC (Radio Resource Control) layer belonging to the third layer controls radio resources between the UE and the network. To this end, the RRC layer exchanges RRC messages between the UE and the base station.
도 2는 3GPP NR 시스템 구조의 일례를 나타낸 도이다.2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a 3GPP NR system structure.
도 2를 참조하면, NG-RAN은 NG-RA 사용자 평면(새로운 AS sublayer/PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY) 및 UE(User Equipment)에 대한 제어 평면(RRC) 프로토콜 종단을 제공하는 gNB들로 구성된다. 상기 gNB는 Xn 인터페이스를 통해 상호 연결된다. 상기 gNB는 또한, NG 인터페이스를 통해 NGC로 연결된다. 보다 구체적으로는, 상기 gNB는 N2 인터페이스를 통해 AMF (Access and Mobility Management Function)로, N3 인터페이스를 통해 UPF (User Plane Function)로 연결된다.Referring to FIG. 2, the NG-RAN consists of gNBs that provide control plane (RRC) protocol termination for the NG-RA user plane (new AS sublayer / PDCP / RLC / MAC / PHY) and user equipment (UE). do. The gNBs are interconnected via an Xn interface. The gNB is also connected to the NGC via an NG interface. More specifically, the gNB is connected to an Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF) through an N2 interface and to a User Plane Function (UPF) through an N3 interface.
B. 물리 채널 및 프레임 구조(frame structure)B. Physical Channels and Frame Structures
물리 채널 및 일반적인 신호 전송Physical channel and general signal transmission
도 3은 3GPP 시스템에 이용되는 물리 채널들 및 일반적인 신호 전송을 예시한다. 무선 통신 시스템에서 단말은 기지국으로부터 하향링크(Downlink, DL)를 통해 정보를 수신하고, 단말은 기지국으로 상향링크(Uplink, UL)를 통해 정보를 전송한다. 기지국과 단말이 송수신하는 정보는 데이터 및 다양한 제어 정보를 포함하고, 이들이 송수신 하는 정보의 종류/용도에 따라 다양한 물리 채널이 존재한다.3 illustrates physical channels and general signal transmission used in a 3GPP system. In a wireless communication system, a terminal receives information through a downlink (DL) from a base station, and the terminal transmits information through an uplink (UL) to the base station. The information transmitted and received between the base station and the terminal includes data and various control information, and various physical channels exist according to the type / use of the information transmitted and received.
전원이 꺼진 상태에서 다시 전원이 켜지거나, 새로이 셀에 진입한 단말은 기지국과 동기를 맞추는 등의 초기 셀 탐색(Initial cell search) 작업을 수행한다(S11). 이를 위해 단말은 기지국으로부터 PSS(Primary Synchronization Signal) 및 SSS(Secondary Synchronization Signal)을 수신하여 기지국과 동기를 맞추고, 셀 ID(cell identity) 등의 정보를 획득한다. 또한, 단말은 기지국으로부터 PBCH(Physical Broadcast Channel)를 수신하여 셀 내 방송 정보를 획득할 수 있다. 또한, 단말은 초기 셀 탐색 단계에서 DL RS(Downlink Reference Signal)를 수신하여 하향링크 채널 상태를 확인할 수 있다.When the power is turned off while the power is turned off, or a new terminal enters a cell, an initial cell search operation such as synchronization with a base station is performed (S11). To this end, the terminal receives a primary synchronization signal (PSS) and a secondary synchronization signal (SSS) from the base station, synchronizes with the base station, and acquires information such as a cell identity. In addition, the terminal may receive a broadcast broadcast (PBCH) from the base station to obtain broadcast information in the cell. In addition, the UE may check the downlink channel state by receiving a DL RS (Downlink Reference Signal) in the initial cell search step.
초기 셀 탐색을 마친 단말은 PDCCH(Physical Downlink Control Channel) 및 이에 대응되는 PDSCH(Physical Downlink Control Channel)를 수신하여 좀더 구체적인 시스템 정보를 획득할 수 있다(S12).After completing the initial cell search, the UE may obtain more specific system information by receiving a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) and a physical downlink control channel (PDSCH) corresponding thereto (S12).
이후, 단말은 기지국에 접속을 완료하기 위해 랜덤 접속 과정(Random Access Procedure)(예, 도 4 및 관련 설명 참조)을 수행할 수 있다(S13~S16). 구체적으로, 단말은 PRACH(Physical Random Access Channel)를 통해 랜덤 접속 프리앰블을 전송하고(S13), PDCCH 및 이에 대응하는 PDSCH를 통해 프리앰블에 대한 RAR(Random Access Response)을 수신할 수 있다(S14). 이후, 단말은 RAR 내의 스케줄링 정보를 이용하여 PUSCH(Physical Uplink Shared Channel)을 전송하고(S15), PDCCH 및 이에 대응하는 PDSCH과 같은 충돌 해결 절차(Contention Resolution Procedure)를 수행할 수 있다(S16).Thereafter, the terminal may perform a random access procedure (for example, see FIG. 4 and related description) to complete the access to the base station (S13 to S16). In more detail, the UE may transmit a random access preamble through a physical random access channel (PRACH) (S13) and receive a random access response (RAR) for the preamble through a PDCCH and a PDSCH corresponding thereto (S14). Thereafter, the UE may transmit a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) using scheduling information in the RAR (S15) and perform a contention resolution procedure such as a PDCCH and a PDSCH corresponding thereto (S16).
상술한 바와 같은 절차를 수행한 단말은 이후 일반적인 상향/하향링크 신호 전송 절차로서 PDCCH/PDSCH 수신(S17) 및 PUSCH/PUCCH(Physical Uplink Control Channel) 전송(S18)을 수행할 수 있다. 단말이 기지국으로 전송하는 제어 정보를 UCI(Uplink Control Information)라고 지칭한다. UCI는 HARQ ACK/NACK(Hybrid Automatic Repeat and reQuest Acknowledgement/Negative-ACK), SR(Scheduling Request), CSI(Channel State Information) 등을 포함한다. CSI는 CQI(Channel Quality Indicator), PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator), RI(Rank Indication) 등을 포함한다. UCI는 일반적으로 PUCCH를 통해 전송되지만, 제어 정보와 데이터가 동시에 전송되어야 할 경우 PUSCH를 통해 전송될 수 있다. 또한, 네트워크의 요청/지시에 따라 단말은 PUSCH를 통해 UCI를 비주기적으로 전송할 수 있다.After performing the above procedure, the UE may perform PDCCH / PDSCH reception (S17) and PUSCH / PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel) transmission (S18) as a general uplink / downlink signal transmission procedure. Control information transmitted from the terminal to the base station is referred to as uplink control information (UCI). UCI includes Hybrid Automatic Repeat and reQuest Acknowledgment / Negative-ACK (HARQ ACK / NACK), Scheduling Request (SR), Channel State Information (CSI), and the like. The CSI includes a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI), a Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI), a Rank Indication (RI), and the like. The UCI is generally transmitted through the PUCCH, but may be transmitted through the PUSCH when control information and data should be transmitted at the same time. In addition, the UE may transmit the UCI aperiodically through the PUSCH according to the request / instruction of the network.
도 4는 랜덤 접속 과정(Random Access Procedure)을 예시한다.4 illustrates a random access procedure.
랜덤 접속 과정은 RRC 유휴 모드(RRC Idle Mode)(또는 RRC_IDLE 상태)에서의 초기 접속, 무선 링크 실패 후의 초기 접속, 랜덤 접속 과정을 요구하는 핸드오버, RRC 연결 모드(RRC Connected Mode)(또는 RRC_CONNECTED 상태) 중에 랜덤 접속 과정이 요구되는 상향링크/하향링크 데이터 발생시에 수행된다. 랜덤 접속 과정은 RACH(Random Access CHannel) 과정으로 지칭될 수 있다. RRC 연결 요청 메시지(RRC Connection Request Message)와 셀 갱신 메시지(Cell Update Message), URA 갱신 메시지(URA Update Message) 등의 일부 RRC 메시지도 랜덤 접속 과정을 이용하여 전송된다. 논리채널 CCCH(Common Control Channel), DCCH(Dedicated Control Channel), DTCH(Dedicated Traffic Channel)가 전송채널 RACH에 매핑될 수 있다. 전송채널 RACH는 물리채널 PRACH(Physical Random Access Channel)에 매핑된다. 단말의 MAC 계층이 단말 물리계층에 PRACH 전송을 지시하면, 단말 물리계층은 먼저 하나의 접속 슬롯(access slot)과 하나의 시그너처(signature)를 선택하여 PRACH 프리앰블을 상향링크로 전송한다. 랜덤 접속 과정은 경쟁 기반(contention based) 과정과 비경쟁 기반(non-contention based) 과정으로 구분된다.The random access procedure may include an initial access in RRC Idle Mode (or RRC_IDLE state), an initial access after a radio link failure, a handover requiring a random access process, an RRC Connected Mode (or RRC_CONNECTED state). ) Is performed when uplink / downlink data is generated that requires a random access procedure. The random access process may be referred to as a random access channel (RACH) process. Some RRC messages, such as an RRC connection request message, a cell update message, and an URA update message, are also transmitted using a random access procedure. The logical channels Common Control Channel (CCCH), Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH), and Dedicated Traffic Channel (DTCH) may be mapped to the transport channel RACH. The transport channel RACH is mapped to a physical channel physical random access channel (PRACH). When the MAC layer of the UE instructs the UE physical layer to transmit PRACH, the UE physical layer first selects one access slot and one signature and transmits the PRACH preamble in uplink. The random access process is classified into a contention based process and a non-contention based process.
도 4를 참조하면, 단말은 시스템 정보를 통해 기지국으로부터 랜덤 접속에 관한 정보를 수신하여 저장한다. 그 후, 랜덤 접속이 필요하면, 단말은 랜덤 접속 프리앰블(Random Access Preamble; 메시지 1 또는 Msg1이라고도 함)을 기지국으로 전송한다(S21). 랜덤 접속 프리앰블은 RACH 프리앰블 또는 PRACH 프리앰블로 지칭될 수 있다. 기지국이 상기 단말로부터 랜덤 접속 프리앰블을 수신하면, 상기 기지국은 랜덤 접속 응답 메시지(Random Access Response; 메시지 2 또는 Msg2라고도 함)를 단말에게 전송한다(S22). 구체적으로, 상기 랜덤 접속 응답 메시지에 대한 하향 스케줄링 정보는 RA-RNTI(Random Access-RNTI)로 CRC 마스킹되어 L1/L2 제어 채널(PDCCH) 상에서 전송될 수 있다. RA-RNTI로 마스킹된 하향 스케줄링 신호를 수신한 단말은 PDSCH(Physical Downlink Shared Channel)로부터 랜덤 접속 응답 메시지를 수신하여 디코딩할 수 있다. 그 후, 단말은 상기 랜덤 접속 응답 메시지에 자신에게 지시된 랜덤 접속 응답 정보가 있는지 확인한다. 자신에게 지시된 랜덤 접속 응답 정보가 존재하는지 여부는 단말이 전송한 프리앰블에 대한 RAID(Random Access preamble ID)가 존재하는지 여부로 확인될 수 있다. 상기 랜덤 접속 응답 정보는 동기화를 위한 타이밍 옵셋 정보를 나타내는 타이밍 어드밴스(Timing Advance; TA), 상향링크에 사용되는 무선자원 할당정보, 단말 식별을 위한 임시 식별자(예: Temporary C-RNTI) 등을 포함한다. 단말은 랜덤 접속 응답 정보를 수신하면, 상기 응답 정보에 포함된 무선자원 할당 정보에 따라 상향링크 공유 채널(Uplink Shared Channel)로 RRC 연결 요청 메시지를 포함하는 상향링크 전송(메시지 3 또는 Msg3이라고도 함)을 수행한다(S23). 기지국은 단말로부터 상기 상향링크 전송을 수신한 후에, 경쟁 해결(contention resolution)을 위한 메시지(메시지 4 또는 Msg4라고도 함)를 단말에게 전송한다(S24). 경쟁 해결을 위한 메시지는 경쟁 해결 메시지라고 지칭될 수 있으며, RRC 연결 설정 메시지를 포함할 수 있다. 단말은 기지국으로부터 경쟁 해결 메시지를 수신한 후에, 연결 설정을 완료한 후 연결 설정 완료 메시지(메시지 5 또는 Msg5라고도 함)를 기지국으로 전송한다(S25).Referring to FIG. 4, the terminal receives and stores information about a random access from a base station through system information. After that, if a random access is required, the UE transmits a random access preamble (also referred to as message 1 or Msg1) to the base station (S21). The random access preamble may be referred to as a RACH preamble or a PRACH preamble. When the base station receives the random access preamble from the terminal, the base station transmits a random access response message (also referred to as message 2 or Msg2) to the terminal (S22). In detail, downlink scheduling information on the random access response message may be CRC masked by a random access-RNTI (RA-RNTI) and transmitted on an L1 / L2 control channel (PDCCH). Upon receiving the downlink scheduling signal masked with the RA-RNTI, the UE may receive and decode a random access response message from a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH). Thereafter, the terminal checks whether the random access response information includes random access response information indicated to the terminal. Whether the random access response information indicated to the presence of the self may be determined by whether there is a random access preamble (RAID) for the preamble transmitted by the terminal. The random access response information includes a timing advance (TA) indicating timing offset information for synchronization, radio resource allocation information used for uplink, and a temporary identifier (eg, Temporary C-RNTI) for terminal identification. do. When the terminal receives the random access response information, uplink transmission including an RRC connection request message on an uplink shared channel according to radio resource allocation information included in the response information (also referred to as message 3 or Msg3). Perform (S23). After receiving the uplink transmission from the terminal, the base station transmits a message for contention resolution (also referred to as message 4 or Msg4) to the terminal (S24). The message for contention resolution may be referred to as a contention resolution message and may include an RRC connection establishment message. After receiving the contention resolution message from the base station, the terminal completes the connection setup and transmits a connection setup complete message (also called message 5 or Msg5) to the base station (S25).
비경쟁 기반 과정의 경우, 단말이 랜덤 접속 프리앰블을 전송(S21)하기 전에 기지국이 비경쟁 랜덤 접속 프리앰블(Non-contention Random Access Preamble)을 단말에게 할당할 수 있다. 비경쟁 랜덤 접속 프리앰블은 핸드오버 명령(handover command)나 PDCCH와 같은 전용 시그널링(dedicated signaling)을 통해 할당될 수 있다. 단말은 비경쟁 랜덤 접속 프리앰블을 할당받는 경우 S21 단계와 유사하게 할당받은 비경쟁 랜덤 접속 프리앰블을 기지국으로 전송할 수 있다. 기지국은 상기 단말로부터 비경쟁 랜덤 접속 프리앰블을 수신하면, S22 단계와 유사하게 상기 기지국은 랜덤 접속 응답을 단말에게 전송할 수 있다.In the case of a non-competition based process, the base station may allocate a non-contention random access preamble to the terminal before the terminal transmits the random access preamble (S21). The non-competitive random access preamble may be allocated through dedicated signaling such as a handover command or a PDCCH. When the UE receives the non-competitive random access preamble, the UE may transmit the allocated non-competitive random access preamble to the base station similarly to step S21. When the base station receives the non-competitive random access preamble from the terminal, the base station may transmit a random access response to the terminal similarly to the step S22.
무선 프레임(radio frame) 구조Radio frame structure
도 5는 LTE 무선 프레임 구조(radio frame structure)를 예시한다. LTE는 FDD(Frequency Division Duplex)용의 프레임 타입 1, TDD(Time Division Duplex)용의 프레임 타입 2와 UCell(Unlicensed Cell)용의 프레임 타입 3을 지원한다. PCell(Primary Cell)에 부가하여, 최대 31개의 SCell(Secondary Cell)이 병합(aggregated) 될 수 있다. 특별히 기술하지 않는 한, 본 명세서에서 설명하는 동작은 셀마다 독립적으로 적용될 수 있다. 다중-셀 병합 시, 서로 다른 프레임 구조가 서로 다른 셀에 사용될 수 있다. 또한, 프레임 구조 내의 시간 자원(예, 서브프레임, 슬롯, 서브슬롯)은 TU(Time Unit)로 통칭될 수 있다.5 illustrates an LTE radio frame structure. LTE supports frame type 1 for frequency division duplex (FDD), frame type 2 for time division duplex (TDD) and frame type 3 for unlicensed cell (UCell). In addition to the PCell (Primary Cell), up to 31 SCells (Secondary Cells) may be aggregated. Unless specifically stated, the operations described herein may be applied independently for each cell. In multi-cell merging, different frame structures can be used for different cells. In addition, time resources (eg, subframes, slots, and subslots) in the frame structure may be collectively referred to as a time unit (TU).
도 5(a)는 프레임 타입 1을 예시한다. 하향링크 무선 프레임은 10개의 1ms 서브프레임(Subframe, SF)으로 정의된다. 서브프레임은 CP(cyclic prefix)에 따라 14개 또는 12개의 심볼을 포함한다. 보통(normal) CP가 사용되는 경우, 서브프레임은 14개의 심볼을 포함한다. 확장(extended) CP가 사용되는 경우, 서브프레임은 12개의 심볼을 포함한다. 심볼은 다중 접속 방식에 따라 OFDM(A) 심볼, SC-FDM(A) 심볼을 의미할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 심볼은 하향링크에서 OFDM(A) 심볼을 의미하고, 상향링크에서 SC-FDM(A) 심볼을 의미할 수 있다. OFDM(A) 심볼은 CP-OFDM(A)(Cyclic Prefix-OFDM(A)) 심볼로 지칭되고, SC-FDM(A) 심볼은 DFT-s-OFDM(A)(Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM(A)) 심볼로 지칭될 수 있다.5 (a) illustrates frame type 1. The downlink radio frame is defined as ten 1 ms subframes (SFs). The subframe includes 14 or 12 symbols according to a cyclic prefix (CP). If a normal CP is used, the subframe includes 14 symbols. If extended CP is used, the subframe includes 12 symbols. The symbol may mean an OFDM (A) symbol or an SC-FDM (A) symbol according to a multiple access scheme. For example, the symbol may mean an OFDM (A) symbol in downlink and an SC-FDM (A) symbol in uplink. The OFDM (A) symbol is referred to as a Cyclic Prefix-OFDM (A) symbol, and the SC-FDM (A) symbol is a DFT-s-OFDM (A) (Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM) symbol. (A)) may be referred to as a symbol.
서브프레임은 SCS(Subcarrier Spacing)에 따라 다음과 같이 하나 이상의 슬롯으로 정의될 수 있다.The subframe may be defined as one or more slots according to SCS (Subcarrier Spacing) as follows.
- SCS = 7.5 kHz 또는 15 kHz인 경우, 서브프레임 #i는 2개의 0.5ms 슬롯 #2i, #2i+1로 정의된다(i = 0~9).For SCS = 7.5 kHz or 15 kHz, subframe #i is defined as two 0.5ms slots # 2i and # 2i + 1 (i = 0-9).
- SCS = 1.25 kHz인 경우, 서브프레임 #i는 1개의 1ms 슬롯 #2i로 정의된다.When SCS = 1.25 kHz, subframe #i is defined as one 1ms slot # 2i.
- SCS = 15 kHz인 경우, 서브프레임 #i는 6개의 서브슬롯으로 정의될 수 있다.When SCS = 15 kHz, subframe #i may be defined as six subslots.
도 5(b)는 프레임 타입 2를 예시한다. 프레임 타입 2는 2개의 하프 프레임(half frame)으로 구성된다. 하프 프레임은 4 (또는 5)개의 일반 서브프레임과 1 (또는 0)개의 스페셜 서브프레임을 포함한다. 일반 서브프레임은 UL-DL 구성(Uplink-Downlink Configuration)에 따라 상향링크 또는 하향링크에 사용된다. 서브프레임은 2개의 슬롯으로 구성된다.5B illustrates frame type 2. FIG. Frame type 2 consists of two half frames. The half frame includes 4 (or 5) general subframes and 1 (or 0) special subframes. The general subframe is used for uplink or downlink according to the UL-Downlink configuration. The subframe consists of two slots.
상기 설명된 무선 프레임의 구조는 예시에 불과하고, 무선 프레임에 포함되는 서브프레임의 수 또는 서브프레임에 포함되는 슬롯의 수, 슬롯에 포함되는 심볼의 수는 다양하게 변경될 수 있다.The structure of the above-described radio frame is merely an example, and the number of subframes included in the radio frame or the number of slots included in the subframe and the number of symbols included in the slot may be variously changed.
도 6은 LTE 프레임의 슬롯 구조를 예시한다.6 illustrates a slot structure of an LTE frame.
도 6을 참조하면, 슬롯은 시간 도메인에서 복수의 심볼을 포함하고, 주파수 도메인에서 복수의 자원블록(resource block, RB)을 포함한다. 심볼은 심볼 구간을 의미하기도 한다. 슬롯의 구조는 N DL/UL RB×N RB sc개의 서브캐리어(subcarrier)와 N DL/UL symb개의 심볼로 구성되는 자원격자(resource grid)로 표현될 수 있다. 여기서, N DL RB은 하향링크 슬롯에서의 RB의 개수를 나타내고, N UL RB은 UL 슬롯에서의 RB 의 개수를 나타낸다. N DL RB와 N UL RB은 DL 대역폭과 UL 대역폭에 각각 의존한다. N DL symb은 DL 슬롯 내 심볼의 개수를 나타내며, N UL symb은 UL 슬롯 내 심볼의 개수를 나타낸다. N RB sc는 RB를 구성하는 서브캐리어의 개수를 나타낸다. 슬롯 내 심볼의 개수는 SCS, CP 길이에 따라 다양하게 변경될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 보통 CP의 경우 하나의 슬롯이 7개의 심볼을 포함하나, 확장 CP의 경우 하나의 슬롯이 6개의 심볼을 포함한다.Referring to FIG. 6, a slot includes a plurality of symbols in the time domain and a plurality of resource blocks (RBs) in the frequency domain. The symbol may mean a symbol section. The slot structure may be represented by a resource grid composed of N DL / UL RB × N RB sc subcarriers and N DL / UL symb symbols. Here, N DL RB represents the number of RBs in the downlink slot, and N UL RB represents the number of RBs in the UL slot. N DL RB and N UL RB depend on the DL bandwidth and the UL bandwidth, respectively. N DL symb represents the number of symbols in the DL slot, and N UL symb represents the number of symbols in the UL slot. N RB sc represents the number of subcarriers constituting the RB. The number of symbols in the slot can be variously changed according to the length of the SCS, CP. For example, one slot includes 7 symbols in the case of a normal CP, but one slot includes 6 symbols in the case of an extended CP.
RB는 시간 도메인에서 N DL/UL symb개(예, 7개)의 연속적인(consecutive) 심볼로 정의되며, 주파수 도메인에서 N RB sc개(예, 12개)의 연속적인 서브캐리어로 정의된다. 여기서, RB는 PRB(Physical Resource Block) 또는 VRB(Virtual Resource Block)를 의미할 수 있으며, PRB와 VRB는 1대1로 매핑될 수 있다. 서브프레임의 2개의 슬롯 각각에 1개씩 위치하는 2개의 RB를 RB 쌍이라고 한다. RB 쌍을 구성하는 2개의 RB는 동일한 RB 번호(혹은, RB 인덱스라고도 함)를 갖는다. 하나의 심볼과 하나의 서브캐리어로 구성된 자원을 자원요소(resource element, RE) 혹은 톤(tone)이라고 한다. 자원격자 내 각 RE는 슬롯 내 인덱스 쌍 (k, l)에 의해 고유하게 정의될 수 있다. k는 주파수 도메인에서 0부터 N DL/UL RB×N RB sc-1까지 부여되는 인덱스이며, l은 시간 도메인에서 0부터 N DL/UL symb-1까지 부여되는 인덱스이다.RB is defined as N DL / UL symb (e.g. 7) consecutive symbols in the time domain and N RB sc (e.g. 12) consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain. Here, the RB may mean a physical resource block (PRB) or a virtual resource block (VRB), and the PRB and the VRB may be mapped one-to-one. Two RBs, one located in each of two slots of a subframe, are called RB pairs. Two RBs constituting the RB pair have the same RB number (or also referred to as an RB index). A resource composed of one symbol and one subcarrier is called a resource element (RE) or tone. Each RE in a resource grid may be uniquely defined by an index pair (k, l) in a slot. k is an index given from 0 to N DL / UL RB × N RB sc −1 in the frequency domain, and l is an index given from 0 to N DL / UL symb −1 in the time domain.
도 7은 LTE 시스템의 하향링크 서브프레임의 구조를 예시한다.7 illustrates a structure of a downlink subframe of an LTE system.
도 7을 참조하면, 서브프레임 내에서 첫 번째 슬롯의 앞에 위치한 최대 3개 (또는 4개) 의 OFDM(A) 심볼이 하향링크 제어 채널이 할당되는 제어 영역에 해당한다. 남은 OFDM(A) 심볼은 PDSCH가 할당되는 데이터 영역에 해당하며, 데이터 영역의 기본 자원 단위는 RB이다. 하향링크 제어 채널은 PCFICH(Physical Control Format Indicator Channel), PDCCH(Physical Downlink Control Channel), PHICH(Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel) 등을 포함한다. PCFICH는 서브프레임의 첫 번째 OFDM 심볼에서 전송되며 서브프레임 내에서 제어 채널의 전송에 사용되는 OFDM 심볼의 개수에 관한 정보를 나른다. PHICH는 상향링크 전송에 대한 응답이고 HARQ ACK/NACK(acknowledgment/negative-acknowledgment) 신호를 나른다. PDCCH를 통해 전송되는 제어 정보는 DCI(Downlink Control Information)라고 지칭된다. DCI는 상향링크 또는 하향링크 스케줄링 정보 또는 임의의 단말 그룹을 위한 상향링크 전송 전력 제어 명령(Transmit Power Control Command)를 포함한다.Referring to FIG. 7, up to three (or four) OFDM (A) symbols located in front of the first slot in a subframe correspond to a control region to which a downlink control channel is allocated. The remaining OFDM (A) symbols correspond to the data region to which the PDSCH is allocated, and the basic resource unit of the data region is RB. The downlink control channel includes a Physical Control Format Indicator Channel (PCFICH), a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH), a Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel (PHICH), and the like. The PCFICH is transmitted in the first OFDM symbol of a subframe and carries information on the number of OFDM symbols used for transmission of a control channel within the subframe. The PHICH is a response to uplink transmission and carries an HARQ ACK / NACK (acknowledgment / negative-acknowledgment) signal. Control information transmitted through the PDCCH is referred to as downlink control information (DCI). DCI includes uplink or downlink scheduling information or an uplink transmit power control command for a certain group of terminals.
도 8은 LTE에서 사용되는 상향링크 서브프레임의 구조를 예시한다.8 illustrates a structure of an uplink subframe used in LTE.
도 8을 참조하면, 서브프레임(700)은 두 개의 0.5ms 슬롯(701)으로 구성된다. 각 슬롯은 복수의 심볼(702)로 구성되며 하나의 심볼은 하나의 SC-FDMA 심볼에 대응된다. RB(703)는 주파수 영역에서 12개의 서브캐리어, 그리고 시간 영역에서 한 슬롯에 해당되는 자원 할당 단위이다. LTE의 상향링크 서브프레임의 구조는 크게 데이터 영역(704)과 제어 영역(705)으로 구분된다. 데이터 영역은 각 단말로 전송되는 음성, 패킷 등의 데이터를 송신함에 있어 사용되는 통신 자원을 의미하며 PUSCH(Physical Uplink Shared Channel)을 포함한다. 제어 영역은 상향링크 제어 신호, 예를 들어 각 단말로부터의 하향링크 채널 품질보고, 하향링크 신호에 대한 수신 ACK/NACK, 상향링크 스케줄링 요청 등을 전송하는데 사용되는 통신 자원을 의미하며 PUCCH(Physical Uplink Control Channel)를 포함한다. SRS(Sounding Reference Signal)는 하나의 서브프레임에서 시간 축 상에서 가장 마지막에 위치하는 SC-FDMA 심볼을 통하여 전송된다.Referring to FIG. 8, the subframe 700 is composed of two 0.5 ms slots 701. Each slot is composed of a plurality of symbols 702 and one symbol corresponds to one SC-FDMA symbol. The RB 703 is a resource allocation unit corresponding to 12 subcarriers in the frequency domain and one slot in the time domain. The structure of an uplink subframe of LTE is largely divided into a data region 704 and a control region 705. The data area means a communication resource used in transmitting data such as voice and packet transmitted to each terminal, and includes a PUSCH (Physical Uplink Shared Channel). The control region means a communication resource used to transmit an uplink control signal, for example, a downlink channel quality report from each user equipment, a reception ACK / NACK for the downlink signal, an uplink scheduling request, and a PUCCH (Physical Uplink). Control Channel). The sounding reference signal (SRS) is transmitted through the SC-FDMA symbol which is located last on the time axis in one subframe.
도 9는 NR 시스템에서 사용되는 무선 프레임의 구조를 예시한다.9 illustrates a structure of a radio frame used in an NR system.
NR에서 상향링크 및 하향링크 전송은 프레임으로 구성된다. 무선 프레임은 10ms의 길이를 가지며, 2개의 5ms 하프-프레임(Half-Frame, HF)으로 정의된다. 하프-프레임은 5개의 1ms 서브프레임(Subframe, SF)으로 정의된다. 서브프레임은 하나 이상의 슬롯으로 분할되며, 서브프레임 내 슬롯 개수는 SCS(Subcarrier Spacing)에 의존한다. 각 슬롯은 CP(cyclic prefix)에 따라 12개 또는 14개의 OFDM(A) 심볼을 포함한다. 보통 CP(normal CP)가 사용되는 경우, 각 슬롯은 14개의 심볼을 포함한다. 확장 CP(extended CP)가 사용되는 경우, 각 슬롯은 12개의 심볼을 포함한다. 여기서, 심볼은 OFDM 심볼 (혹은, CP-OFDM 심볼), SC-FDMA 심볼 (혹은, DFT-s-OFDM 심볼)을 포함할 수 있다.In NR, uplink and downlink transmission are composed of frames. The radio frame has a length of 10 ms and is defined as two 5 ms half-frames (HFs). The half-frame is defined by five 1 ms subframes (SFs). The subframe is divided into one or more slots, and the number of slots in the subframe depends on the subcarrier spacing (SCS). Each slot includes 12 or 14 OFDM (A) symbols according to a cyclic prefix (CP). When a normal CP is used, each slot includes 14 symbols. If extended CP is used, each slot includes 12 symbols. Here, the symbol may include an OFDM symbol (or CP-OFDM symbol), an SC-FDMA symbol (or DFT-s-OFDM symbol).
표 1은 보통 CP가 사용되는 경우, SCS에 따라 슬롯 별 심볼의 개수, 프레임 별 슬롯의 개수와 서브프레임 별 슬롯의 개수가 달라지는 것을 예시한다. Table 1 exemplarily shows that when CP is used, the number of symbols per slot, the number of slots per frame, and the number of slots per subframe vary according to SCS.
Figure PCTKR2019010004-appb-img-000001
Figure PCTKR2019010004-appb-img-000001
* N slot symb: 슬롯 내 심볼의 개수* N slot symb : Number of symbols in slot
* N frame,u slot: 프레임 내 슬롯의 개수* N frame, u slot : Number of slots in the frame
* N subframe,u slot: 서브프레임 내 슬롯의 개수* N subframe, u slot : Number of slots in subframe
표 2는 확장 CP가 사용되는 경우, SCS에 따라 슬롯 별 심볼의 개수, 프레임 별 슬롯의 개수와 서브프레임 별 슬롯의 개수가 달라지는 것을 예시한다.Table 2 illustrates that when the extended CP is used, the number of symbols per slot, the number of slots per frame, and the number of slots per subframe vary according to SCS.
Figure PCTKR2019010004-appb-img-000002
Figure PCTKR2019010004-appb-img-000002
NR 시스템에서는 하나의 단말에게 병합되는 복수의 셀들간에 OFDM(A) 뉴모놀로지(numerology)(예, SCS, CP 길이 등)가 상이하게 설정될 수 있다. 이에 따라, 동일한 개수의 심볼로 구성된 시간 자원(예, SF, 슬롯 또는 TTI)(편의상, TU(Time Unit)로 통칭)의 (절대 시간) 구간이 병합된 셀들간에 상이하게 설정될 수 있다.In the NR system, OFDM (A) numerology (eg, SCS, CP length, etc.) may be set differently among a plurality of cells merged into one UE. Accordingly, the (absolute time) section of a time resource (eg, SF, slot, or TTI) (commonly referred to as a time unit (TU) for convenience) composed of the same number of symbols may be set differently between merged cells.
도 10은 NR 프레임의 슬롯 구조를 예시한다.10 illustrates a slot structure of an NR frame.
슬롯은 시간 도메인에서 복수의 심볼을 포함한다. 예를 들어, 보통 CP의 경우 하나의 슬롯이 14개의 심볼을 포함하나, 확장 CP의 경우 하나의 슬롯이 12개의 심볼을 포함한다. 반송파는 주파수 도메인에서 복수의 서브캐리어를 포함한다. RB(Resource Block)는 주파수 도메인에서 복수(예, 12)의 연속한 서브캐리어로 정의된다. BWP(Bandwidth Part)는 주파수 도메인에서 복수의 연속한 (P)RB로 정의되며, 하나의 뉴모놀로지(numerology)(예, SCS, CP 길이 등)에 대응될 수 있다. 반송파는 최대 N개(예, 5개)의 BWP를 포함할 수 있다. 데이터 통신은 활성화된 BWP를 통해서 수행되며, 하나의 단말한테는 하나의 BWP만 활성화 될 수 있다. 자원 그리드에서 각각의 요소는 자원요소(Resource Element, RE)로 지칭되며, 하나의 복소 심볼이 매핑될 수 있다.The slot includes a plurality of symbols in the time domain. For example, in general, one slot includes 14 symbols in case of CP, but one slot includes 12 symbols in case of extended CP. The carrier includes a plurality of subcarriers in the frequency domain. RB (Resource Block) is defined as a plurality of consecutive subcarriers (eg, 12) in the frequency domain. A bandwidth part (BWP) is defined as a plurality of consecutive (P) RBs in the frequency domain and may correspond to one numerology (eg, SCS, CP length, etc.). The carrier may include up to N (eg 5) BWPs. Data communication is performed through an activated BWP, and only one BWP may be activated by one UE. Each element in the resource grid is referred to as a resource element (RE), one complex symbol may be mapped.
도 11은 자기-완비(self-contained) 슬롯의 구조를 예시한다.11 illustrates the structure of a self-contained slot.
NR 시스템에서 프레임은 하나의 슬롯 내에 DL 제어 채널, DL 또는 UL 데이터, UL 제어 채널 등이 모두 포함될 수 있는 자기-완비 구조를 특징으로 한다. 예를 들어, 슬롯 내의 처음 N개의 심볼은 DL 제어 채널을 전송하는데 사용되고(DL 제어 영역으로 지칭), 슬롯 내의 마지막 M개의 심볼은 UL 제어 채널을 전송하는데 사용될 수 있다(UL 제어 영역으로 지칭). N과 M은 각각 0 이상의 정수이다. DL 제어 영역과 UL 제어 영역의 사이에 있는 자원 영역(데이터 영역으로 지칭)은 DL 데이터 전송을 위해 사용되거나, UL 데이터 전송을 위해 사용될 수 있다. 일 예로, 다음의 구성을 고려할 수 있다. 각 구간은 시간 순서대로 나열되었다.In an NR system, a frame is characterized by a self-complete structure in which all of a DL control channel, DL or UL data, UL control channel, etc. may be included in one slot. For example, the first N symbols in a slot may be used to transmit a DL control channel (referred to as DL control region), and the last M symbols in a slot may be used to transmit a UL control channel (referred to as UL control region). N and M are each an integer of 0 or more. A resource region (referred to as a data region) between the DL control region and the UL control region may be used for DL data transmission or may be used for UL data transmission. As an example, the following configuration may be considered. Each interval is listed in chronological order.
1. DL only 구성1.DL only configuration
2. UL only 구성2. UL only configuration
3. Mixed UL-DL 구성3. Mixed UL-DL composition
- DL 영역 + GP(Guard Period) + UL 제어 영역DL area + Guard Period (GP) + UL control area
- DL 제어 영역 + GP + UL 영역DL control area + GP + UL area
* DL 영역: (i) DL 데이터 영역, (ii) DL 제어 영역 + DL 데이터 영역DL area: (i) DL data area, (ii) DL control area + DL data area
* UL 영역: (i) UL 데이터 영역, (ii) UL 데이터 영역 + UL 제어 영역 UL region: (i) UL data region, (ii) UL data region + UL control region
DL 제어 영역에서는 PDCCH가 전송될 수 있고, DL 데이터 영역에서는 PDSCH가 전송될 수 있다. UL 제어 영역에서는 PUCCH가 전송될 수 있고, UL 데이터 영역에서는 PUSCH가 전송될 수 있다. PDCCH에서는 DCI(Downlink Control Information), 예를 들어 DL 데이터 스케줄링 정보, UL 데이터 스케줄링 정보 등이 전송될 수 있다. PUCCH에서는 UCI(Uplink Control Information), 예를 들어 DL 데이터에 대한 ACK/NACK(Positive Acknowledgement/Negative Acknowledgement) 정보, CSI(Channel State Information) 정보, SR(Scheduling Request) 등이 전송될 수 있다. GP는 기지국과 단말이 송신 모드에서 수신 모드로 전환하는 과정 또는 수신 모드에서 송신 모드로 전환하는 과정에서 시간 갭을 제공한다. 서브프레임 내에서 DL에서 UL로 전환되는 시점의 일부 심볼이 GP로 설정될 수 있다.The PDCCH may be transmitted in the DL control region, and the PDSCH may be transmitted in the DL data region. PUCCH may be transmitted in the UL control region, and PUSCH may be transmitted in the UL data region. Downlink Control Information (DCI), for example, DL data scheduling information, UL data scheduling information, and the like may be transmitted in the PDCCH. In PUCCH, uplink control information (UCI), for example, positive acknowledgment / negative acknowledgment (ACK / NACK) information, channel state information (CSI) information, and scheduling request (SR) for DL data may be transmitted. The GP provides a time gap in the process of the base station and the terminal switching from the transmission mode to the reception mode or from the reception mode to the transmission mode. Some symbols at the time of switching from DL to UL in the subframe may be set to GP.
C. 상향링크 및 하향링크 채널C. Uplink and Downlink Channels
하향링크 채널Downlink channel
기지국은 하향링크 채널을 통해 관련 신호를 단말에게 전송하고, 단말은 하향링크 채널을 통해 관련 신호를 기지국으로부터 수신한다.The base station transmits the related signal to the terminal through the downlink channel, and the terminal receives the related signal from the base station through the downlink channel.
(1) 물리 하향링크 공유 채널(PDSCH)(1) physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH)
PDSCH는 하향링크 데이터(예, DL-shared channel transport block, DL-SCH TB)를 운반하고, QPSK(Quadrature Phase Shift Keying), 16 QAM(Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), 64 QAM, 256 QAM 등의 변조 방법이 적용된다. TB를 인코딩하여 코드워드(codeword)가 생성된다. PDSCH는 최대 2개의 코드워드를 나를 수 있다. 코드워드(codeword) 별로 스크램블링(scrambling) 및 변조 매핑(modulation mapping)이 수행되고, 각 코드워드로부터 생성된 변조 심볼들은 하나 이상의 레이어로 매핑된다(Layer mapping). 각 레이어는 DMRS(Demodulation Reference Signal)과 함께 자원에 매핑되어 OFDM 심볼 신호로 생성되고, 해당 안테나 포트를 통해 전송된다.The PDSCH carries downlink data (eg, DL-shared channel transport block, DL-SCH TB), and modulation methods such as Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK), 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM), 64 QAM, and 256 QAM are used. Apply. A codeword is generated by encoding the TB. The PDSCH can carry up to two codewords. Scrambling and modulation mapping are performed for each codeword, and modulation symbols generated from each codeword are mapped to one or more layers. Each layer is mapped to a resource together with a DMRS (Demodulation Reference Signal) to generate an OFDM symbol signal, and is transmitted through a corresponding antenna port.
(2) 물리 하향링크 제어 채널(PDCCH)(2) physical downlink control channel (PDCCH)
PDCCH는 하향링크 제어 정보(DCI)를 운반하고 QPSK 변조 방법이 적용된다. 하나의 PDCCH는 AL(Aggregation Level)에 따라 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 개의 CCE(Control Channel Element)로 구성된다. 하나의 CCE는 6개의 REG(Resource Element Group)로 구성된다. 하나의 REG는 하나의 OFDM 심볼과 하나의 (P)RB로 정의된다. PDCCH는 제어 자원 세트(Control Resource Set, CORESET)를 통해 전송된다. CORESET는 주어진 뉴모놀로지(예, SCS, CP 길이 등)를 갖는 REG 세트로 정의된다. 하나의 단말을 위한 복수의 CORESET는 시간/주파수 도메인에서 중첩될 수 있다. CORESET는 시스템 정보(예, MIB) 또는 단말-특정(UE-specific) 상위 계층(예, Radio Resource Control, RRC, layer) 시그널링을 통해 설정될 수 있다. 구체적으로, CORESET을 구성하는 RB의 개수 및 심볼의 개수(최대 3개)가 상위 계층 시그널링에 의해 설정될 수 있다.The PDCCH carries downlink control information (DCI) and a QPSK modulation method is applied. One PDCCH is composed of 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 CCEs (Control Channel Elements) according to an aggregation level (AL). One CCE consists of six Resource Element Groups (REGs). One REG is defined by one OFDM symbol and one (P) RB. The PDCCH is transmitted through a control resource set (CORESET). CORESET is defined as a REG set with a given pneumonology (eg SCS, CP length, etc.). A plurality of CORESET for one terminal may be overlapped in the time / frequency domain. CORESET may be set through system information (eg, MIB) or UE-specific higher layer (eg, Radio Resource Control, RRC, layer) signaling. In detail, the number of RBs and the number of symbols (up to three) constituting the CORESET may be set by higher layer signaling.
단말은 PDCCH 후보들의 세트에 대한 디코딩(일명, 블라인드 디코딩)을 수행하여 PDCCH를 통해 전송되는 DCI를 획득한다. 단말이 디코딩하는 PDCCH 후보들의 세트는 PDCCH 검색 공간(Search Space) 세트라 정의한다. 검색 공간 세트는 공통 검색 공간 (common search space) 또는 단말-특정 검색 공간 (UE-specific search space)일 수 있다. 단말은 MIB 또는 상위 계층 시그널링에 의해 설정된 하나 이상의 검색 공간 세트 내 PDCCH 후보를 모니터링하여 DCI를 획득할 수 있다. 각 CORESET 설정은 하나 이상의 검색 공간 세트와 연관되고(associated with), 각 검색 공간 세트는 하나의 COREST 설정과 연관된다. 하나의 검색 공간 세트는 다음의 파라미터들에 기초하여 결정된다.The UE performs decoding (aka blind decoding) on the set of PDCCH candidates to obtain a DCI transmitted through the PDCCH. The set of PDCCH candidates decoded by the UE is defined as a PDCCH search space set. The search space set may be a common search space or a UE-specific search space. The UE may acquire the DCI by monitoring PDCCH candidates in one or more sets of search spaces set by MIB or higher layer signaling. Each CORESET setting is associated with one or more sets of search spaces, and each set of search spaces is associated with one COREST setting. One set of search spaces is determined based on the following parameters.
- controlResourceSetId: 검색 공간 세트와 관련된 제어 자원 세트를 나타냄 controlResourceSetId indicates the control resource set associated with the search space set
- monitoringSlotPeriodicityAndOffset: PDCCH 모니터링 주기 구간 (슬롯 단위) 및 PDCCH 모니터링 구간 오프셋 (슬롯 단위)을 나타냄 -monitoringSlotPeriodicityAndOffset : indicates PDCCH monitoring interval section (slot unit) and PDCCH monitoring interval offset (slot unit)
- monitoringSymbolsWithinSlot: PDCCH 모니터링을 위한 슬롯 내 PDCCH 모니터링 패턴을 나타냄 (예, 제어 자원 세트의 첫 번째 심볼(들)을 나타냄) monitoringSymbolsWithinSlot indicates the PDCCH monitoring pattern in the slot for PDCCH monitoring (eg, indicates the first symbol (s) of the control resource set)
- nrofCandidates: AL={1, 2, 4, 8, 16} 별 PDCCH 후보의 수 (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 중 하나의 값)을 나타냄 nrofCandidates : AL = {1, 2, 4, 8, 16} indicates the number of PDCCH candidates (one of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8)
표 3은 검색 공간 타입별 특징을 예시한다.Table 3 illustrates the features of each search space type.
Figure PCTKR2019010004-appb-img-000003
Figure PCTKR2019010004-appb-img-000003
표 4는 PDCCH를 통해 전송되는 DCI 포맷들을 예시한다.Table 4 illustrates the DCI formats transmitted on the PDCCH.
Figure PCTKR2019010004-appb-img-000004
Figure PCTKR2019010004-appb-img-000004
DCI format 0_0은 TB-기반 (또는 TB-level) PUSCH를 스케줄링 하기 위해 사용되고, DCI format 0_1은 TB-기반 (또는 TB-level) PUSCH 또는 CBG(Code Block Group)-기반 (또는 CBG-level) PUSCH를 스케줄링 하기 위해 사용될 수 있다. DCI format 1_0은 TB-기반 (또는 TB-level) PDSCH를 스케줄링 하기 위해 사용되고, DCI format 1_1은 TB-기반 (또는 TB-level) PDSCH 또는 CBG-기반 (또는 CBG-level) PDSCH를 스케줄링 하기 위해 사용될 수 있다. DCI format 2_0은 동적 슬롯 포맷 정보 (예, dynamic SFI)를 단말에게 전달하기 위해 사용되고, DCI format 2_1은 하향링크 선취 (pre-Emption) 정보를 단말에게 전달하기 위해 사용된다. DCI format 2_0 및/또는 DCI format 2_1은 하나의 그룹으로 정의된 단말들에게 전달되는 PDCCH인 그룹 공통 PDCCH (Group common PDCCH)를 통해 해당 그룹 내 단말들에게 전달될 수 있다.DCI format 0_0 is used for scheduling TB-based (or TB-level) PUSCH, DCI format 0_1 is used for scheduling TB-based (or TB-level) PUSCH or Code Block Group (CBG) -based (or CBG-level) PUSCH. It can be used to schedule. DCI format 1_0 is used for scheduling TB-based (or TB-level) PDSCH, DCI format 1_1 is used for scheduling TB-based (or TB-level) PDSCH or CBG-based (or CBG-level) PDSCH. Can be. DCI format 2_0 is used to deliver dynamic slot format information (eg, dynamic SFI) to the UE, and DCI format 2_1 is used to deliver downlink pre-Emption information to the UE. DCI format 2_0 and / or DCI format 2_1 may be delivered to UEs in a corresponding group through a group common PDCCH, which is a PDCCH delivered to UEs defined as one group.
상향링크 채널Uplink channel
단말은 상향링크 채널을 통해 관련 신호를 기지국으로 전송하고, 기지국은 상향링크 채널을 통해 관련 신호를 단말로부터 수신한다.The terminal transmits the related signal to the base station through the uplink channel, and the base station receives the related signal from the terminal through the uplink channel.
(1) 물리 상향링크 공유 채널(PUSCH)(1) physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH)
PUSCH는 상향링크 데이터(예, UL-shared channel transport block, UL-SCH TB) 및/또는 상향링크 제어 정보(UCI)를 운반하고, CP-OFDM (Cyclic Prefix - Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) 파형(waveform) 또는 DFT-s-OFDM (Discrete Fourier Transform - spread - Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) 파형에 기초하여 전송된다. PUSCH가 DFT-s-OFDM 파형에 기초하여 전송되는 경우, 단말은 변환 프리코딩(transform precoding)을 적용하여 PUSCH를 전송한다. 일 예로, 변환 프리코딩이 불가능한 경우(예, transform precoding is disabled) 단말은 CP-OFDM 파형에 기초하여 PUSCH를 전송하고, 변환 프리코딩이 가능한 경우(예, transform precoding is enabled) 단말은 CP-OFDM 파형 또는 DFT-s-OFDM 파형에 기초하여 PUSCH를 전송할 수 있다. PUSCH 전송은 DCI 내 UL 그랜트에 의해 동적으로 스케줄링 되거나, 상위 계층(예, RRC) 시그널링 (및/또는 Layer 1(L1) 시그널링(예, PDCCH))에 기초하여 반-정적(semi-static)으로 스케줄링 될 수 있다(configured grant). PUSCH 전송은 코드북 기반 또는 비-코드북 기반으로 수행될 수 있다.PUSCH carries uplink data (eg, UL-shared channel transport block, UL-SCH TB) and / or uplink control information (UCI), and uses a Cyclic Prefix-Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (CP-OFDM) waveform. Or based on a Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (DFT-s-OFDM) waveform. When the PUSCH is transmitted based on the DFT-s-OFDM waveform, the terminal transmits the PUSCH by applying transform precoding. For example, when transform precoding is not possible (eg, transform precoding is disabled), the UE transmits a PUSCH based on a CP-OFDM waveform, and when conversion precoding is possible (eg, transform precoding is enabled), the UE is CP-OFDM. PUSCH may be transmitted based on the waveform or the DFT-s-OFDM waveform. PUSCH transmissions are dynamically scheduled by UL grants in DCI or semi-static based on higher layer (eg RRC) signaling (and / or Layer 1 (L1) signaling (eg PDCCH)). Can be scheduled (configured grant). PUSCH transmission may be performed based on codebook or non-codebook.
(2) 물리 상향링크 제어 채널(PUCCH)(2) physical uplink control channel (PUCCH)
PUCCH는 상향링크 제어 정보, HARQ-ACK 및/또는 스케줄링 요청(SR)을 운반하고, PUCCH 전송 길이에 따라 Short PUCCH 및 Long PUCCH로 구분된다. 표 5는 PUCCH 포맷들을 예시한다.The PUCCH carries uplink control information, HARQ-ACK and / or scheduling request (SR), and is divided into Short PUCCH and Long PUCCH according to the PUCCH transmission length. Table 5 illustrates the PUCCH formats.
Figure PCTKR2019010004-appb-img-000005
Figure PCTKR2019010004-appb-img-000005
D. MTC (Machine Type Communication)D. Machine Type Communication (MTC)
MTC는 머신(machine)이 하나 이상 포함된 데이터 통신의 한 형태이며, M2M(Machine-to-Machine) 또는 IoT(Internet-of-Things) 등에 적용될 있다. 여기서, 머신은 사람의 직접적인 조작이나 개입이 필요하지 않는 개체를 의미한다. 예를 들어, 머신은 이동 통신 모듈이 탑재된 스마트 미터(smart meter), 벤딩 머신(vending machine), MTC 기능을 가진 휴대 단말 등을 포함한다. 예를 들어, MTC를 통해 계량기 검침, 수위측정, 감시 카메라의 활용, 자판기의 재고보고 등의 서비스가 제공될 수 있다. MTC 통신은 전송 데이터량이 적고 상향/하향 링크 데이터 송수신이 가끔씩 발생하는 특성을 갖는다. 따라서, 낮은 데이터 전송률에 맞춰서 MTC 장치의 단가를 낮추고 배터리 소모를 줄이는 것이 효율적이다. MTC 장치는 일반적으로 이동성이 적고, 그에 따라 MTC 통신은 채널 환경이 거의 변하지 않는 특성을 가진다.MTC is a form of data communication that includes one or more machines, and may be applied to machine-to-machine (M2M) or Internet-of-Things (IoT). Here, a machine refers to an object that does not require human direct manipulation or intervention. For example, the machine may include a smart meter equipped with a mobile communication module, a bending machine, a portable terminal having an MTC function, and the like. For example, MTC can provide services such as meter reading, water level measurement, the use of surveillance cameras, and inventory reporting of vending machines. MTC communication has a characteristic of small amount of transmission data and occasional up / down link data transmission and reception. Therefore, it is efficient to lower the cost of the MTC device and reduce the battery consumption at the low data rate. MTC devices are generally less mobile, and thus MTC communication has the characteristic that the channel environment hardly changes.
3GPP에서 MTC는 release 10부터 적용되었으며, 낮은 비용 & 낮은 복잡도(low cost & low complexity), 향상된 커버리지(enhanced coverage), 낮은 파워 소비(low power consumption)의 기준을 만족하도록 구현될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 3GPP Release 12에는 저비용 MTC 장치를 위한 특징이 추가되었으며, 이를 위해 UE category 0이 정의되었다. UE category는 단말이 얼마나 많은 데이터를 통신 모뎀에서 처리할 수 있는지를 나타내는 지표이다. UE category 0의 단말은 감소된 피크 데이터 레이트, 완화된 RF(Radio Frequency) 요구 사항을 가지는 하프-듀플렉스 동작, 단일 수신 안테나를 사용함으로써 베이스밴드/RF 복잡도를 줄일 수 있다. 3GPP Release 12에는 eMTC(enhanced MTC)가 도입됐으며, 레가시(legacy) LTE에서 지원하는 최소 주파수 대역폭인 1.08MHz (즉, 6개의 RB)에서만 동작하도록 하여 MTC 단말의 가격과 전력 소모를 더 낮추었다.In 3GPP, MTC has been applied since release 10 and can be implemented to meet the criteria of low cost & low complexity, enhanced coverage, and low power consumption. For example, 3GPP Release 12 adds features for low-cost MTC devices, for which UE category 0 is defined. The UE category is an index indicating how much data the terminal can process in the communication modem. UE category 0 can reduce baseband / RF complexity by using a reduced peak data rate, half-duplex operation with relaxed Radio Frequency (RF) requirements, and a single receive antenna. In 3GPP Release 12, enhanced MTC (eMTC) was introduced, and the MTC terminal lowered the cost and power consumption by only operating at 1.08MHz (that is, 6 RBs), which is the minimum frequency bandwidth supported by legacy LTE.
본 명세서에서 기술되는 내용은 주로 eMTC와 관련된 특징들이나, 특별한 언급이 없는 한 MTC, eMTC, 5G(또는 NR)에 적용될 MTC에도 동일하게 적용될 수 있다. 본 명세서에서는 설명의 편의를 위해 MTC로 통칭하여 설명하기로 한다.The content described herein is mainly applicable to the features related to eMTC, but can also be applied to MTC to be applied to MTC, eMTC, 5G (or NR) unless otherwise specified. In the present specification, for convenience of description, the description will be collectively referred to as MTC.
도 12는 MTC에서의 셀 커버리지 향상을 예시한다. 커버리지 향상은 커버리지 확장이라고 지칭될 수 있으며, MTC와 관련하여 설명되는 커버리지 향상을 위한 기법은 NB-IoT 및 5G(또는 NR)에도 동일/유사하게 적용될 수 있다.12 illustrates cell coverage enhancement in MTC. Coverage enhancement may be referred to as coverage extension, and the techniques for coverage enhancement described with respect to MTC may apply equally or similarly to NB-IoT and 5G (or NR).
MTC 장치(1202)를 위해 기지국(1204)의 셀 커버리지(Coverage Extension 또는 Coverage Enhancement, CE)를 확장하기 위해 다양한 셀 커버리지 확장 기법들이 논의되고 있다. 예를 들어, 셀 커버리지 확장을 위해, 기지국/단말은 하나의 물리 채널/신호를 복수의 기회(occasion)에 걸쳐 전송/수신할 수 있다(물리 채널의 번들). 번들 구간 내에서 물리 채널/신호는 기-정의된 규칙에 따라 반복 전송/수신될 수 있다. 수신 장치는 물리 채널/신호 번들의 일부 또는 또는 전체를 디코딩함으로써 물리 채널/신호의 디코딩 성공율을 높일 수 있다. 여기서, 기회는 물리 채널/신호가 전송/수신될 수 있는 자원(예, 시간/주파수)을 의미할 수 있다. 물리 채널/신호를 위한 기회는 시간 도메인에서 서브프레임, 슬롯 또는 심볼 세트를 포함할 수 있다. 여기서, 심볼 세트는 하나 이상의 연속된 OFDM-기반 심볼로 구성될 수 있다. OFDM-기반 심볼은 OFDM(A) 심볼, DFT-s-OFDM(A) (= SC-FDM(A)) 심볼을 포함할 수 있다. 물리 채널/신호를 위한 기회는 주파수 도메인에서 주파수 밴드, RB 세트를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, PBCH, PRACH, MPDCCH, PDSCH, PUCCH 및 PUSCH가 반복 전송/수신될 수 있다.Various cell coverage extension techniques are discussed to extend the cell coverage (Coverage Extension or Coverage Enhancement, CE) of the base station 1204 for the MTC device 1202. For example, for cell coverage extension, a base station / terminal can transmit / receive one physical channel / signal over a plurality of occasions (bundle of physical channels). In the bundle interval, the physical channel / signal may be repeatedly transmitted / received according to a pre-defined rule. The receiving device can increase the decoding success rate of the physical channel / signal by decoding part or all of the physical channel / signal bundle. In this case, the opportunity may refer to a resource (eg, time / frequency) to which a physical channel / signal may be transmitted / received. Opportunities for physical channels / signals may include subframes, slots or symbol sets in the time domain. Here, the symbol set may consist of one or more consecutive OFDM-based symbols. The OFDM-based symbol may include an OFDM (A) symbol, a DFT-s-OFDM (A) (= SC-FDM (A)) symbol. Opportunities for physical channels / signals may include frequency bands, RB sets in the frequency domain. For example, PBCH, PRACH, MPDCCH, PDSCH, PUCCH and PUSCH may be repeatedly transmitted / received.
MTC는 커버리지 향상 또는 확장((Coverage Extension 또는 Coverage Enhancement, CE)을 위한 동작 모드를 지원하며, 커버리지 향상 또는 확장을 위해 신호의 반복 전송/수신을 지원하는 모드를 CE 모드(mode)라고 지칭할 수 있고, 커버리지 향상 또는 확장을 위한 신호의 반복 전송/수신 횟수를 CE 레벨이라고 지칭할 수 있다. 표 6은 MTC에서 지원하는 CE 모드/레벨을 예시한다.The MTC supports an operation mode for coverage enhancement or coverage (CE), and a mode supporting repetitive transmission / reception of signals for coverage enhancement or extension may be referred to as a CE mode. The number of repetitive transmissions / receptions of a signal for coverage enhancement or extension may be referred to as a CE level Table 6 exemplifies a CE mode / level supported by the MTC.
Figure PCTKR2019010004-appb-img-000006
Figure PCTKR2019010004-appb-img-000006
제 1 모드(예, CE Mode A)는 완전한 이동성 및 CSI (channel state information) 피드백이 지원되는 작은 커버리지(coverage) 향상을 위해 정의되어, 반복이 없거나 또는 반복 횟수가 적은 모드이다. 제 1 모드의 동작은 UE 카테고리(category) 1의 동작 범위와 동일할 수 있다. 제 2 모드(예, CE Mode B)는 CSI 피드백(feedback) 및 제한된 이동성을 지원하는 극히 열악한 커버리지 조건의 UE에 대해 정의되며, 많은 수의 반복 전송이 정의된다. 제 2 모드는 UE 카테고리(category) 1의 범위를 기준으로 최대 15dB의 커버리지 향상을 제공한다. MTC의 각 레벨(level)은 랜덤 접속 과정(또는 RACH 과정)과 페이징 과정(paging procedure)에서 다르게 정의된다.The first mode (eg, CE Mode A) is defined for small coverage enhancement with full mobility and channel state information (CSI) feedback, and is a mode with no or few repetitions. The operation of the first mode may be the same as the operation range of the UE category 1. The second mode (eg CE Mode B) is defined for UEs in extremely poor coverage conditions that support CSI feedback and limited mobility, and a large number of repetitive transmissions are defined. The second mode provides up to 15dB of coverage enhancement based on the range of UE category 1. Each level of the MTC is defined differently in a random access procedure (or RACH procedure) and a paging procedure.
도 13은 MTC를 위한 신호 대역을 예시한다.13 illustrates a signal band for MTC.
도 13을 참조하면, MTC 단말의 단가를 낮추기 위한 방법으로, MTC는 셀의 시스템 대역폭(system bandwidth)과 무관하게, 셀의 시스템 대역폭 중 특정 대역(또는 채널 대역)(MTC 서브밴드 또는 협대역(narrowband, NB)으로 지칭)에서만 동작할 수 있다. 예를 들어, MTC 단말의 상향/하향링크 동작은 1.08 MHz 주파수 밴드에서만 수행될 수 있다. 1.08 MHz는 LTE 시스템에서 6개의 연속하는 PRB(Physical Resource Block)에 해당하며, LTE 단말과 동일한 셀 탐색 및 랜덤 액세스 절차를 따르도록 하기 위해 정의됐다. 도 13(a)는 셀의 중심(예, 중심 6개 PRB들)에 MTC 서브밴드가 구성된 경우를 예시하고, 도 13(b)는 셀 내에 복수의 MTC 서브밴드가 구성된 경우를 예시한다. 복수의 MTC 서브밴드는 주파수 영역에서 연속적/불연속적으로 구성될 수 있다. MTC를 위한 물리 채널/신호들은 하나의 MTC 서브밴드에서 송수신될 수 있다. NR 시스템에서 MTC 서브밴드는 주파수 범위(frequency range) 및 SCS(subcarrier spacing)를 고려하여 정의될 수 있다. 일 예로, NR 시스템에서 MTC 서브밴드의 크기는 X개의 연속하는 PRB(즉, 0.18*X*(2^μ)MHz 대역폭)로 정의될 수 있다(μ는 표 1을 참조). 여기서, X는 SS/PBCH(Synchronization Signal/Physical Broadcast Channel) 블록의 사이즈에 맞춰 20으로 정의될 수 있다. NR 시스템에서 MTC는 적어도 하나의 BWP(Bandwidth Part)에서 동작할 수 있다. 이 경우, BWP 내에 복수의 MTC 서브밴드가 구성될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 13, as a method for lowering the unit cost of an MTC terminal, the MTC is a specific band (or channel band) of the system bandwidth of the cell (MTC subband or narrow band) regardless of the system bandwidth of the cell. Narrowband (NB) only). For example, the uplink / downlink operation of the MTC terminal may be performed only in the 1.08 MHz frequency band. 1.08 MHz corresponds to six consecutive Physical Resource Blocks (PRBs) in an LTE system, and is defined to follow the same cell search and random access procedure as that of an LTE terminal. FIG. 13A illustrates a case in which MTC subbands are configured in the center of a cell (eg, six center PRBs) and FIG. 13B illustrates a case in which a plurality of MTC subbands are configured in a cell. The plurality of MTC subbands may be configured continuously or discontinuously in the frequency domain. Physical channels / signals for the MTC may be transmitted and received on one MTC subband. In the NR system, the MTC subband may be defined in consideration of frequency range and subcarrier spacing (SCS). For example, in the NR system, the size of the MTC subband may be defined as X consecutive PRBs (that is, 0.18 * X * (2 ^ μ) MHz bandwidths) (μ may refer to Table 1). Here, X may be defined as 20 according to the size of the SS / PBCH (Synchronization Signal / Physical Broadcast Channel) block. In the NR system, the MTC may operate in at least one bandwidth part (BWP). In this case, a plurality of MTC subbands may be configured in the BWP.
도 14는 레가시 LTE와 MTC에서의 스케줄링을 예시한다.14 illustrates scheduling in legacy LTE and MTC.
도 14를 참조하면, 레가시 LTE에서 PDSCH는 PDCCH를 이용하여 스케줄링 된다. 구체적으로, PDCCH는 서브프레임에서 처음 N개의 OFDM 심볼들에서 전송될 수 있고(N=1~3), 상기 PDCCH에 의해 스케줄링 되는 PDSCH는 동일한 서브프레임에서 전송된다. 한편, MTC에서 PDSCH는 MPDCCH를 이용하여 스케줄링 된다. 이에 따라, MTC 단말은 서브프레임 내의 검색 공간(search space)에서 MPDCCH 후보를 모니터링 할 수 있다. 여기서, 모니터링은 MPDCCH 후보들을 블라인드 디코딩 하는 것을 포함한다. MPDCCH는 DCI를 전송하며, DCI는 상향링크 또는 하향링크 스케줄링 정보를 포함한다. MPDCCH는 서브프레임에서 PDSCH와 FDM으로 다중화 된다. MPDCCH는 최대 256개의 서브프레임에서 반복 전송되며, MPDCCH에 의해 전송되는 DCI는 MPDCCH 반복 횟수에 관한 정보를 포함한다. 하향링크 스케줄링의 경우, MPDCCH의 반복 전송이 서브프레임 #N에서 끝난 경우, 상기 MPDCCH에 의해 스케줄링 되는 PDSCH는 서브프레임 #N+2에서 전송이 시작된다. PDSCH는 최대 2048개의 서브프레임에서 반복 전송될 수 있다. MPDCCH와 PDSCH는 서로 다른 MTC 서브밴드에서 전송될 수 있다. 이에 따라, MTC 단말은 MPDCCH 수신 후에 PDSCH 수신을 위해 RF(Radio Frequency) 리튜닝(retuning)을 할 수 있다. 상향링크 스케줄링의 경우, MPDCCH의 반복 전송이 서브프레임 #N에서 끝난 경우, 상기 MPDCCH에 의해 스케줄링 되는 PUSCH는 서브프레임 #N+4에서 전송이 시작된다. 물리 채널에 반복 전송이 적용되는 경우, RF 리튜닝에 의해 서로 다른 MTC 서브밴드들 사이에서 주파수 호핑이 지원된다. 예를 들어, 32개의 서브프레임들에서 PDSCH가 반복 전송되는 경우, 처음 16개의 서브프레임들에서 PDSCH는 제1 MTC 서브밴드에서 전송되고, 나머지 16개의 서브프레임들에서 PDSCH는 제2 MTC 서브밴드에서 전송될 수 있다. MTC는 하프-듀플렉스(half duplex) 모드로 동작한다. MTC의 HARQ 재전송은 적응적(adaptive), 비동기(asynchronous) 방식이다.Referring to FIG. 14, in legacy LTE, a PDSCH is scheduled using a PDCCH. Specifically, the PDCCH may be transmitted in the first N OFDM symbols in a subframe (N = 1 to 3), and the PDSCH scheduled by the PDCCH is transmitted in the same subframe. Meanwhile, in MTC, PDSCH is scheduled using MPDCCH. Accordingly, the MTC terminal may monitor the MPDCCH candidate in a search space in a subframe. Here, monitoring includes blind decoding MPDCCH candidates. The MPDCCH transmits a DCI, and the DCI includes uplink or downlink scheduling information. MPDCCH is multiplexed into PDSCH and FDM in a subframe. The MPDCCH is repeatedly transmitted in a maximum of 256 subframes, and the DCI transmitted by the MPDCCH includes information on the number of MPDCCH repetitions. In the case of downlink scheduling, when repetitive transmission of the MPDCCH ends in subframe #N, transmission of PDSCH scheduled by the MPDCCH starts in subframe # N + 2. The PDSCH may be repeatedly transmitted in up to 2048 subframes. MPDCCH and PDSCH may be transmitted in different MTC subbands. Accordingly, the MTC terminal may perform RF (Radio Frequency) retuning for PDSCH reception after MPDCCH reception. In the case of uplink scheduling, when repetitive transmission of the MPDCCH ends in subframe #N, the PUSCH scheduled by the MPDCCH starts transmission in subframe # N + 4. When repetitive transmission is applied to a physical channel, frequency hopping is supported between different MTC subbands by RF retuning. For example, if the PDSCH is repeatedly transmitted in 32 subframes, the PDSCH is transmitted in the first MTC subband in the first 16 subframes, and the PDSCH is transmitted in the second MTC subband in the remaining 16 subframes. Can be sent. MTC operates in half duplex mode. HARQ retransmission of the MTC is an adaptive, asynchronous scheme.
E. NB-IoT(Narrowband Internet of Things)E. Narrowband Internet of Things (NB-IoT)
NB-IoT는 기존 무선 통신 시스템(예, LTE, NR)을 통해 저전력 광역망을 지원하는 협대역 사물 인터넷 기술을 나타낸다. 또한, NB-IoT는 협대역(narrowband)을 통해 낮은 복잡도(complexity), 낮은 전력 소비를 지원하기 위한 시스템을 의미할 수 있다. NB-IoT 시스템은 SCS(subcarrier spacing) 등의 OFDM 파라미터들을 기존 시스템과 동일하게 사용함으로써, NB-IoT 시스템을 위해 추가 대역을 별도로 할당할 필요가 없다. 예를 들어, 기존 시스템 대역의 1개 PRB를 NB-IoT 용으로 할당할 수 있다. NB-IoT 단말은 단일 PRB(single PRB)를 각 캐리어(carrier)로 인식하므로, NB-IoT에 관한 설명에서 PRB 및 캐리어는 동일한 의미로 해석될 수 있다.NB-IoT represents a narrowband IoT technology that supports low-power wide area networks through existing wireless communication systems (eg, LTE, NR). In addition, NB-IoT may refer to a system for supporting low complexity and low power consumption through a narrowband. The NB-IoT system uses OFDM parameters such as subcarrier spacing (SCS) in the same manner as the existing system, and thus does not need to allocate an additional band separately for the NB-IoT system. For example, one PRB of the existing system band can be allocated for NB-IoT. Since the NB-IoT terminal recognizes a single PRB as each carrier, the PRB and the carrier may be interpreted to have the same meaning in the description of the NB-IoT.
본 명세서에서, NB-IoT에 관한 설명은 기존 LTE 시스템에 적용되는 경우를 위주로 기재하지만, 본 명세서의 설명은 차세대 시스템(예, NR 시스템 등)에도 확장 적용될 수 있다. 또한, 본 명세서에서 NB-IoT와 관련된 내용은 유사한 기술적 목적(예, 저-전력, 저-비용, 커버리지 향상 등)을 지향하는 MTC에 확장 적용될 수 있다. 또한, NB-IoT는 NB-LTE, NB-IoT enhancement, enhanced NB-IoT, further enhanced NB-IoT, NB-NR 등과 같이 등가의 다른 용어로 대체될 수 있다.In the present specification, the description of the NB-IoT mainly describes the case where it is applied to the existing LTE system, but the description of the present specification may be extended to the next-generation system (eg, NR system). In addition, the content related to the NB-IoT herein may be extended to MTC for a similar technical purpose (eg, low-power, low-cost, improved coverage, etc.). In addition, NB-IoT may be replaced with other equivalent terms such as NB-LTE, NB-IoT enhancement, enhanced NB-IoT, further enhanced NB-IoT, NB-NR, and the like.
NB-IoT 하향링크에는 NPBCH(Narrowband Physical Broadcast Channel), NPDSCH(Narrowband Physical Downlink Shared Channel), NPDCCH(Narrowband Physical Downlink Control Channel)와 같은 물리 채널이 제공되며, NPSS(Narrowband Primary Synchronization Signal), NSSS(Narrowband Primary Synchronization Signal), NRS(Narrowband Reference Signal)와 같은 물리 신호가 제공된다.NB-IoT downlink is provided with physical channels such as narrowband physical broadcast channel (NPBCH), narrowband physical downlink shared channel (NPDSCH), narrowband physical downlink control channel (NPDCCH), narrowband primary synchronization signal (NPSS), narrowband (NSSS) Physical signals such as Primary Synchronization Signal (NRS) and Narrowband Reference Signal (NRS) are provided.
도 15는 NB-IoT 하향링크 물리 채널/신호의 전송을 예시한다. 하향링크 물리 채널/신호는 1개 PRB를 통해 전송되며 15kHz 서브캐리어 간격/멀티-톤 전송을 지원한다.15 illustrates transmission of an NB-IoT downlink physical channel / signal. The downlink physical channel / signal is transmitted through one PRB and supports 15kHz subcarrier spacing / multi-tone transmission.
도 15를 참조하면, NPSS는 매 프레임의 6번째 서브프레임, NSSS는 매 짝수 프레임의 마지막(예, 10번째) 서브프레임에서 전송된다. 단말은 동기 신호(NPSS, NSSS)를 이용해 주파수, 심볼, 프레임 동기를 획득하고 504개의 PCID(Physical Cell ID)(즉, 기지국 ID)를 탐색할 수 있다. NPBCH는 매 프레임의 1번째 서브프레임에서 전송되고 NB-MIB를 나른다. NRS는 하향링크 물리 채널 복조를 위한 기준 신호로 제공되며 LTE와 동일한 방식으로 생성된다. 다만, NRS 시퀀스 생성을 위한 초기화 값으로 NB-PCID(Physical Cell ID)(또는 NCell ID, NB-IoT 기지국 ID)가 사용된다. NRS는 하나 또는 두 개의 안테나 포트를 통해 전송된다. NPDCCH와 NPDSCH는 NPSS/NSSS/NPBCH를 제외하고 남은 서브프레임에서 전송될 수 있다. NPDCCH와 NPDSCH는 동일 서브프레임에서 함께 전송될 수 없다. NPDCCH는 DCI를 나르며 DCI는 3종류의 DCI 포맷을 지원한다. DCI 포맷 N0는 NPUSCH(Narrowband Physical Uplink Shared Channel) 스케줄링 정보를 포함하며, DCI 포맷 N1과 N2는 NPDSCH 스케줄링 정보를 포함한다. NPDCCH는 커버리지 향상을 위해 최대 2048번의 반복 전송이 가능하다. NPDSCH는 DL-SCH(Downlink-Shared Channel), PCH(Paging Channel)와 같은 전송 채널의 데이터(예, TB)를 전송하는데 사용된다. 최대 TBS는 680비트이고, 커버리지 향상을 위해 최대 2048번 반복 전송이 가능하다. Referring to FIG. 15, NPSS is transmitted in the sixth subframe of every frame and NSSS is transmitted in the last (eg, tenth) subframe of every even frame. The terminal may acquire frequency, symbol, and frame synchronization using the sync signals NPSS and NSSS, and search for 504 physical cell IDs (ie, base station IDs). NPBCH is transmitted in the first subframe of every frame and carries the NB-MIB. The NRS is provided as a reference signal for downlink physical channel demodulation and is generated in the same manner as in LTE. However, NB-PCID (Physical Cell ID) (or NCell ID, NB-IoT base station ID) is used as an initialization value for generating an NRS sequence. NRS is transmitted through one or two antenna ports. NPDCCH and NPDSCH may be transmitted in the remaining subframes except NPSS / NSSS / NPBCH. NPDCCH and NPDSCH cannot be transmitted together in the same subframe. NPDCCH carries DCI and DCI supports three types of DCI formats. DCI format N0 includes narrowband physical uplink shared channel (NPUSCH) scheduling information, and DCI formats N1 and N2 include NPDSCH scheduling information. NPDCCH can be repeated up to 2048 times to improve coverage. The NPDSCH is used to transmit data (eg, TB) of a transport channel such as a downlink-shared channel (DL-SCH) and a paging channel (PCH). The maximum TBS is 680 bits, and up to 2048 repetitive transmissions can be used to improve coverage.
상향링크 물리 채널은 NPRACH(Narrowband Physical Random Access Channel)과 NPUSCH를 포함하며, 싱글-톤 전송과 멀티-톤 전송을 지원한다. 싱글-톤 전송은 3.5kHz와 15kHz의 서브캐리어 간격에 대해서 지원되며, 멀티-톤 전송은 15kHz 서브캐리어 간격에 대해서만 지원된다.The uplink physical channel includes a narrowband physical random access channel (NPRACH) and an NPUSCH, and supports single-tone transmission and multi-tone transmission. Single-tone transmissions are supported for subcarrier spacings of 3.5 kHz and 15 kHz, and multi-tone transmissions are only supported for 15 kHz subcarrier intervals.
F. 네트워크 접속 및 통신 과정F. Network Access and Communication Process
단말은 본 명세서에서 설명/제안한 절차 및/또는 방법들을 수행하기 위해 네트워크 접속 과정을 수행할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 네트워크(예, 기지국)에 접속을 수행하면서, 본 명세서에서 설명/제안한 절차 및/또는 방법들을 수행하는데 필요한 시스템 정보와 구성 정보들을 수신하여 메모리에 저장할 수 있다. 본 발명에 필요한 구성 정보들은 상위 계층(예, RRC layer; Medium Access Control, MAC, layer 등) 시그널링을 통해 수신될 수 있다.The terminal may perform a network access procedure to perform the procedures and / or methods described / proposed herein. For example, the terminal may receive and store system information and configuration information necessary to perform the procedures and / or methods described / proposed herein while accessing a network (eg, a base station) and store them in a memory. Configuration information required for the present invention may be received through higher layer (eg, RRC layer; Medium Access Control, MAC, layer, etc.) signaling.
도 16은 NR 시스템에서 네트워크 초기 접속 및 이후의 통신 과정을 예시한다. NR에서 물리 채널, 참조 신호는 빔-포밍을 이용하여 전송될 수 있다. 빔-포밍-기반의 신호 전송이 지원되는 경우, 기지국과 단말간에 빔을 정렬하기 위해 빔-관리(beam management) 과정이 수반될 수 있다. 또한, 본 발명에서 제안하는 신호는 빔-포밍을 이용하여 전송/수신될 수 있다. RRC(Radio Resource Control) IDLE 모드에서 빔 정렬은 SSB를 기반하여 수행될 수 있다. 반면, RRC CONNECTED 모드에서 빔 정렬은 CSI-RS (in DL) 및 SRS (in UL)에 기반하여 수행될 수 있다. 한편, 빔-포밍-기반의 신호 전송이 지원되지 않는 경우, 본 명세서의 설명에서 빔과 관련된 동작은 생략될 수 있다.16 illustrates a network initial access and subsequent communication process in an NR system. In NR, a physical channel, a reference signal may be transmitted using beam-forming. If beam-forming-based signal transmission is supported, a beam management process may be involved to align the beam between the base station and the terminal. In addition, the signal proposed in the present invention may be transmitted / received using beam-forming. In RRC (Radio Resource Control) IDLE mode, beam alignment may be performed based on SSB. On the other hand, beam alignment in the RRC CONNECTED mode may be performed based on CSI-RS (in DL) and SRS (in UL). On the other hand, when beam-forming-based signal transmission is not supported, operations related to beams may be omitted in the description of the present specification.
도 16을 참조하면, 기지국(예, BS)는 SSB를 주기적으로 전송할 수 있다(S1602). 여기서, SSB는 PSS/SSS/PBCH를 포함한다. SSB는 빔 스위핑을 이용하여 전송될 수 있다. PBCH는 MIB(Master Information Block)를 포함하며, MIB는 RMSI(Remaining Minimum System Information)에 관한 스케줄링 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 이후, 기지국은 RMSI와 OSI(Other System Information)를 전송할 수 있다(S1604). RMSI는 단말이 기지국에 초기 접속하는데 필요한 정보(예, PRACH 구성 정보)를 포함할 수 있다. 한편, 단말은 SSB 검출을 수행한 뒤, 베스트 SSB를 식별한다. 이후, 단말은 베스트 SSB의 인덱스(즉, 빔)에 링크된/대응되는 PRACH 자원을 이용하여 RACH 프리앰블(Message 1, Msg1)을 기지국에게 전송할 수 있다(S1606). RACH 프리앰블의 빔 방향은 PRACH 자원과 연관된다. PRACH 자원 (및/또는 RACH 프리앰블)과 SSB (인덱스)간 연관성(association)은 시스템 정보(예, RMSI)를 통해 설정될 수 있다. 이후, 랜덤 접속 과정(또는 RACH 과정)의 일환으로, 기지국은 RACH 프리앰블에 대한 응답으로 RAR(Random Access Response)(Msg2)를 전송하고(S1608), 단말은 RAR 내 UL 그랜트를 이용하여 Msg3(예, RRC Connection Request)을 전송하고(S1610), 기지국은 충돌 해결(contention resolution) 메세지(Msg4)를 전송할 수 있다(S1620). Msg4는 RRC Connection Setup을 포함할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 16, the base station (eg, BS) may periodically transmit the SSB (S1602). Here, SSB includes PSS / SSS / PBCH. SSB may be transmitted using beam sweeping. The PBCH may include a master information block (MIB), and the MIB may include scheduling information regarding a retaining minimum system information (RMI). Thereafter, the base station can transmit the RMSI and OSI (Other System Information) (S1604). The RMSI may include information (eg, PRACH configuration information) necessary for the terminal to initially access the base station. Meanwhile, the terminal identifies the best SSB after performing SSB detection. Thereafter, the terminal may transmit the RACH preamble (Message 1, Msg1) to the base station using the PRACH resources linked / corresponding to the index (ie, beam) of the best SSB (S1606). The beam direction of the RACH preamble is associated with a PRACH resource. The association between the PRACH resource (and / or RACH preamble) and the SSB (index) may be established through system information (eg, RMSI). Then, as part of the random access process (or RACH process), the base station transmits a random access response (RAR) (Msg2) in response to the RACH preamble (S1608), and the terminal uses the Msg3 (eg, UL grant in the RAR) In step S1610, the base station may transmit a contention resolution message Msg4 (S1620). Msg4 may include an RRC Connection Setup.
랜덤 접속 과정(또는 RACH 과정)을 통해 기지국과 단말간에 RRC 연결이 설정되면, 그 이후의 빔 정렬은 SSB/CSI-RS (in DL) 및 SRS (in UL)에 기반하여 수행될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 SSB/CSI-RS를 수신할 수 있다(S1614). SSB/CSI-RS는 단말이 빔/CSI 보고를 생성하는데 사용될 수 있다. 한편, 기지국은 DCI를 통해 빔/CSI 보고를 단말에게 요청할 수 있다(S1616). 이 경우, 단말은 SSB/CSI-RS에 기반하여 빔/CSI 보고를 생성하고, 생성된 빔/CSI 보고를 PUSCH/PUCCH를 통해 기지국에게 전송할 수 있다(S1618). 빔/CSI 보고는 빔 측정 결과, 선호하는 빔에 관한 정보 등을 포함할 수 있다. 기지국과 단말은 빔/CSI 보고에 기반하여 빔을 스위칭 할 수 있다(S1620a, S1620b).If the RRC connection is established between the base station and the terminal through a random access process (or RACH process), subsequent beam alignment may be performed based on SSB / CSI-RS (in DL) and SRS (in UL). For example, the terminal may receive the SSB / CSI-RS (S1614). The SSB / CSI-RS may be used by the terminal to generate a beam / CSI report. On the other hand, the base station may request the terminal to the beam / CSI report through the DCI (S1616). In this case, the terminal may generate a beam / CSI report based on the SSB / CSI-RS and transmit the generated beam / CSI report to the base station through the PUSCH / PUCCH (S1618). The beam / CSI report may include a beam measurement result, information on a preferred beam, and the like. The base station and the terminal may switch the beam based on the beam / CSI report (S1620a, S1620b).
이후, 단말과 기지국은 앞에서 설명/제안한 절차 및/또는 방법들을 수행할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말과 기지국은 네트워크 접속 과정(예, 시스템 정보 획득 과정, RACH를 통한 RRC 연결 과정 등)에서 얻은 구성 정보에 기반하여, 본 발명의 제안에 따라 메모리에 있는 정보를 처리하여 무선 신호를 전송하거나, 수신된 무선 신호를 처리하여 메모리에 저장할 수 있다. 여기서, 무선 신호는 하향링크의 경우 PDCCH, PDSCH, RS(Reference Signal) 중 적어도 하나를 포함하고, 상향링크의 경우 PUCCH, PUSCH, SRS 중 적어도 하나를 포함할 수 있다.Thereafter, the terminal and the base station may perform the above-described procedures and / or methods. For example, the terminal and the base station process the information in the memory according to the proposal of the present invention based on the configuration information obtained in the network access process (eg, system information acquisition process, RRC connection process through the RACH, etc.) Or transmit the received wireless signal to the memory. Here, the radio signal may include at least one of PDCCH, PDSCH, and RS (Reference Signal) in downlink, and at least one of PUCCH, PUSCH, and SRS in uplink.
앞에서 설명한 내용은 기본적으로 MTC와 NB-IoT에 공통으로 적용될 수 있다. MTC와 NB-IoT에서 달라질 수 있는 부분에 대해서는 아래에서 추가로 설명한다.The above description can be basically applied to MTC and NB-IoT in common. The parts that can vary in MTC and NB-IoT are described further below.
MTC 네트워크 접속 과정MTC Network Connection Process
LTE를 기준으로 MTC 네트워크 접속 과정에 대해 추가로 설명한다. 이하의 설명은 NR에도 확장 적용될 수 있다. 도 3 및/또는 도 16에서 PDCCH는 MPDCCH(MTC PDCCH)(예, 도 14 및 관련 설명 참조)로 대체된다.The MTC network access procedure will be further described based on LTE. The following description may be extended to NR as well. In FIG. 3 and / or 16 the PDCCH is replaced with an MPDCCH (MTC PDCCH) (see, eg, FIG. 14 and related description).
LTE에서 MIB는 10개의 예비 비트(reserved bit)를 포함한다. MTC에서 MIB 내 10개의 예비 비트 중 5개의 MSB(Most Significant Bit)는 SIB1-BR(System Information Block for bandwidth reduced device)에 대한 스케줄링 정보를 지시하는데 사용된다. 5개의 MSB는 SIB1-BR의 반복 횟수 및 TBS(Transport Block Size)를 지시하는데 사용된다. SIB1-BR은 PDSCH에서 전송된다. SIB1-BR은 다수의 서브프레임들이 결합되는 것을 허용하도록 512개의 무선 프레임들(5120ms)에서 변하지 않을 수 있다. SIB1-BR에서 운반되는 정보는 LTE 시스템의 SIB1과 유사하다. In LTE, the MIB includes 10 reserved bits. In MTC, 5 Most Significant Bits (MSBs) of 10 reserved bits in the MIB are used to indicate scheduling information for a system information block for bandwidth reduced device (SIB1-BR). Five MSBs are used to indicate the number of repetitions of the SIB1-BR and the transport block size (TBS). SIB1-BR is transmitted in the PDSCH. SIB1-BR may not change in 512 radio frames (5120 ms) to allow multiple subframes to be combined. The information carried in SIB1-BR is similar to SIB1 of LTE system.
MTC 랜덤 접속 과정(또는 RACH 과정)은 기본적으로 LTE 랜덤 접속 과정(또는 RACH 과정)(예, 도 4 및 관련 설명 참조)과 동일하며 다음 사항에서 차이가 있다: MTC 랜덤 접속 과정(또는 RACH 과정)은 CE(Coverage Enhancement) 레벨에 기반하여 수행된다. 예를 들어, PRACH 커버리지 향상을 위해 CE 레벨 별로 PRACH 반복 전송 여부/횟수가 달라질 수 있다. 표 6을 참조하여 설명한 바와 같이, 커버리지 향상 또는 확장을 위해 신호의 반복 전송을 지원하는 모드를 CE 모드라고 지칭하고, 커버리지 향상 또는 확장을 위한 신호의 반복 전송 횟수를 CE 레벨이라고 지칭한다. 예를 들어 표 6에 예시된 바와 같이, 제 1 모드(예, CE 모드 A)는 완전한 이동성 및 CSI 피드백이 지원되는 작은 커버리지 향상을 위한 모드이며, 반복이 없거나 반복 횟수가 작게 설정될 수 있다. 제 2 모드(예, CE 모드 B)는 CSI 피드백 및 제한된 이동성을 지원하는 극히 열악한 커버리지 조건의 단말을 위한 모드이며, 반복 횟수가 크게 설정될 수 있다.The MTC random access procedure (or RACH procedure) is basically the same as the LTE random access procedure (or RACH procedure) (see, for example, FIG. 4 and related description), and differs in the followings: MTC random access procedure (or RACH procedure) Is performed based on the Coverage Enhancement (CE) level. For example, to improve PRACH coverage, whether or not to repeat PRACH transmission may vary for each CE level. As described with reference to Table 6, a mode that supports repetitive transmission of signals for coverage enhancement or extension is referred to as a CE mode, and the number of repetitive transmissions of signals for coverage enhancement or extension is referred to as a CE level. For example, as illustrated in Table 6, the first mode (eg, CE mode A) is a mode for small coverage enhancement with full mobility and CSI feedback, and may be set to have no repetition or a small number of repetitions. The second mode (eg, CE mode B) is a mode for a terminal having extremely poor coverage conditions supporting CSI feedback and limited mobility, and the number of repetitions may be large.
기지국은 복수(예, 3개)의 RSRP(Reference Signal Received Power) 임계 값을 포함하는 시스템 정보를 방송하며, 단말은 상기 RSRP 임계 값과 RSRP 측정 값을 비교하여 CE 레벨을 결정할 수 있다. CE 레벨 별로 다음의 정보들이 시스템 정보를 통해 독립적으로 구성될 수 있다.The base station broadcasts system information including a plurality (eg, three) RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power) threshold values, and the terminal may determine the CE level by comparing the RSRP threshold value and the RSRP measurement value. For each CE level, the following information can be configured independently through system information.
- PRACH 자원 정보: PRACH 기회(opportunity)의 주기/오프셋, PRACH 주파수 자원PRACH resource information: period / offset of PRACH opportunity, PRACH frequency resource
- 프리앰블 그룹: 각 CE 레벨 별로 할당된 프리앰블 세트Preamble group: preamble set allocated for each CE level
- 프리앰블 시도(attempt) 별 반복 횟수, 최대 프리앰블 시도 횟수-Number of repetitions per preamble attempt, maximum number of preamble attempts
- RAR 윈도우 시간: RAR 수신이 기대되는 시구간의 길이(예, 서브프레임 개수)RAR window time: the length of time period for which RAR reception is expected (eg number of subframes)
- 충돌 해결 윈도우 시간: 충돌 해결 메시지 수신이 기대되는 시구간의 길이Conflict Resolution Window Time: The length of time period to expect to receive a conflict resolution message.
단말은 자신의 CE 레벨에 대응되는 PRACH 자원을 선택한 뒤, 선택된 PRACH 자원에 기반하여 PRACH 전송을 수행할 수 있다. MTC에서 사용되는 PRACH 파형(waveform)은 LTE에서 사용되는 PRACH 파형과 동일하다(예, OFDM 및 Zadoff-Chu 시퀀스). PRACH 이후에 전송되는 신호/메시지들도 반복 전송될 수 있으며, 반복 횟수는 CE 모드/레벨에 따라 독립적으로 설정될 수 있다.The UE may select a PRACH resource corresponding to its CE level and then perform PRACH transmission based on the selected PRACH resource. The PRACH waveform used in MTC is the same as the PRACH waveform used in LTE (eg, OFDM and Zadoff-Chu sequences). Signals / messages transmitted after the PRACH may also be repeatedly transmitted, and the number of repetitions may be independently set according to the CE mode / level.
NB-IoT 네트워크 접속 과정NB-IoT Network Connection Process
LTE를 기준으로 NB-IoT 네트워크 접속 과정에 대해 추가로 설명한다. 이하의 설명은 NR에도 확장 적용될 수 있다. 도 3 및 도 16에서 PSS, SSS 및 PBCH는 각각 NB-IoT에서 NPSS, NSSS 및 NPBCH로 대체된다. NPSS, NSSS 및 NPBCH에 대한 사항은 도 15를 참조할 수 있다. 또한, 도 3 및/또는 도 16에서, PDCCH, PDSCH, PUSCH, PRACH는 NPDCCH, NPDSCH, NPUSCH, NPRACH로 대체된다.The process of accessing an NB-IoT network is further described based on LTE. The following description may be extended to NR as well. 3 and 16, PSS, SSS and PBCH are replaced with NPSS, NSSS and NPBCH in NB-IoT, respectively. Refer to FIG. 15 for the details of NPSS, NSSS, and NPBCH. 3 and / or 16, PDCCH, PDSCH, PUSCH, PRACH are replaced with NPDCCH, NPDSCH, NPUSCH, NPRACH.
NB-IoT 랜덤 접속 과정(또는 RACH 과정)은 기본적으로 LTE 랜덤 접속 과정(또는 RACH 과정)(예, 도 4 및 관련 설명 참조)과 동일하며 다음 사항에서 차이가 있다. 첫째, RACH 프리앰블 포맷이 상이하다. LTE에서 프리앰블은 코드/시퀀스(예, zadoff-chu 시퀀스)에 기반하는 반면, NB-IoT에서 프리앰블은 서브캐리어이다. 둘째, NB-IoT 랜덤 접속 과정(또는 RACH 과정)은 CE 레벨에 기반하여 수행된다. 따라서, CE 레벨 별로 PRACH 자원이 서로 다르게 할당된다. 셋째, NB-IoT에는 SR 자원이 구성되지 않으므로, NB-IoT에서 상향링크 자원 할당 요청은 랜덤 접속 과정(또는 RACH 과정)을 이용하여 수행된다.The NB-IoT random access procedure (or RACH process) is basically the same as the LTE random access process (or RACH process) (for example, see FIG. 4 and related description), and differs in the following points. First, the RACH preamble format is different. In LTE, the preamble is based on code / sequence (eg, zadoff-chu sequence), whereas in NB-IoT the preamble is a subcarrier. Secondly, the NB-IoT random access procedure (or RACH procedure) is performed based on the CE level. Therefore, PRACH resources are allocated differently for each CE level. Third, since the SR resource is not configured in the NB-IoT, the uplink resource allocation request in the NB-IoT is performed using a random access procedure (or RACH procedure).
도 17은 NB-IoT RACH에서 프리앰블 전송을 예시한다.17 illustrates preamble transmission on an NB-IoT RACH.
도 17을 참조하면, NPRACH 프리앰블은 4개 심볼 그룹으로 구성되며, 각 심볼 그룹은 CP와 복수(예, 5)의 SC-FDMA 심볼로 구성될 수 있다. NR에서 SC-FDMA 심볼은 OFDM 심볼 또는 DFT-s-OFDM 심볼로 대체될 수 있다. NPRACH는 3.75kHz 서브캐리어 간격의 싱글-톤 전송만 지원하며, 서로 다른 셀 반경을 지원하기 위해 66.7μs과 266.67μs 길이의 CP를 제공한다. 각 심볼 그룹은 주파수 호핑을 수행하며 호핑 패턴은 다음과 같다. 첫 번째 심볼 그룹을 전송하는 서브캐리어는 의사 랜덤(pseudo-random) 방식으로 결정된다. 두 번째 심볼 그룹은 1 서브캐리어 도약, 세 번째 심볼 그룹은 6 서브캐리어 도약, 그리고 네 번째 심볼 그룹은 1 서브캐리어 도약을 한다. 반복 전송의 경우에는 주파수 호핑 절차를 반복 적용하며, NPRACH 프리앰블은 커버리지 향상을 위해 {1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128}번 반복 전송이 가능하다. NPRACH 자원은 CE 레벨 별로 구성될 수 있다. 단말은 하향링크 측정 결과(예, RSRP)에 따라 결정된 CE 레벨에 기반하여 NPRACH 자원을 선택하고, 선택된 NPRACH 자원을 이용하여 RACH 프리앰블을 전송할 수 있다. NPRACH는 앵커 캐리어에서 전송되거나, NPRACH 자원이 설정된 논-앵커 캐리어에서 전송될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 17, the NPRACH preamble may be configured with four symbol groups, and each symbol group may be configured with a CP and a plurality of SC-FDMA symbols. In NR, the SC-FDMA symbol may be replaced with an OFDM symbol or a DFT-s-OFDM symbol. The NPRACH only supports single-tone transmissions with 3.75kHz subcarrier spacing, and offers 66.7μs and 266.67μs length CPs to support different cell radii. Each symbol group performs frequency hopping and the hopping pattern is as follows. The subcarrier transmitting the first symbol group is determined in a pseudo-random manner. The second symbol group is one subcarrier leap, the third symbol group is six subcarrier leaps, and the fourth symbol group is one subcarrier leap. In the case of repetitive transmission, the frequency hopping procedure is repeatedly applied, and the NPRACH preamble can be repeatedly transmitted {1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128} to improve coverage. NPRACH resources may be configured for each CE level. The UE may select the NPRACH resource based on the CE level determined according to the downlink measurement result (eg, RSRP) and transmit the RACH preamble using the selected NPRACH resource. The NPRACH may be transmitted on an anchor carrier or on a non-anchor carrier with NPRACH resources configured.
G. DRX(discontinuous reception) 동작G. Discontinuous Reception (DRX) Operation
단말은 본 명세서에서 설명/제안한 절차 및/또는 방법들을 수행하면서 DRX 동작을 수행할 수 있다. DRX가 설정된 단말은 DL 신호를 불연속적으로 수신하여 전력 소비를 낮출 수 있다. DRX는 RRC(Radio Resource Control)_IDLE 상태, RRC_INACTIVE 상태, RRC_CONNECTED 상태에서 수행될 수 있다.The UE may perform the DRX operation while performing the procedures and / or methods described / proposed herein. The UE in which DRX is configured may lower power consumption by discontinuously receiving a DL signal. DRX may be performed in a Radio Resource Control (RRC) _IDLE state, an RRC_INACTIVE state, and an RRC_CONNECTED state.
RRC_CONNECTED DRXRRC_CONNECTED DRX
RRC_CONNECTED 상태에서 DRX는 PDCCH의 불연속 수신에 사용된다. 편의상, RRC_CONNECTED 상태에서 수행되는 DRX를 RRC_CONNECTED DRX라고 지칭한다. In the RRC_CONNECTED state, DRX is used for discontinuous reception of PDCCH. For convenience, DRX performed in the RRC_CONNECTED state is referred to as RRC_CONNECTED DRX.
도 18은 PDCCH의 불연속 수신을 위한 DRX 사이클을 예시한다.18 illustrates a DRX cycle for discontinuous reception of a PDCCH.
도 18을 참조하면, DRX 사이클은 On Duration과 Opportunity for DRX로 구성된다. DRX 사이클은 On Duration이 주기적으로 반복되는 시간 간격을 정의한다. On Duration은 단말이 PDCCH (또는, MPDCCH, NPDCCH)를 수신하기 위해 모니터링 하는 시간 구간을 나타낸다. DRX가 설정되면, 단말은 On Duration 동안 PDCCH 모니터링을 수행한다. PDCCH 모니터링 동안에 성공적으로 검출된 PDCCH가 있는 경우, 단말은 비활성(inactivity) 타이머를 동작시키고 깬(awake) 상태를 유지한다. 반면, PDCCH 모니터링 동안에 성공적으로 검출된 PDCCH가 없는 경우, 단말은 On Duration이 끝난 뒤 슬립(sleep) 상태로 들어간다. 따라서, DRX가 설정된 경우, 앞에서 설명/제안한 절차 및/또는 방법을 수행함에 있어서 PDCCH 모니터링/수신이 시간 도메인에서 불연속적으로 수행될 수 있다. 예를 들어, DRX가 설정된 경우, 본 발명에서 PDCCH 모니터링은 활성화된 셀(들)에서 DRX 설정에 따라 불연속적으로 수행될 수 있다. 구체적으로, PDCCH 기회(occasion)(예, PDCCH를 모니터링 하도록 설정된 시간 구간(예, 하나 이상의 연속된 OFDM 심볼))가 On Duration에 해당하는 경우 PDCCH 모니터링이 수행되고, Opportunity for DRX에 해당하는 경우 PDCCH 모니터링은 생략될 수 있다. 반면, DRX가 설정되지 않은 경우, 앞에서 설명/제안한 절차 및/또는 방법을 수행함에 있어서 PDCCH 모니터링/수신이 시간 도메인에서 연속적으로 수행될 수 있다. 예를 들어, DRX가 설정되지 않은 경우, 본 발명에서 PDCCH 수신 기회는 연속적으로 설정될 수 있다. 한편, DRX 설정 여부와 관계 없이, 측정 갭으로 설정된 시간 구간에서는 PDCCH 모니터링이 제한될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 18, a DRX cycle includes On Duration and Opportunity for DRX. The DRX cycle defines the time interval in which On Duration repeats periodically. On Duration indicates a time interval that the UE monitors to receive the PDCCH (or, MPDCCH, NPDCCH). If DRX is configured, the UE performs PDCCH monitoring for On Duration. If there is a PDCCH successfully detected during PDCCH monitoring, the UE operates an inactivity timer and maintains an awake state. On the other hand, if there is no PDCCH successfully detected during PDCCH monitoring, the UE enters a sleep state after the On Duration ends. Therefore, when DRX is configured, PDCCH monitoring / reception may be performed discontinuously in the time domain in performing the above-described / proposed procedures and / or methods. For example, when DRX is configured, PDCCH monitoring may be performed discontinuously according to DRX configuration in activated cell (s) in the present invention. Specifically, PDCCH monitoring is performed when a PDCCH opportunity (e.g., a time interval (e.g., one or more consecutive OFDM symbols) set to monitor the PDCCH) corresponds to On Duration, and PDCCH monitoring is performed when corresponding to Opportunity for DRX. Monitoring can be omitted. On the other hand, when DRX is not configured, PDCCH monitoring / reception may be continuously performed in the time domain in performing the above-described / proposed procedure and / or method. For example, when DRX is not set, in the present invention, the PDCCH reception opportunity may be set continuously. On the other hand, regardless of whether DRX is set, PDCCH monitoring may be limited in the time interval set as the measurement gap.
RRC_IDLE DRXRRC_IDLE DRX
RRC_IDLE 상태와 RRC_INACTIVE 상태에서 DRX는 페이징 신호를 불연속 수신하는데 사용된다. 편의상, RRC_IDLE (또는 RRC_INACTIVE) 상태에서 수행되는 DRX를 RRC_IDLE DRX라고 지칭한다. 따라서, DRX가 설정된 경우, 본 명세서에서 설명/제안한 절차 및/또는 방법을 수행함에 있어서 PDCCH 모니터링/수신이 시간 도메인에서 불연속적으로 수행될 수 있다.In the RRC_IDLE and RRC_INACTIVE states, the DRX is used to discontinuously receive the paging signal. For convenience, DRX performed in the RRC_IDLE (or RRC_INACTIVE) state is referred to as RRC_IDLE DRX. Therefore, when DRX is set, PDCCH monitoring / reception may be performed discontinuously in the time domain in performing the procedures and / or methods described / proposed herein.
도 19는 페이징을 위한 DRX 사이클을 예시한다.19 illustrates a DRX cycle for paging.
도 19를 참조하면, 페이징 신호의 불연속 수신을 위해 DRX가 구성될 수 있다. 단말은 상위 계층(예, RRC) 시그널링을 통해 기지국으로부터 DRX 구성 정보(DRX configuration information)를 수신할 수 있다. DRX 구성 정보는 DRX 사이클, DRX 오프셋, DRX 타이머에 대한 구성 정보 등을 포함할 수 있다. 단말은 DRX 사이클에 따라 On Duration과 Sleep duration을 반복한다. 단말은 On duration에서 웨이크업(wakeup) 모드로 동작하고, Sleep duration에서 슬립 모드로 동작할 수 있다. 웨이크업 모드에서 단말은 페이징 메시지를 수신하기 위해 PO를 모니터링 할 수 있다. PO는 단말이 페이징 메시지의 수신을 기대하는 시간 자원/구간(예, 서브프레임, 슬롯)을 의미한다. PO 모니터링은 PO에서 P-RNTI로 스크램블링된 PDCCH (또는, MPDCCH, NPDCCH)(페이징 PDCCH로 지칭)를 모니터링 하는 것을 포함한다. 페이징 메시지는 페이징 PDCCH에 포함되거나, 페이징 PDCCH에 의해 스케줄링 되는 PDSCH에 포함될 수 있다. PF(Paging Frame) 내에 하나 혹은 복수의 PO(들)이 포함되며, PF는 UE ID에 기반하여 주기적으로 설정될 수 있다. 여기서, PF는 하나의 무선 프레임에 해당하고, UE ID는 단말의 IMSI(International Mobile Subscriber Identity)에 기반하여 결정될 수 있다. DRX가 설정된 경우, 단말은 DRX 사이클 당 하나의 PO만을 모니터링 한다. 단말은 PO에서 자신의 ID 및/또는 시스템 정보의 변경을 지시하는 페이징 메시지를 수신한 경우, 기지국과의 연결을 초기화(또는 재설정) 하기 위해 RACH 과정을 수행하거나, 새로운 시스템 정보를 기지국으로부터 수신(또는 획득)할 수 있다. 따라서, 앞에서 설명/제안한 절차 및/또는 방법을 수행함에 있어서 기지국과의 연결을 위해 RACH를 수행하거나, 새로운 시스템 정보를 기지국으로부터 수신(또는 획득)하기 위해 PO 모니터링이 시간 도메인에서 불연속적으로 수행될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 19, DRX may be configured for discontinuous reception of a paging signal. The terminal may receive DRX configuration information from the base station through higher layer (eg, RRC) signaling. The DRX configuration information may include configuration information about a DRX cycle, a DRX offset, a DRX timer, and the like. The UE repeats the On Duration and the Sleep duration according to the DRX cycle. The UE may operate in a wakeup mode at On duration and may operate in a sleep mode at Sleep duration. In the wakeup mode, the UE may monitor the PO to receive a paging message. The PO means a time resource / interval (eg, subframe, slot) in which the terminal expects to receive a paging message. PO monitoring includes monitoring the PDCCH (or MPDCCH, NPDCCH) scrambled with P-RNTI in the PO (referred to as paging PDCCH). The paging message may be included in the paging PDCCH or may be included in the PDSCH scheduled by the paging PDCCH. One or a plurality of PO (s) is included in a paging frame (PF), and the PF may be periodically set based on the UE ID. Here, the PF corresponds to one radio frame, and the UE ID may be determined based on the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) of the terminal. If DRX is configured, the UE monitors only one PO per DRX cycle. When the terminal receives a paging message indicating a change of its ID and / or system information from the PO, the terminal performs a RACH process to initialize (or reset) the connection with the base station, or receives new system information from the base station ( Or acquisition). Accordingly, in performing the above described / proposed procedures and / or methods, PO monitoring may be performed discontinuously in the time domain to perform RACH for connection with a base station or to receive (or obtain) new system information from the base station. Can be.
도 20은 확장된 DRX(extended DRX, eDRX) 사이클을 예시한다.20 illustrates an extended DRX (eDRX) cycle.
DRX 사이클 구성에 따르면 최대 사이클 구간(cycle duration)은 2.56초로 제한될 수 있다. 하지만, MTC 단말이나 NB-IoT 단말과 같이 데이터 송수신이 간헐적으로 수행되는 단말의 경우 DRX 사이클 동안 불필요한 전력 소모가 발생할 수 있다. 단말의 전력 소모를 더 줄이기 위해 PSM(power saving mode)과 PTW(paging time window 또는 paging transmission window)에 기초하여 DRX 사이클을 대폭 확장시키는 방안이 도입되었으며, 확장된 DRX 사이클을 간략히 eDRX 사이클이라고 지칭한다. 구체적으로, UE ID에 기반하여 PH(Paging Hyper-frames)가 주기적으로 구성되며, PH 내에 PTW가 정의된다. 단말은 PTW 구간(duration)에서 DRX 사이클을 수행하여 자신의 PO에서 웨이크업 모드로 전환하여 페이징 신호를 모니터링 할 수 있다. PTW 구간 내에는 도 19의 DRX 사이클(예, 웨이크업 모드와 슬립 모드)이 하나 이상 포함될 수 있다. PTW 구간 내의 DRX 사이클 횟수는 기지국에 의해 상위 계층(예, RRC) 신호를 통해 구성될 수 있다.According to the DRX cycle configuration, the maximum cycle duration may be limited to 2.56 seconds. However, in the case of a terminal in which data transmission and reception are intermittently performed, such as an MTC terminal or an NB-IoT terminal, unnecessary power consumption may occur during a DRX cycle. In order to further reduce the power consumption of the UE, a method of greatly extending the DRX cycle based on a power saving mode (PSM) and a paging time window or a paging transmission window (PTW) has been introduced, and the extended DRX cycle is referred to simply as an eDRX cycle. . Specifically, PH (Paging Hyper-frames) is periodically configured based on the UE ID, PTW is defined in the PH. The UE may monitor a paging signal by performing a DRX cycle in a PTW duration to switch to a wake-up mode in its PO. One or more DRX cycles (eg, wake-up mode and sleep mode) of FIG. 19 may be included in the PTW section. The number of DRX cycles in the PTW interval may be configured by the base station through a higher layer (eg, RRC) signal.
H. 본 발명에서 제안하는 방법 및 장치H. Methods and Devices Proposed by the Invention
앞서 살핀 내용들(3GPP 시스템(system), 프레임 구조(frame structure), MTC/NB-IoT 시스템 등)은 본 발명에서 제안하는 방법들과 결합되어 적용될 수 있으며, 또는 본 발명에서 제안하는 방법들의 기술적 특징을 명확하게 하는데 보충될 수 있다.The contents described above (3GPP system, frame structure, MTC / NB-IoT system, etc.) may be applied in combination with the methods proposed in the present invention, or the description of the methods proposed in the present invention It can be supplemented to clarify the feature.
본 특허 명세서에서는 BL UE는 MTC 단말기로 명명하고, MTC 단말기 기능 보다 많은 것이 추가 구현되어서 CE 모드(CE mode, coverage enhanced mode 또는 coverage enhancement mode 또는 coverage extended mode 또는 coverage extension mode)로 동작하는 단말기를 Non-BL UE로 명명한다. Non-BL UE는 MTC 단말기와 비교하여 다음과 같은 특징이 있다.In the present patent specification, the BL UE is referred to as an MTC terminal, and more than the MTC terminal function is additionally implemented so that the terminal operating in the CE mode (CE mode, coverage enhanced mode or coverage enhancement mode or coverage extended mode or coverage extension mode) is non-compliant. Named as BL UE. Non-BL UE has the following characteristics compared to MTC terminal.
(1) 광대역 수신: MTC 단말기는 능력(capability)에 따라서 5MHz까지 하향링크(downlink) 수신이 가능하지만, non-BL UE는 기능상 단일 컴포넌트 캐리어(component carrier) 내에서 20MHz 대역폭까지 수신 가능하다.(1) Broadband reception: MTC terminal can receive downlink up to 5MHz according to the capability, but non-BL UE can receive up to 20MHz bandwidth in a single component carrier.
(2) 다중 수신 안테나: MTC 단말기는 단일 수신 안테나를 가정하지만, non-BL UE는 구현상 최소 2개 수신 안테나를 갖추고 있으며, CE 모드 동작 시에 단일 또는 다중 안테나 사용 여부는 현재까지는 구현 이슈이다.(2) Multiple Receive Antennas: Although the MTC terminal assumes a single receive antenna, the non-BL UE has at least two receive antennas in its implementation, and whether to use a single or multiple antennas in the CE mode operation is currently an implementation issue. .
(3) 높은 복잡도의 CSI 계산: MTC 단말기는 CRS(Cell Reference Signal 또는 Common Reference Signal) 기반으로 CSI(Channel State Information)를 계산하며 랭크(rank)는 1만 지원하기 때문에, CSI 계산시에 4x1 벡터(vector)의 PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)까지만 고려한다. 그러나, non-BL UE는 구현상 4개 이상의 송신 안테나 수를 가정한 CSI 계산이 지원되며, CSI-RS 기반의 CSI 계산 및 수신 신호 강도/품질 측정이 가능하다. 또한, CSI-RS 설정에 따른 MPDCCH/PDSCH 자원 매핑(resource mapping) 차이가 이미 구현되어 있다.(3) High Complexity CSI Calculation: Since MTC terminal calculates CSI (Channel State Information) based on CRS (Cell Reference Signal or Common Reference Signal) and supports only one rank, it is 4x1 vector. Consider only up to (vector) PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator). However, a non-BL UE can support CSI calculation assuming four or more transmit antennas, and can perform CSI-RS based CSI calculation and received signal strength / quality measurement. In addition, the difference of MPDCCH / PDSCH resource mapping according to CSI-RS configuration is already implemented.
상기 나열한 특징 뿐만 아니라 non-BL UE는 CE 모드로 동작하지 않는 경우, 즉 LTE 모드(LTE mode)로 동작하는 경우에 단말기의 카테고리(category)나 능력(capability)에 따라서 기존 MTC에서 요구하지 않는 다양한 기능을 갖추고 있다. 이와 같은 기능을 CE 모드 동작 시에 추가로 사용할지 여부는 단말기 구현 이슈 이지만, 이를 더욱 효과적으로 사용하기 위해서는 표준 기술에서 non-BL UE에 대한 특별한 설정 및 절차를 정의해서 이를 지원할 필요가 있다.In addition to the above-listed features, the non-BL UE does not operate in the CE mode, that is, when operating in the LTE mode (LTE mode) according to the category (category) or capability (capability) of the terminal does not require a variety of existing MTC It has a function. Whether to use such a function additionally in the CE mode operation is a terminal implementation issue, but in order to use it more effectively, it is necessary to define a special configuration and procedure for a non-BL UE in a standard technology and support it.
본 발명의 제안에서 non-BL UE가 CE 모드로 동작하는 경우를 중심으로 설명하지만, 본 발명의 제안은 CE 모드로 동작하는 경우에만 제한되어 적용되는 것은 아니다. 예를 들어, 일반적으로 CE 모드는 저전력으로 보다 넓은 커버리지를 가능하게 하기 위해 사용되기 때문에 본 발명은 UE(non-BL UE 및 BL UE)가 전력 절감 모드(power saving mode) 또는 저전력 모드(low power mode)로 동작하는 경우에도 동일/유사하게 적용될 수 있다. 따라서, 본 발명의 제안에서 “CE 모드”는 “전력 절감 모드” 또는 “저전력 모드”로 대체될 수 있다.In the proposal of the present invention, the case of the non-BL UE operating in the CE mode will be described. For example, since the CE mode is generally used to enable wider coverage at low power, the present invention is directed to a UE (non-BL UE and BL UE) in a power saving mode or a low power mode. The same / similarity may also be applied when operating in a mode). Therefore, in the proposal of the present invention, "CE mode" may be replaced with "power saving mode" or "low power mode".
H.1H.1 단말기 타입(type)에 따른 페이징 채널(paging channel) 수신 방법Paging channel reception method according to terminal type
non-BL UE가 CE 모드(CE mode)로 동작하는 경우에, non-BL UE는 페이징 채널 또는 정보(특히, ETWS(earthquake and tsunami warning system)나 CMAS(commercial mobile alert system)와 같은 긴급 채널 또는 정보)을 MTC UE를 위한 페이징 채널(paging channel)이 아닌 LTE 페이징 채널(paging channel)을 통해서 수신 받도록 설정될 수도 있다. 즉, MTC 단말기는 주로 전력 절감(power saving)과 저비용(low cost)를 위해서 설계되는 것을 가정하였기 때문에, 페이징 채널 모니터링(monitoring)이 RRC 유휴 모드(RRC Idle mode)에서만 수행하도록 제한되어 있거나, 또는 그 주기가 상당히 길 수 있다. 반면, non-BL UE는 일반적으로 MTC 단말기 보다 연산 능력(processing power)가 뛰어나며, LTE 채널을 읽을(수신 및 검출) 수 있는 구현이 이미 되어 있기 때문에, 경우에 따라서는 동일하거나 유사한 목적의 채널을 MTC 채널이 아닌 LTE 채널을 통해서 획득하는 것이 허용될 수도 있다. 이를 위해서는 기지국이 CE 모드로 동작하는 non-BL UE가 페이징 검출 시도할 수 있는 자원(resource)(예를 들어, (M)PDCCH 및 PDSCH의 시간/주파수 자원 할당(time/frequency resource allocation) 및 RNTI 등과 관계된 파라메터)를 설정할 수 있다. 이와 같은 설정을 받은 non-BL UE는 대응하는 MTC 채널을 무시하고 LTE 채널을 수신하거나, 또는 MTC 채널과 LTE 채널 모두에서 관련 메시지(message) 검출을 시도할 수 있다.When the non-BL UE operates in CE mode, the non-BL UE may be a paging channel or information (especially an emergency channel such as earthquake and tsunami warning system (ETWS) or commercial mobile alert system (CMAS)). Information) may be configured to be received through an LTE paging channel rather than a paging channel for the MTC UE. That is, since it is assumed that the MTC terminal is mainly designed for power saving and low cost, the paging channel monitoring is limited to be performed only in the RRC idle mode, or The cycle can be quite long. On the other hand, non-BL UEs generally have better processing power than MTC terminals and are already implemented to read (receive and detect) LTE channels. Acquisition via an LTE channel other than the MTC channel may be allowed. For this purpose, resources (eg, time / frequency resource allocation and RNTI of (M) PDCCH and PDSCH that a non-BL UE may attempt to detect paging by the base station operating in CE mode) may be used. And related parameters) can be set. The non-BL UE having such a configuration may receive the LTE channel by ignoring the corresponding MTC channel, or attempt to detect a related message in both the MTC channel and the LTE channel.
(1) 상기 제안을 CE 모드로 동작하는 non-BL UE가 특정 채널(예를 들어, 페이징 채널)을 MTC가 아닌 LTE 또는 NR 시스템에 정의된 동일 목적의 채널을 통해 수신할 수 있도록 허용 및 설정 하는 방법은 아래와 같은 절차를 요구할 수 있다.(1) allow and set the proposal to allow non-BL UEs operating in CE mode to receive a particular channel (e.g., paging channel) over the same purpose channel as defined in the LTE or NR system rather than MTC. The method may require the following procedure.
본 발명의 제안에서, 단말기가 RRC 연결 모드(RRC connected mode)(또는 RRC_CONNECTED 상태)에서 동작하는 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드를 제1 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드로 지칭할 수 있고, 단말기가 RRC 유휴 모드(RRC idle mode)(또는 RRC_IDLE 상태)에서 동작하는 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드를 제2 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드로 지칭할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제1 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드는 랜덤 접속 절차를 완료하여 RRC 연결을 획득한 후 데이터 송/수신을 수행하는데 사용되는 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드를 지칭할 수 있고, 제2 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드는 RRC 연결이 해제된 후 특정 채널(예, 페이징 채널)을 수신 시도하는데 사용되는 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드를 지칭할 수 있다. 및/또는, 제1 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드는 전력 절감 및 커버리지 확장 또는 향상(coverage extension or enhancement, CE)(또는 이를 위해 신호의 반복 송수신)을 지원하도록 설정되지 않은 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드를 지칭할 수 있고 제2 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드는 전력 절감 및 커버리지 확장 또는 향상(CE)(또는 이를 위해 신호의 반복 송수신)을 지원하도록 설정된 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드를 지칭할 수 있다. 및/또는, 제1 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드는 광대역(wideband)에서 동작하도록 설정된 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드를 지칭할 수 있고 제2 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드는 협대역(narrowband)에서 동작하도록 설정된 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드를 지칭할 수 있다.In the proposal of the present invention, a system or RAT or operation mode in which the terminal operates in an RRC connected mode (or RRC_CONNECTED state) may be referred to as a first system or RAT or operation mode, and the terminal is in an RRC idle mode. A system or a RAT or an operation mode operating in an RRC idle mode (or an RRC_IDLE state) may be referred to as a second system or an RAT or an operation mode. For example, the first system or RAT or operation mode may refer to a system or RAT or operation mode used to perform data transmission / reception after completing a random access procedure to obtain an RRC connection, and a second system or The RAT or operating mode may refer to a system or RAT or operating mode used to attempt to receive a specific channel (eg, paging channel) after the RRC connection is released. And / or, the first system or RAT or mode of operation is a system or RAT or mode of operation that is not configured to support power reduction and coverage extension or enhancement (CE) (or repeated transmission and reception of signals for this purpose). And the second system or RAT or mode of operation may refer to a system or RAT or mode of operation configured to support power savings and coverage expansion or enhancement (CE) (or repeated transmission and reception of signals for this purpose). And / or, the first system or RAT or mode of operation may refer to a system or RAT or mode of operation set to operate in wideband and the second system or RAT or mode of operation may be set to operate in narrowband. It may refer to a system or a RAT or an operation mode.
설명의 편의를 위해, 제1 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드는 제1 시스템 또는 제1 RAT로 통칭될 수 있고, 제2 시스템 또는 RAT 또는 동작 모드는 제2 시스템 또는 제2 RAT로 통칭될 수 있다.For convenience of description, the first system or the RAT or the operation mode may be collectively referred to as the first system or the first RAT, and the second system or the RAT or the operation mode may be collectively referred to as the second system or the second RAT.
일 예로, 제1 시스템은 LTE 시스템 또는 NR 시스템일 수 있고, 제2 시스템은 MTC 시스템 또는 NB-IoT 시스템 또는 NR-라이트(NR-light 또는 NR-lite) 시스템일 수 있다.For example, the first system may be an LTE system or an NR system, and the second system may be an MTC system or an NB-IoT system or an NR-light (NR-light or NR-lite) system.
(1-1) 기지국은 동일한 목적의 특정 채널을 단말기가 다른 시스템(예를 들어, LTE 또는 NR 또는 MTC 또는 NB-IoT 시스템 입장에서 inter-RAT(Radio Access Technology)으로 보일 수 있는 임의의 제3의 시스템)을 통해서 획득할 수 있도록, 관련 설정/파라메터(예를 들어, (M)PDCCH 및 PDSCH의 시간/주파수 자원 할당(time/frequency resource allocation) 및 RNTI 등과 관계된 파라메터, PF(paging frame)/PO(paging occasion)를 계산하기 위해서 사용할 UE_ID(동일한 값을 가정할 수도 있음) 및 DRX 사이클 정보, P-RNTI 등)를 단말기에서 전달할 수 있다. UE_ID는 IMSI(international mobile subscriber identity)에 기반한 UE 식별 정보를 지칭하며, DRX 사이클, UE_ID, PF/PO를 결정하는 자세한 내용은 3GPP TS(technical specification) 36.304에 기술된 내용 전체를 참조로서 포함한다. 이때, 단말기는 기지국으로부터 획득한 정보를 기반으로 해당 시스템 내에서 정의된 자원 단위(resource unit)(LTE를 예로 들어, LTE 시스템 대역폭 내에서 정의된 시간/주파수 자원)로 해당 채널과 연관된 참조 신호(reference signal)(LTE를 예로 들어 CRS 또는 NR을 예로 들어 DMRS)을 기반으로 채널을 수신/검출 할 수 있다.(1-1) A base station is any third channel that a terminal may appear as inter-RAT (Radio Access Technology) from another system (e.g., LTE or NR or MTC or NB-IoT system). Parameters related to time / frequency resource allocation of the (M) PDCCH and PDSCH and RNTI, paging frame (PF) / The UE may transmit UE_ID (which may assume the same value) and DRX cycle information, P-RNTI, etc.) to be used for calculating a PO (paging occasion). UE_ID refers to UE identification information based on an international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI), and details of determining a DRX cycle, UE_ID, and PF / PO include the entire contents described in 3GPP Technical Specification (TS) 36.304 as a reference. At this time, the terminal is based on the information obtained from the base station (resource unit) (resource unit) defined in the corresponding system (LTE, for example, time / frequency resources defined within the LTE system bandwidth) reference signal associated with the channel ( A channel may be received / detected based on a reference signal) (LTE as an example and CRS or NR as a DMRS).
일 예로, 기지국과 단말기가 제1 시스템(예, LTE 시스템 또는 NR 시스템)과 제2 시스템(예, MTC 시스템 또는 NB-IoT 시스템 또는 NR-라이트 시스템)을 동시에 지원할 수 있으며, 기지국은 제1 시스템의 특정 채널(예, 페이징 채널)과 동일한 목적으로 사용되는 제2 시스템의 특정 채널(예, 페이징 채널)을 위한 설정 정보(configuration information)를 단말기로 전송할 수 있다. 보다 구체적으로, 기지국은 제2 시스템의 특정 채널을 위한 설정 정보를 제1 시스템에서 단말기로 전송할 수 있다. 단말기는 제2 시스템의 특정 채널(예, 페이징 채널)을 위한 설정 정보를 기지국으로부터 수신할 수 있고, 보다 구체적으로 단말기는 제2 시스템의 특정 채널(예, 페이징 채널)을 위한 설정 정보를 제1 시스템에서 기지국으로부터 수신할 수 있다.For example, a base station and a terminal may simultaneously support a first system (eg, an LTE system or an NR system) and a second system (eg, an MTC system, an NB-IoT system, or an NR-lite system), and the base station may support the first system. Configuration information for a specific channel (eg, paging channel) of the second system used for the same purpose as a specific channel (eg, paging channel) may be transmitted to the terminal. More specifically, the base station may transmit configuration information for a specific channel of the second system from the first system to the terminal. The terminal may receive configuration information for a specific channel (eg, paging channel) of the second system from the base station, and more specifically, the terminal may receive configuration information for a specific channel (eg, paging channel) of the second system. Receive from the base station in the system.
추가적인 예로, 기지국은 제1 시스템에서 단말기와 RRC 연결 해제하는 경우 상기 설정 정보에 기반하여 제2 시스템에서 상기 단말기로 특정 채널(예, 페이징 채널)을 전송할 수 있다. 단말기는 제1 시스템에서 기지국과 RRC 연결 해제되는 경우, 상기 설정 정보에 기반하여 제2 시스템에서 기지국으로부터 특정 채널(예, 페이징 채널)을 수신할 수 있다.As an additional example, when the RRC connection with the terminal is released from the first system, the base station may transmit a specific channel (eg, paging channel) from the second system to the terminal based on the configuration information. When the RRC connection with the base station is released in the first system, the terminal may receive a specific channel (eg, paging channel) from the base station in the second system based on the configuration information.
(1-2) 이와 같은 정보(예, 제1 시스템의 특정 채널을 위한 설정 정보 및/또는 제2 시스템의 특정 채널을 위한 설정 정보)가 기지국으로부터 주어진 경우에, 단말기는 동일한 채널 수신을 선택적으로 시도할 수 있거나, 또는 기지국이 허용한 구간에서만 다른 시스템(예, 제2 시스템)의 특정 채널을 수신/검출 시도할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제2 시스템(예, MTC 시스템 및/또는 NB-IoT 시스템 및/또는 NR-라이트 시스템)의 페이징 채널(paging channel) 설정(또는 설정 정보)과 제1 시스템(예, LTE 시스템 또는 NR 시스템)의 페이징 채널 설정(또는 설정 정보)이 단말기에게 모두 주어진 경우에, 단말기는 제2 시스템(예, MTC 시스템 및/또는 NB-IoT 시스템 및/또는 NR-라이트 시스템)의 페이징 채널 수신 보다 제1 시스템(예, LTE 시스템 또는 NR 시스템)의 페이징 채널 수신을 우선시할 수 있으며, 해당 구간 동안 기지국은 단말기에게 MTC 스케줄링(scheduling)을 하지 않는다고 기대할 수 있다. 만약, 제2 시스템(예, MTC 시스템 및/또는 NB-IoT 시스템 및/또는 NR-라이트 시스템)의 페이징 채널 설정(또는 설정 정보)과 제1 시스템(예, LTE 시스템 또는 NR 시스템)의 페이징 채널 설정(또는 설정 정보)이 모두 주어진 경우에, 단말기는 RRC 연결 모드(RRC connected mode)에서도 제1 시스템(예, LTE 시스템 또는 NR 시스템)의 페이징 채널 수신을 시도하도록 지시 받거나 또는 지시 받은 것으로 간주할 수 있으며, 마찬가지로 해당 구간에서 제2 시스템(예, MTC 시스템 및/또는 NB-IoT 시스템 및/또는 NR-라이트 시스템)에서 스케줄링을 기대하지 않도록 허용될 수 있다.(1-2) When such information (e.g., configuration information for a specific channel of the first system and / or configuration information for a specific channel of the second system) is given from the base station, the terminal selectively selects the same channel reception. It may attempt to receive or detect a specific channel of another system (eg, the second system) only in the interval allowed by the base station. For example, paging channel configuration (or configuration information) of a second system (e.g., MTC system and / or NB-IoT system and / or NR-lite system) and a first system (e.g., LTE system or If the paging channel setup (or setup information) of the NR system is all given to the terminal, then the terminal receives more than the paging channel reception of the second system (e.g., the MTC system and / or the NB-IoT system and / or the NR-lite system). Paging channel reception of the first system (eg, LTE system or NR system) may be prioritized, and the base station may expect that the terminal does not perform MTC scheduling during the corresponding period. If the paging channel configuration (or configuration information) of the second system (e.g., MTC system and / or NB-IoT system and / or NR-lite system) and the paging channel of the first system (e.g. LTE system or NR system) Given all of the configuration (or configuration information), the terminal may or may not be instructed to attempt to receive a paging channel of the first system (eg, LTE system or NR system) even in RRC connected mode. Likewise, it may be allowed not to expect scheduling in the second system (eg, MTC system and / or NB-IoT system and / or NR-light system) in the corresponding interval.
(1-3) 상기 제안에 따라서 단말기가 등록된 RAT(Radio Access Technology)(또는 시스템)(즉 랜덤 접속(Random access) 절차를 수행하고 시스템 관련 정보를 획득하고 데이터 송/수신을 수행했던 RAT)과 페이징 채널(paging channel) 수신을 시도하는 RAT(또는 시스템)가 상이한 경우에, 단말기는 페이징 채널 수신 이후 동작을 어떤 RAT에서 수행해야 할지 결정할 필요가 있다. 예를 들어, 단말기가 RRC 연결 모드에서 제1 시스템(예, LTE 시스템 또는 NR 시스템)에서 동작하고 (RRC 연결 해제 후) RRC 유휴 모드에서 제2 시스템(예, MTC 시스템 또는 NB-IoT 시스템 또는 NR-라이트 시스템)에서 동작하는 경우, 단말기가 제2 시스템에서 특정 채널(예, 페이징 채널)을 수신한 후 제1 시스템과 제2 시스템 중에서 어느 시스템에서 후속 동작(예, 랜덤 접속 과정)을 수행할지 결정할 수 있다.(1-3) In accordance with the above proposal, the terminal registers a registered Radio Access Technology (RAT) (or system) (that is, a RAT that performs a random access procedure, acquires system related information, and performs data transmission / reception). If the RAT (or system) that attempts to receive the paging channel differs from the terminal, the terminal needs to determine in which RAT the operation should be performed after the paging channel is received. For example, the terminal operates in a first system (e.g., LTE system or NR system) in RRC connected mode (after RRC disconnection) and a second system (e.g., MTC system or NB-IoT system or NR in RRC idle mode). When operating in a light system, the terminal receives a specific channel (eg, paging channel) from the second system and then performs a subsequent operation (eg, random access procedure) in the first system or the second system. You can decide.
이는 페이징 채널에서 단말기가 해당 채널 수신 이후에 동작할 RAT(또는 시스템)를 직접 지시하는 방법이 있을 수 있으며, 해당 RAT에서 후속 동작을 수행할 수 없는 경우(예를 들어, 단말기의 SNR(Signal-to-Noise Ratio)이 지시 받은 RAT에서 충분히 높지 않거나, 전력이 충분하지 않은 경우)에 단말기가 RAT을 직접 선택해서 랜덤 접속 절차부터 다시 통신을 시도 할 수 있다. 만약, 단말기가 페이징 채널 수신 이전에 기지국으로부터 획득한 RAT의 정보가 페이징 수신을 제외한 통신을 위해서 충분하지 않은 경우에, 페이징 채널에는 후속 동작을 위해서 필요한 정보가 모두 포함되거나 또는 필요한 정보를 획득할 수 있는 해당 RAT의 채널 정보를 알려줄 수 있다. 이때, 단말기의 ID(예를 들어, C-RNTI)는 기존 RAT의 ID와 다른 값을 페이징 채널 또는 연관된 후속 채널에서 할당 받을 수 있으며, 필요한 경우에 CFRA(Contention Free-based Random access)를 수행할 수 있도록 관련 파라메터를 제공 받을 수 있다.This may be a method in which the terminal directly instructs the RAT (or system) to operate after receiving the corresponding channel in the paging channel, and if the subsequent operation cannot be performed in the corresponding RAT (for example, the SNR (Signal- If the to-noise ratio is not high enough or the power is not sufficient in the indicated RAT, the terminal may directly select the RAT and try again from the random access procedure. If the information of the RAT obtained from the base station before the paging channel reception is not sufficient for the communication except the paging reception, the paging channel may include all the information necessary for the subsequent operation or obtain necessary information. It can inform the channel information of the corresponding RAT. In this case, the ID (eg, C-RNTI) of the terminal may be assigned a value different from the ID of the existing RAT in a paging channel or an associated subsequent channel, and if necessary, may perform contention free-based random access (CFRA). Relevant parameters can be provided.
(1-4) 본 발명의 제안에 따르면, 단말기는 RRC 연결 모드에서 제1 시스템(예, LTE 시스템 또는 NR 시스템)에서 동작하고 RRC 유휴 모드에서 제2 시스템(예, MTC 시스템 또는 NB-IoT 시스템 또는 NR-라이트 시스템)에서 특정 채널(예, 페이징 채널)을 수신/검출 시도하도록 설정될 수 있다. 혹은, 단말기는 RRC 연결 모드에서 제2 시스템(예, MTC 시스템 또는 NB-IoT 시스템 또는 NR-라이트 시스템)에서 동작하고 RRC 유휴 모드에서 제1 시스템(예, LTE 시스템 또는 NR 시스템)에서 특정 채널(예, 페이징 채널)을 수신/검출 시도하도록 설정될 수 있다.(1-4) According to the proposal of the present invention, a terminal operates in a first system (eg, an LTE system or an NR system) in an RRC connected mode and a second system (eg, an MTC system or an NB-IoT system in an RRC idle mode). Or NR-lite system) to attempt to receive / detect a particular channel (eg, paging channel). Alternatively, the terminal may operate in a second system (eg, an MTC system or an NB-IoT system or an NR-lite system) in an RRC connected mode, and may use a specific channel (eg, an LTE system or an NR system) in an RRC idle mode. For example, a paging channel) may be configured to attempt to receive / detect.
상기 제안에서 제2 시스템(예, 협대역(narrow-band) 시스템)(예를 들어, MTC 시스템 또는 NB-IoT 시스템 또는 NR-라이트 시스템)에서 등록되어서 통신을 하던 단말기가 RRC 유휴 모드(RRC Idle mode)에서 페이징 수신은 제1 시스템(예, 광대역(wide-band) 시스템)(예를 들어, LTE 시스템 또는 NR 시스템)에서 모니터링(monitoring) 하도록 지시 받는 경우에, RRC 유휴 모드에서 이동성(mobility) 관련 동작(예를 들어, 셀 선택/재선택(cell selection/reselection)을 위해서 필요한 측정(measurement) 등의 동작)도 해당 RAT (상기 예시에서 제1 시스템(예, 광대역 시스템))에서 수행하도록 설정/허용 받을 수 있다. 또는, RRC 유휴 모드에서 이동성 관련 동작(예를 들어, 셀 선택/재선택을 위해서 필요한 측정 등의 동작)도 해당 RAT (상기 예시에서 제1 시스템(예, 광대역 시스템))에서 수행하도록 설정/허용 받는 경우에, 단말기는 RRC 유휴 모드에서 페이징 수신은 제1 시스템(예, 광대역 시스템)(예를 들어, LTE 시스템 또는 NR 시스템)에서 모니터링 하도록 지시 받고, 관련 파라메터를 기지국으로부터 획득할 수 있다.In the proposal, a terminal registered in a second system (for example, a narrow-band system) (for example, an MTC system, an NB-IoT system, or an NR-right system) and communicating with an RRC idle mode (RRC Idle) mode in the RRC idle mode when paging reception is directed to monitor in a first system (e.g., a wide-band system) (e.g., an LTE system or an NR system). Relevant operations (e.g., measures such as measurements required for cell selection / reselection) are also set to be performed in the corresponding RAT (first system (e.g., broadband system) in the above example) You can accept it. Alternatively, the RRC idle mode may be configured / allowed to perform mobility related operations (eg, a measurement required for cell selection / reselection, etc.) in the corresponding RAT (first system (eg, broadband system) in the above example). When receiving, the terminal may be instructed to monitor paging reception in a first system (e.g., broadband system) (e.g., LTE system or NR system) in RRC idle mode and obtain relevant parameters from the base station.
혹은, 상기 제안에서 제1 시스템(예, 광대역(wideband)) 시스템)(예를 들어, LTE 시스템 또는 NR 시스템)에서 등록되어서 통신을 하던 단말기가 RRC 유휴 모드(RRC Idle mode)에서 페이징 수신은 제2 시스템(예, 협대역(narrow-band) 시스템)(예를 들어, MTC 시스템 또는 NB-IoT 시스템 또는 NR-라이트 시스템)에서 모니터링(monitoring) 하도록 지시 받는 경우에, RRC 유휴 모드에서 이동성(mobility) 관련 동작(예를 들어, 셀 선택/재선택(cell selection/reselection)을 위해서 필요한 측정(measurement) 등의 동작)도 해당 RAT (상기 예시에서 제2 시스템(예, 협대역 시스템))에서 수행하도록 설정/허용 받을 수 있다. 또는, RRC 유휴 모드에서 이동성 관련 동작(예를 들어, 셀 선택/재선택을 위해서 필요한 측정 등의 동작)도 해당 RAT (상기 예시에서 제2 시스템(예, 협대역 시스템))에서 수행하도록 설정/허용 받는 경우에, 단말기는 RRC 유휴 모드에서 페이징 수신은 제2 시스템(예, 협대역 시스템)(예를 들어, MTC 시스템 또는 NB-IoT 시스템 또는 NR-라이트 시스템)에서 모니터링 하도록 지시 받고, 관련 파라메터를 기지국으로부터 획득할 수 있다.Alternatively, in the proposal, a terminal registered and communicating in a first system (for example, a wideband system) (for example, an LTE system or an NR system) may receive paging in an RRC idle mode. Mobility in RRC idle mode when directed to monitor in a two-system (e.g., narrow-band system) (e.g., MTC system or NB-IoT system or NR-light system). ) Related operations (e.g., operations such as measurements required for cell selection / reselection) are also performed in the corresponding RAT (second system (e.g., narrowband system in the above example)). Can be set / allowed. Alternatively, the mobility-related operation (eg, an operation such as measurement required for cell selection / reselection) in the RRC idle mode may also be configured to be performed by the corresponding RAT (second system (eg, narrowband system) in the above example). If allowed, the terminal is instructed to monitor paging reception in a second system (e.g., narrowband system) (e.g., MTC system or NB-IoT system or NR-light system) in RRC idle mode, and associated parameters. Can be obtained from the base station.
(1-5) 상기 제안에서 제2 시스템(예, 협대역(narrow-band) 시스템)(예를 들어, MTC 시스템 또는 NB-IoT 시스템 또는 NR-라이트 시스템)에서 등록되어 통신을 하던 단말기가 RRC 유휴 모드(RRC Idle mode)에서 페이징 수신은 제1 시스템(예, 광대역(wide-band) 시스템)(예를 들어, LTE 시스템 또는 NR 시스템)(또는 등록되었던 RAT과 다른 RAT)에서 페이징 모니터링(monitoring)을 검출하는 경우, 또는 제1 시스템(예, 광대역(wide-band) 시스템)에서 등록되어 통신을 하던 단말기가 RRC 유휴 모드(RRC Idle mode)에서 페이징 수신은 제2 시스템(예, 협대역(narrow-band) 시스템)(또는 등록되었던 RAT과 다른 RAT)에서 페이징 모니터링(monitoring)을 검출하는 경우, 기지국이 단말기의 후속 동작이 수행될 시스템 (협대역 또는 광대역 시스템 중에서) 또는 RAT 을 직접 지시하거나 또는 RRC 유휴 모드로 진입하는 절차에서 페이징 검출 후에 동작(송/수신)할 시스템 또는 RAT을 미리 설정해 줄 수 있다. 또한, 단말기가 페이징을 수신한 시스템 또는 RAT과 다른 RAT에서 후속 동작을 원하는 경우가 있을 수 있는데, 이때에는 페이징에서 직접 지시 받거나 또는 미리 설정된 시스템 또는 RAT에서 랜덤 접속(Random access)를 수행하는 과정에서 이를 알릴 수 있다. 즉, 랜덤 접속 Msg.1 또는 Msg.3 또는 그 이후의 상향링크 신호/채널 전송 과정에서, 단말기가 후속해서 동작하고 싶은 시스템 또는 RAT를 기지국에 요청할 수 있으며, 이를 기지국이 요청하는 경우에는 해당 RAT의 필요한 정보를 추가 제공하면서 단말기의 요청을 수락할 수 있다.(1-5) In the above proposal, the RRC is registered in the second system (e.g., a narrow-band system) (e.g., an MTC system, an NB-IoT system, or an NR-right system) to communicate. In RRC Idle mode, paging reception is monitored by a first system (e.g., wide-band system) (e.g., LTE system or NR system) (or a different RAT than the registered RAT). ), Or a terminal registered in a first system (e.g., a wide-band system) and communicating with a terminal in an RRC idle mode (RRC Idle mode), receives a second system (e.g., a narrowband (e.g., When paging monitoring is detected in a narrow-band system (or a different RAT than the registered RAT), the base station directly instructs the system (either narrowband or broadband system) or the RAT in which subsequent operation of the terminal is to be performed, or Or to enter RRC idle mode In the procedure, the system or RAT to operate (send / receive) after paging detection can be set in advance. In addition, there may be a case in which the terminal desires subsequent operation in a system or a RAT different from the RAT that receives the paging. In this case, the terminal may be directly instructed in paging or perform random access in a predetermined system or RAT. This can be announced. That is, in the random access Msg.1 or Msg.3 or later uplink signal / channel transmission process, the terminal may request a base station or a system that you want to operate subsequently, if the base station requests the corresponding RAT The terminal can accept the request of the terminal while providing the necessary information.
(1-6) 상기 제안에서 제2 시스템(예, 협대역(narrow-band) 시스템)에서 등록되어서 동작하던 단말기가 특정 목적(예를 들어, 페이징 채널 모니터링 또는 이동성 관리(mobility management)를 위한 측정(measurement))을 위해서 제1 시스템(예, 광대역(wideband) 시스템)의 동작을 수행하는 경우에, 단말기는 제2 시스템(예, 협대역 시스템)에서 필요로 하는 복잡도(예를 들어, 단말기의 송신 그리고/또는 수신 대역폭, 송신 그리고/또는 수신 안테나 수) 이상을 지원하지 않을 수도 있다. 예를 들어, 제1 시스템(예, 광대역 시스템)에서 기회적으로 동작하는 경우에 수신 안테나 수는 여전히 제2 시스템(예, 협대역 시스템)에서 요구하거나 사용했던 수의 안테나만 사용하도록 허용될 수 있다. 또는, 제1 시스템(예, 광대역 시스템)에서 요구하는 복잡도(예를 들어, 단말기의 송신 그리고/또는 수신 대역폭, 송신 그리고/또는 수신 안테나 수)를 지원할 수 있는 단말기의 경우에 한해서 이와 같은 동작이 허용될 수도 있다.(1-6) In the above proposal, a terminal registered and operated in a second system (e.g., a narrow-band system) is measured for a specific purpose (e.g., for paging channel monitoring or mobility management). In case of performing the operation of the first system (e.g., wideband system) for the purpose of the measurement, the terminal needs the complexity (e.g., Transmit and / or receive bandwidth, transmit and / or receive antennas) or more. For example, when opportunistically operating in a first system (eg, broadband system), the number of receive antennas may still be allowed to use only the number of antennas required or used by the second system (eg, narrowband system). have. Alternatively, such an operation may be performed only in the case of a terminal capable of supporting the complexity required by the first system (eg, a broadband system) (for example, the transmission and / or reception bandwidth of the terminal, the number of transmission and / or reception antennas). May be allowed.
앞서 설명한 바와 같이, 상이한 RAT 또는 시스템이란 LTE, NR, (e)MTC, NB-IoT, NR-라이트 등을 의미할 수 있다. 혹은 페이징 채널(paging channel) 전송에 서로 다른 커버리지(coverage)를 지원하기 위한 서로 다른 반복 레벨(repetition level)(또는 반복 횟수)이 지원되고 이에 따라서 페이징 수신 이후에 후속 채널 송수신에 적용할 반복 레벨(또는 반복 횟수)이나 동작이 달라지는 경우, 동일한 RAT 또는 시스템에 대해서도 서로 다른 반복 레벨(또는 반복 횟수)에 대한 동작을 상이한 RAT 또는 시스템에서의 동작으로 간주하여 상기 동작/제안을 적용할 수도 있다.As described above, different RATs or systems may mean LTE, NR, (e) MTC, NB-IoT, NR-Lite, and the like. Alternatively, different repetition levels (or number of repetitions) to support different coverages for paging channel transmission are supported, and accordingly, repetition levels to be applied to subsequent channel transmission / reception after paging reception ( Alternatively, when the number of repetitions) or the operations are different, the operation / suggestion may be applied to the same RAT or the system by considering the operations for different repetition levels (or the number of repetitions) as operations in different RATs or systems.
도 21은 본 발명에서 제안한 방법(예, H.1 절의 제안 (1-1) 내지 (1-6) 참조)에 따라 단말기와 기지국이 신호를 송수신하는 방법을 예시한다. 도 21의 예는 H.1 절에서 상기 제안한 방법을 중심으로 설명하지만 H.2 절 내지 H.11 절에서 제안한 방법들 중 하나 이상이 도 21의 예에 제한 없이 결합되어 적용될 수 있다. 제1 시스템과 제2 시스템은 앞서 H.1 절에서 설명한 바와 같이 정의될 수 있다. 도 21에 예시된 방법에서, 단말기와 기지국은 RRC 연결 모드에서 제1 시스템에서 동작하고 RRC 유휴 모드에서 제2 시스템에서 동작하는 것을 가정하지만, 이는 오로지 설명을 명확히 하기 위함이고 본 발명의 제안은 이에 제한되지 않는다. 도 21의 방법과 본 발명의 제안은 단말기와 기지국이 RRC 연결 모드에서 제2 시스템에서 동작하고 RRC 유휴 모드에서 제1 시스템에서 동작하는 경우에도 동일/유사하게 적용될 수 있다. 단말기와 기지국은 제1 시스템과 제2 시스템 모두를 지원할 수 있다(또는 제1 시스템과 제2 시스템 모두에서 동작할 수 있도록 설정될 수 있다). 도 21의 예에서 단말기는 non-BL UE에 해당할 수 있으며, MTC 단말기보다 더 많은 기능이 추가 구현되어 CE 모드로 동작하는 단말기일 수 있다(예, H 절 “본 발명에서 제안하는 방법 및 장치” 참조). 앞서 설명한 바와 같이 단말기는 사용자 기기(user equipment, UE), MS(mobile station), UT(user terminal), SS(subscriber station), MT(mobile terminal), 무선 디바이스 등과 같은 다른 용어로 지칭될 수 있고, 기지국(BS)은 단말기와 통신하는 무선 장치로서 eNB(evolved Node-B), gNB(general Node-B), BTS(base transceiver system), AP(access point) 등과 같은 다른 용어로 지칭 될 수 있다(예, 본 명세서의 A절 참조).21 illustrates a method for transmitting and receiving a signal between a terminal and a base station according to a method proposed in the present invention (for example, refer to proposals (1-1) to (1-6) in Section H.1). Although the example of FIG. 21 is described based on the method proposed in Section H.1, one or more of the methods proposed in Sections H.2 to H.11 may be combined and applied to the example of FIG. 21 without limitation. The first system and the second system may be defined as described in section H.1 above. In the method illustrated in FIG. 21, it is assumed that the terminal and the base station operate in the first system in the RRC connected mode and in the second system in the RRC idle mode, but this is only for clarity of explanation and the proposal of the present invention is It is not limited. The method of FIG. 21 and the proposal of the present invention may be applied to the same / similarly when the terminal and the base station operate in the second system in the RRC connected mode and operate in the first system in the RRC idle mode. The terminal and the base station can support both the first system and the second system (or can be configured to operate in both the first system and the second system). In the example of FIG. 21, the terminal may correspond to a non-BL UE, and may be a terminal operating in a CE mode by implementing more functions than the MTC terminal (eg, the H method “the method and apparatus proposed by the present invention). " Reference). As described above, a terminal may be referred to by other terms such as a user equipment (UE), a mobile station (MS), a user terminal (UT), a subscriber station (SS), a mobile terminal (MT), a wireless device, and the like. The base station (BS) is a wireless device that communicates with a terminal and may be referred to by other terms such as an evolved Node-B (eNB), a General Node-B (gNB), a base transceiver system (BTS), an access point (AP), and the like. (Eg, see Section A herein).
S2102 단계에서, 단말기는 기지국으로부터 제2 시스템의 특정 채널을 위한 설정 정보를 수신하고, 기지국은 제2 시스템의 특정 채널을 위한 설정 정보를 단말기로 전송할 수 있다. 일 예로, S2102 단계에서 단말기와 기지국은 (RRC 연결 모드에서) 제1 시스템에서 동작할 수 있고, 이 경우 제2 시스템의 특정 채널을 위한 설정 정보는 제1 시스템에서 수신될 수 있다. 일 예로, 특정 채널은 페이징과 관련된 채널일 수 있지만, 본 발명의 제안은 이에 제한되지 않으며 페이징 채널이 아닌 다른 채널인 경우에도 동일/유사하게 적용될 수 있다. 보다 구체적인 예로, 특정 채널은 페이징과 관련된 물리 제어 채널(예, PDCCH, MPDCCH, NPDCCH)일 수도 있고, 또는 페이징 메시지를 나르는 페이징 채널일 수도 있다.In step S2102, the terminal receives the configuration information for the specific channel of the second system from the base station, the base station may transmit the configuration information for the specific channel of the second system to the terminal. For example, in step S2102, the terminal and the base station may operate in the first system (in RRC connected mode), and in this case, configuration information for a specific channel of the second system may be received in the first system. For example, although a specific channel may be a channel related to paging, the proposal of the present invention is not limited thereto and may be applied to the same / similarly when the channel is other than the paging channel. As a more specific example, the specific channel may be a physical control channel (eg, PDCCH, MPDCCH, NPDCCH) related to paging, or may be a paging channel carrying a paging message.
S2104 단계에서, 단말기는 S2102 단계에서 수신된 설정 정보에 기반하여 RRC 유휴 모드에서 제2 시스템에서 특정 채널을 수신/검출 시도할 수 있다. 기지국은 S2102 단계에서 전송한 설정 정보에 기반하여 RRC 유휴 모드의 단말기로 제2 시스템에서 특정 채널을 전송할 수 있다.In operation S2104, the terminal may attempt to receive / detect a specific channel in the second system in the RRC idle mode based on the configuration information received in operation S2102. The base station may transmit a specific channel in the second system to the terminal of the RRC idle mode based on the configuration information transmitted in step S2102.
S2106 단계에서, 단말기는 S2104 단계에서 특정 채널을 수신한 것에 대한 응답으로 제1 시스템 또는 제2 시스템에서 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있다. 일 예로, 단말기는 (기지국에 의해) 미리 설정된 시스템에서 랜덤 접속 절차 및/또는 후속 데이터 송수신(랜덤 접속 절차를 통해 RRC 연결을 획득한 후 수행하는 데이터 송수신을 지칭)을 수행할 수 있다. 보다 구체적인 예로, 랜덤 접속 절차 및/또는 후속 데이터 송수신을 수행할 시스템은 RRC 연결 해제 시에 기지국에 의해 설정될 수 있다.In operation S2106, the terminal may perform a random access procedure in the first system or the second system in response to receiving the specific channel in operation S2104. As an example, the terminal may perform a random access procedure and / or subsequent data transmission / reception (referring to data transmission and reception performed after acquiring an RRC connection through a random access procedure) in a preset system (by the base station). As a more specific example, a system for performing random access procedure and / or subsequent data transmission / reception may be set by the base station at the time of RRC connection release.
다른 예로, 단말기는 특정 채널을 통해 수신(S2104)된 정보에 기반하여 제1 시스템과 제2 시스템 중에서 특정 채널의 검출 후에 동작할 시스템을 결정하고, 결정된 시스템에서 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있다. 보다 구체적인 예로, 단말기는 특정 채널의 수신에 대한 응답으로 제2 시스템에서 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하여 기지국과 RRC 연결을 획득한 후 상기 기지국과의 데이터 송수신은 제1 시스템에서 수행할 수 있다. 다른 예로, 단말기는 특정 채널의 수신에 대한 응답으로 제1 시스템에서 직접 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하여 기지국과 RRC 연결을 획득한 후 제1 시스템에서 상기 기지국과 데이터 송수신을 수행할 수 있다.As another example, the terminal may determine a system to operate after detection of a specific channel among the first system and the second system based on the information received through the specific channel (S2104), and perform a random access procedure in the determined system. As a more specific example, the terminal may perform an RRC connection with the base station by performing a random access procedure in the second system in response to the reception of a specific channel and then transmit and receive data with the base station in the first system. As another example, the terminal may perform an RRC connection with the base station by performing a direct random access procedure in the first system in response to the reception of a specific channel, and then perform data transmission and reception with the base station in the first system.
일 예로, 단말기는 특정 채널의 검출 후에 동작할 시스템을 지시하는 정보를 제1 시스템에서 수신할 수 있고(미도시), 수신된 정보에 의해 지시된 시스템에서 랜덤 접속 절차 및/또는 후속 데이터 송수신을 수행할 수 있다. 또 다른 예로, 단말기는 특정 채널의 검출/수신 후에 동작할 시스템을 결정하고, 결정된 시스템에 대한 요청을 기지국으로 전송하고, 요청에 대한 수락을 기지국으로부터 수신함으로써, 단말기가 결정한 시스템에서 랜덤 접속 절차 및/또는 후속 데이터 송수신을 수행할 수 있다. 이 경우, 단말기가 결정한 시스템에서 동작하기 위해 필요한 정보는 기지국이 단말기로 전송할 수 있다. 앞서 설명한 바와 같이, 단말기가 결정한 시스템에 대한 요청은 랜덤 접속 프리앰블(또는 Msg.1)을 통해 전송되거나 또는 랜덤 접속 응답(또는 Msg.2)에 대한 상향링크 전송(또는 Msg.3)(또는 RRC 연결 요청 메시지를 포함하는 상향링크 전송)을 통해 전송되거나 또는 그 이후의 상향링크 신호/채널 전송 과정을 통해 전송될 수 있다.As an example, the terminal may receive information in the first system indicating a system to operate after detection of a specific channel (not shown), and may perform random access procedure and / or subsequent data transmission and reception in the system indicated by the received information. Can be done. As another example, the terminal determines a system to operate after detecting / receiving a specific channel, transmits a request for the determined system to the base station, and receives an acceptance of the request from the base station, thereby allowing a random access procedure and And / or subsequent data transmission and reception. In this case, the base station may transmit information necessary for operating in the system determined by the terminal to the terminal. As described above, the request for the system determined by the terminal is transmitted through a random access preamble (or Msg. 1) or an uplink transmission (or Msg. 3) (or RRC) for a random access response (or Msg. 2). Uplink transmission including a connection request message) or a subsequent uplink signal / channel transmission process.
이외에도 H.1절의 (1-1) 내지 (1-6)의 제안들이 도 21의 방법에 제한 없이 적용될 수 있다. 또한, 도 21에 예시된 방법은 상기 설명으로만 제한되는 것은 아니며 H.1 절 내지 H.11 절에서 설명한 방법들과 결합되어 구현될 수 있다.In addition, the proposals of (1-1) to (1-6) in Section H.1 may be applied without limitation to the method of FIG. In addition, the method illustrated in FIG. 21 is not limited to the above description and may be implemented in combination with the methods described in Sections H.1 to H.11.
상기 제안 (1)에 추가적으로 또는 독립적으로, 만약, CE 모드(CE mode)로 동작하는 non-BL UE에게 RRC 연결 모드(RRC connected mode)에서 UE 특정 검색 공간(UE-specific search space)(USS)가 아닌 공통 검색 공간(Common search space)(CSS)와 같은 채널을 추가로 수신해서 ETWS(earthquake and tsunami warning system)/CMAS(commercial mobile alert system)와 같은 정보(예를 들어, 페이징 채널을 수신)를 획득할 수 있도록 요구하는 경우에, 단말기가 수신 및 모니터링 해야 할 검색 공간 간에 우선순위 결정 규칙(prioritization rule) 등이 필요할 수 있다. 우선순위 결정 규칙(prioritization rule)에는 아래와 같은 방법이 있을 수 있다.In addition or independently of the above proposal (1), if the UE-specific search space (USS) in the RRC connected mode to the non-BL UE operating in the CE mode (CE mode) Receive additional channels, such as Common search space (CSS), and other information such as earthquake and tsunami warning system (ETWS) / commercial mobile alert system (CMAS) (for example, receive paging channels) In the case of requesting to obtain the A, prioritization rule between a search space to be received and monitored by the terminal may be required. The prioritization rule may include the following methods.
(2) 제 2의 검색 공간 (예를 들어, 연결 모드(Connected mode)에서 유니캐스트 데이터(Unicast data) 수신을 위해서 기본적으로 단말기가 수신/검출 시도(attempt)해야 하는 검색 공간(예를 들어, USS)가 아닌 특정 CSS)를 수신 시도하는 동안 제 1 검색 공간(예를 들어, 연결 모드에서 유니캐스트 데이터 수신을 위해서 기본적으로 단말기가 수신/검출 시도해야 하는 검색 공간(예를 들어, USS))를 수신하지 않을 수 있는 추가적인 갭(gap)이 설정될 수 있다.(2) a second search space (e.g., a search space that the terminal should receive / attempt in order to receive unicast data in a connected mode (e.g., A first search space (e.g., a search space (e.g., USS) that the device must attempt to receive / detect by default for receiving unicast data in connected mode) while attempting to receive certain CSS, not USS) An additional gap may be set that may not receive.
단말기가 검색 공간을(또는 검색 공간에서 특정 (제어) 채널을) 수신/검출 시도하는 동작을 모니터링이라고 지칭할 수 있다. 단말기는 검색 공간(또는 검색 공간의 모니터링)과 관련된 갭 설정 정보를 기지국으로부터 수신할 수 있다. 상기 갭 설정 정보는 본 발명에 따른 갭(또는 갭 구간(gap duration))을 지시할 수 있으며, 본 발명의 갭(또는 갭 구간)은 기지국으로부터 수신된 갭 설정 정보에 기반하여 설정될 수 있다. 본 발명에 따른 갭 설정 정보는 시스템 정보(또는 SIB(system information block))를 통해 수신되거나 또는 상위 계층 시그널링(예, RRC 계층 시그널링)을 통해 수신될 수 있다. 본 발명의 갭(또는 갭 구간)은 서브프레임 단위로 설정될 수 있으며 갭 설정 정보는 설정된 갭(또는 갭 구간)에 대응하는 서브프레임의 개수를 지시할 수 있다. 혹은, 본 발명이 NR 시스템에 적용되는 경우 본 발명의 갭은 슬롯 단위로 설정될 수 있으며 갭 정보는 설정된 갭(또는 갭 구간)에 대응하는 슬롯의 개수를 지시할 수 있다.An operation in which a terminal attempts to receive / detect a search space (or a specific (control) channel in the search space) may be referred to as monitoring. The terminal may receive gap setting information related to the search space (or monitoring of the search space) from the base station. The gap setting information may indicate a gap (or gap duration) according to the present invention, and the gap (or gap period) of the present invention may be set based on the gap setting information received from the base station. The gap setting information according to the present invention may be received through system information (or system information block (SIB)) or may be received through higher layer signaling (eg, RRC layer signaling). The gap (or gap section) of the present invention may be set in units of subframes, and the gap setting information may indicate the number of subframes corresponding to the set gap (or gap section). Alternatively, when the present invention is applied to the NR system, the gap of the present invention may be set in units of slots, and the gap information may indicate the number of slots corresponding to the set gap (or gap period).
(2-1) 해당 갭 구간은, 제 1 검색 공간과 제 2 검색 공간이 특정 시점에 하나의 협대역(narrowband, NB) 내에 존재할 수 있는 경우에는 적용되지 않을 수 있다. 즉, 단말기는 제 1 그리고 제 2 검색 공간 모두를 수신한다.(2-1) The gap section may not be applied when the first search space and the second search space may exist in one narrowband NB at a specific time point. In other words, the terminal receives both the first and second search spaces.
반면, 해당 갭 구간은 제 1 검색 공간과 제 2 검색 공간이 특정 시점에 서로 다른 협대역(NB)에 존재하는 경우에는 적용될 수 있다. 이 경우, 단말기는 특정 시점에서 제 2 검색 공간을 수신/검출 시도할 수 있고, 단말기는 특정 시점에서 뿐만 아니라 설정된 갭 구간 내에서는 제 1 검색 공간을 수신/검출하지 않을 수 있다(또는 제 1 검색 공간의 수신/검출을 연기(postpone)할 수 있다).On the other hand, the gap interval may be applied when the first search space and the second search space exist in different narrow bands (NB) at a specific time point. In this case, the terminal may attempt to receive / detect the second search space at a specific time point, and the terminal may not receive / detect the first search space not only at the specific time point but also within the set gap period (or the first search). Postpone reception / detection of space).
(2-2) 해당 갭 구간은, 제 1 검색 공간을 우선적으로 수신/검출 시도하고, 제 2 검색 공간은 검출 시도하지 않을 수 있도록 허용된 구간으로 정의될 수도 있다. 이 경우, 갭 구간은 제 2 검색 공간의 수신/검출에 적용될 수 있으며, 단말기는 해당 갭 구간 내에서 우선적으로 제 1 검색 공간을 수신/검출 시도할 수 있고 해당 갭 구간 내에서 제 2 검색 공간을 수신/검출하지 않을 수 있다(또는 제 2 검색 공간의 수신/검출을 연기할 수 있다).(2-2) The gap section may be defined as a section allowed to preferentially receive / detect the first search space and not attempt to detect the second search space. In this case, the gap section may be applied to the reception / detection of the second search space, and the terminal may first try to receive / detect the first search space within the gap section, and may detect the second search space within the gap section. May not be received / detected (or may defer receiving / detecting the second search space).
(2-3) 설정된 제 2 검색 공간(search space) 구간과 시간적으로 겹치는 서브프레임(subframe)/슬롯(slot)에 PDSCH가 스케줄링(scheduling)된 경우에 단말기는 제 2 검색 공간(search space) 수신/검출 시도를 하지 않도록 허용될 수 있다. 이 경우, 단말기는 제 2 검색 공간 구간과 PDSCH 스케줄링된 구간(또는 PDSCH 전송 구간)이 겹치는 시간 구간(예, 서브프레임 또는 슬롯)에서 제 2 검색 공간을 수신/검출 시도하지 않고 연기하거나 수신/검출을 생략(skip)할 수 있다. 반면, 단말기는 제 2 검색 공간 구간과 겹치는 시간 구간에서 스케줄링된 PDSCH를 수신할 수 있다.(2-3) When PDSCH is scheduled in a subframe / slot that overlaps with a set second search space section in time, the terminal receives a second search space / May not be allowed to attempt detection. In this case, the terminal defers or receives / detects the second search space without attempting to receive / detect the second search space in a time interval (eg, a subframe or slot) where the second search space interval and the PDSCH scheduled interval (or PDSCH transmission interval) overlap. Can be skipped. On the other hand, the terminal may receive a scheduled PDSCH in a time interval overlapping the second search space interval.
(2-4) 상기에서 HD-FDD(Half Duplex FDD(Frequency Division Duplex)) 단말인 경우에는 DCI(downlink control information)로부터 스케줄링되거나 또는 DCI로부터 연관된 PDSCH가 PUSCH 또는 PRACH 또는 PUCCH인 경우에도 마찬가지로 적용된다. 예를 들어, 단말기가 HD-FDD로 동작하는 경우(또는 HD-FDD로 동작하도록 설정된 경우), 설정된 제 2 검색 공간 구간과 시간적으로 겹치는 서브프레임/슬롯에 PUSCH가 스케줄링된 경우(또는 겹치는 서브프레임/슬롯에서 PUSCH를 전송하는 경우) 단말기는 겹치는 시간 구간(또는 서브프레임/슬롯)에서 제 2 검색 공간을 수신/검출 시도를 하지 않도록 허용될 수 있다. 따라서, 단말기는 제 2 검색 공간 구간과 PUSCH 스케줄링된 구간(또는 PUSCH 전송 구간)이 겹치는 시간 구간(예, 서브프레임 또는 슬롯)에서 제 2 검색 공간을 수신/검출 시도하지 않고 연기하거나 수신/검출을 생략할 수 있다. 반면, 단말기는 제 2 검색 공간 구간과 겹치는 시간 구간에서 스케줄링된 PUSCH를 전송할 수 있다.(2-4) In the case of the HD-FDD (Half Duplex Frequency Division Duplex (FDD)) UE, the same applies to the case where the PDSCH scheduled from the downlink control information (DCI) or the associated PDSCH from the DCI is PUSCH or PRACH or PUCCH. . For example, when the terminal operates in HD-FDD (or is configured to operate in HD-FDD), when the PUSCH is scheduled (or overlapping subframes) in a subframe / slot that overlaps with the set second search space interval in time. In case of transmitting a PUSCH in / slot, the UE may be allowed not to attempt to receive / detect a second search space in an overlapping time period (or subframe / slot). Accordingly, the terminal defers or receives / detects the second search space without attempting to receive / detect the second search space in a time interval (eg, a subframe or a slot) where the second search space interval and the PUSCH scheduled interval (or PUSCH transmission interval) overlap. Can be omitted. On the other hand, the terminal may transmit a scheduled PUSCH in a time interval overlapping the second search space interval.
다른 예로, 단말기가 HD-FDD로 동작하는 경우(또는 HD-FDD로 동작하도록 설정된 경우), 설정된 제 2 검색 공간 구간과 시간적으로 겹치는 서브프레임/슬롯에서 PRACH를 전송하도록 설정되는 경우 단말기는 겹치는 시간 구간(또는 서브프레임/슬롯)에서 제 2 검색 공간을 수신/검출 시도를 하지 않도록 허용될 수 있다. 따라서, 단말기는 제 2 검색 공간 구간과 PRACH 전송 구간이 겹치는 시간 구간(예, 서브프레임 또는 슬롯)에서 제 2 검색 공간을 수신/검출 시도하지 않고 연기하거나 수신/검출을 생략할 수 있다. 반면, 단말기는 제 2 검색 공간 구간과 겹치는 시간 구간에서 PRACH를 전송할 수 있다.As another example, when the terminal operates in HD-FDD (or is configured to operate in HD-FDD), when the terminal is configured to transmit a PRACH in a subframe / slot overlapping in time with the set second search space interval, the terminal overlaps with each other. It may be allowed not to attempt to receive / detect the second search space in the interval (or subframe / slot). Accordingly, the terminal may postpone or omit the reception / detection without attempting to receive / detect the second search space in the time interval (eg, subframe or slot) where the second search space interval and the PRACH transmission interval overlap. On the other hand, the terminal may transmit a PRACH in a time interval overlapping the second search space interval.
또 다른 예로, 단말기가 HD-FDD로 동작하는 경우(또는 HD-FDD로 동작하도록 설정된 경우), 설정된 제 2 검색 공간 구간과 시간적으로 겹치는 서브프레임/슬롯에서 PUCCH를 전송하도록 설정되는 경우 단말기는 겹치는 시간 구간(또는 서브프레임/슬롯)에서 제 2 검색 공간을 수신/검출 시도를 하지 않도록 허용될 수 있다. 따라서, 단말기는 제 2 검색 공간 구간과 PUCCH 전송 구간이 겹치는 시간 구간(예, 서브프레임 또는 슬롯)에서 제 2 검색 공간을 수신/검출 시도하지 않고 연기하거나 수신/검출을 생략할 수 있다. 반면, 단말기는 제 2 검색 공간 구간과 겹치는 시간 구간에서 PUCCH를 전송할 수 있다.As another example, when the terminal operates in HD-FDD (or is configured to operate in HD-FDD), when the terminal is configured to transmit a PUCCH in a subframe / slot that overlaps in time with the set second search space interval, the terminal overlaps. It may be allowed not to attempt to receive / detect a second search space in a time interval (or subframe / slot). Accordingly, the terminal may postpone or omit the reception / detection without attempting to receive / detect the second search space in a time interval (eg, a subframe or a slot) where the second search space interval and the PUCCH transmission interval overlap. On the other hand, the terminal may transmit the PUCCH in a time interval overlapping the second search space interval.
위에서는 검색 공간의 우선순위 결정을 중심으로 설명하였지만, 본 발명의 제안 내용은 제어 채널(예, PDCCH 또는 MPDCCH 또는 NPDCCH)의 우선순위 결정에도 동일/유사하게 적용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 본 발명의 갭은 제 2 제어 채널 (예를 들어, 연결 모드에서 유니캐스트 데이터 수신과 관련된 제어 채널(예, C-RNTI로 스크램블링된 PDCCH)이 아닌 특정 제어 채널(예, P-RNTI로 스크램블링된 PDCCH))을 수신/검출 시도하는 동안 제 1 제어 채널(예를 들어, 연결 모드에서 유니캐스트 데이터 수신과 관련된 제어 채널(예, C-RNTI로 스크램블링된 PDCCH))을 수신/검출 시도하지 않을 수 있도록 설정될 수 있다.In the above description, the priority of the search space has been described. However, the proposals of the present invention can be applied to the same / similarity of the priority of the control channel (eg, PDCCH, MPDCCH, or NPDCCH). For example, the gap of the present invention is not a second control channel (e.g., a control channel associated with receiving unicast data in connected mode (e.g., a PDCCH scrambled with C-RNTI) but a specific control channel (e.g. P- Receive / detect a first control channel (e.g., a control channel (e.g., a PDCCH scrambled with C-RNTI) associated with receiving unicast data in connected mode) while attempting to receive / detect RNTI (scrambled PDCCH) Can be set to not try.
이 경우, 설정된 갭 구간 내에서 제 1 제어 채널과 제 2 제어 채널이 하나의 협대역(NB)에 설정된 경우, 본 발명의 갭 구간은 적용되지 않으며, 단말기는 갭 구간 내에서라도 제 1 제어 채널과 제 2 제어 채널을 모두 수신/검출 시도할 수 있다. 반면, 설정된 갭 구간 내에서 제 1 제어 채널과 제 2 제어 채널이 서로 다른 협대역(NB)에 존재하는 경우, 본 발명에 따른 갭 구간은 적용되며, 단말기는 설정된 갭 구간 내에서 제 1 제어 채널을 수신/검출 시도하지 않고 연기하거나 생략하며 제 2 제어 채널을 수신/검출 시도할 수 있다.In this case, when the first control channel and the second control channel are set in one narrow band (NB) within the set gap period, the gap period of the present invention is not applied, and the terminal is not connected with the first control channel even within the gap period. Attempt to receive / detect all second control channels. On the other hand, when the first control channel and the second control channel in different narrow band (NB) within the set gap interval, the gap interval according to the present invention is applied, the terminal is the first control channel within the set gap interval May defer or omit without attempting to receive / detect and attempt to receive / detect a second control channel.
혹은, 설정된 갭 구간은 제 2 제어 채널의 수신/검출에 적용될 수 있다. 이 경우, 단말기는 해당 갭 구간 내에서 우선적으로 제 1 제어 채널을 수신/검출 시도할 수 있고 해당 갭 구간 내에서 제 2 제어 채널을 수신/검출하지 않을 수 있다(또는 제 2 제어 채널의 수신/검출을 연기할 수 있다).Alternatively, the set gap period may be applied to reception / detection of the second control channel. In this case, the terminal may preferentially attempt to receive / detect the first control channel within the gap period and may not receive / detect the second control channel within the gap period (or receive / detect the second control channel). Detection can be postponed).
또한, 제 2 제어 채널이 설정된 구간과 시간적으로 겹치는 서브프레임/슬롯에 PDSCH가 스케줄링된 경우에 단말기는 제 2 제어 채널 수신/검출 시도를 하지 않도록 허용될 수 있다. 이 경우, 단말기는 제 2 제어 채널 구간과 PDSCH 스케줄링된 구간(또는 PDSCH 전송 구간)이 겹치는 시간 구간(예, 서브프레임 또는 슬롯)에서 제 2 제어 채널을 수신/검출 시도하지 않고 연기하거나 수신/검출을 생략(skip)할 수 있다. 반면, 단말기는 제 2 제어 채널 구간과 겹치는 시간 구간에서 스케줄링된 PDSCH를 수신할 수 있다. HD-FDD 단말인 경우에는 DCI로부터 스케줄링되거나 또는 DCI로부터 연관된 PDSCH가 PUSCH 또는 PRACH 또는 PUCCH인 경우에도 마찬가지로 적용될 수 있다.In addition, when a PDSCH is scheduled in a subframe / slot that overlaps a time interval with a set second control channel, the terminal may be allowed not to attempt to receive / detect a second control channel. In this case, the terminal postpones or receives / detects the second control channel without attempting to receive / detect the second control channel interval in the time interval (eg, subframe or slot) where the PDSCH scheduled interval (or PDSCH transmission interval) overlaps. Can be skipped. On the other hand, the terminal may receive a scheduled PDSCH in a time interval overlapping the second control channel interval. In the case of an HD-FDD terminal, the same may be applied to a case where a PDSCH scheduled from or associated with a DCI is a PUSCH or a PRACH or a PUCCH.
도 22는 본 발명에 따라 단말기가 페이징 신호를 수신하는 방법의 순서도를 예시한다. 도 22의 예는 H.1 절에서 상기 제안한 방법을 중심으로 설명하지만 H.2 절 내지 H.11 절에서 제안한 방법들 중 하나 이상이 도 22의 예에 제한 없이 결합되어 적용될 수 있다. 앞서 설명한 바와 같이 단말기는 사용자 기기(user equipment, UE), MS(mobile station), UT(user terminal), SS(subscriber station), MT(mobile terminal), 무선 디바이스 등과 같은 다른 용어로 지칭될 수 있다(예, 본 명세서의 A절 참조).22 illustrates a flowchart of a method for a terminal to receive a paging signal according to the present invention. Although the example of FIG. 22 is described based on the method proposed in Section H.1, one or more of the methods proposed in Sections H.2 to H.11 may be combined and applied without limitation to the example of FIG. As described above, a terminal may be referred to by other terms such as a user equipment (UE), a mobile station (MS), a user terminal (UT), a subscriber station (SS), a mobile terminal (MT), a wireless device, and the like. (Eg, see Section A herein).
도 22의 예에서 단말기는 non-BL UE에 해당할 수 있으며, MTC 단말기보다 더 많은 기능이 추가 구현되어 CE 모드로 동작하는 단말기일 수 있다(예, H 절 “본 발명에서 제안하는 방법 및 장치” 참조). 도 22의 예에서 단말기는 RRC 연결 모드(RRC connected mode)에서 페이징 신호의 수신과 관련된 공통 검색 공간(CSS)을 모니터링하도록 설정될 수 있다. 페이징 신호는 예를 들어 ETWS(earthquake and tsunami warning system)/CMAS(commercial mobile alert system)와 같은 정보를 포함할 수 있으며, 페이징 채널을 통해 수신될 수 있다. 페이징 채널은 CSS를 통해 수신/검출되는 제어 채널(예, P-RNTI로 스크램블링된 PDCCH)과 관련된 공유 채널(예, PDSCH)을 통해 수신될 수 있다.In the example of FIG. 22, the terminal may correspond to a non-BL UE, and may be a terminal operating in a CE mode by implementing more functions than the MTC terminal (eg, the H method “the method and apparatus proposed by the present invention). " Reference). In the example of FIG. 22, the terminal may be configured to monitor a common search space (CSS) related to reception of a paging signal in an RRC connected mode. The paging signal may include information such as, for example, earthquake and tsunami warning system (ETWS) / commercial mobile alert system (CMAS), and may be received through a paging channel. The paging channel may be received via a shared channel (eg PDSCH) associated with a control channel (eg PDCCH scrambled with P-RNTI) that is received / detected via CSS.
S2202 단계에서, 단말기는 검색 공간의 갭 구간을 지시하는 갭 설정 정보를 수신할 수 있다. 앞에서 설명한 바와 같이 갭 구간은 제 2 검색 공간을 모니터링하는 동안 제 1 검색 공간을 모니터링하지 않을 수 있도록 설정되는 구간을 지칭한다. 제 1 검색 공간은 연결 모드에서 데이터 수신과 관련된 검색 공간을 지칭하고, 보다 구체적으로는 유니캐스트 데이터 수신을 위해 기본적으로 단말기가 수신/검출 시도해야 하는 검색 공간(예, USS)을 지칭한다. 제 2 검색 공간은 연결 모드에서 유니캐스트 데이터 수신을 위해서 기본적으로 단말기가 수신/검출 시도(attempt)해야 하는 검색 공간(예를 들어, USS)가 아닌 특정 검색 공간(예, CSS)를 지칭하며, 보다 구체적으로는 페이징 신호의 수신과 관련된 검색 공간을 지칭한다. 모니터링은 단말기가 검색 공간을(또는 검색 공간에서 특정 (제어) 채널을) 수신/검출 시도하는 동작을 지칭한다.In step S2202, the terminal may receive gap setting information indicating a gap period of a search space. As described above, the gap section refers to a section that is set not to monitor the first search space while monitoring the second search space. The first search space refers to a search space associated with data reception in a connected mode, and more specifically, a search space (eg, USS) to which a terminal should attempt to receive / detect data for unicast data reception. The second search space refers to a specific search space (e.g., CSS) that is not a search space (e.g., USS) that the terminal should attempt to receive / detect (attempt) for receiving unicast data in connected mode. More specifically, it refers to a search space associated with reception of a paging signal. Monitoring refers to the operation of a terminal attempting to receive / detect a search space (or a specific (control) channel in the search space).
S2204 단계에서, 단말기는 설정된 갭 구간에 기반하여 검색 공간을 모니터링할 수 있다. H.1 절의 제안 (2)에서 설명한 바와 같이, 단말기는 설정된 갭 구간에 기반하여 특정 시간 구간에서 제 2 검색 공간을 모니터링하고 제 1 검색 공간을 모니터링하지 않을 수 있다(또는 모니터링을 생략하거나 또는 모니터링을 연기할 수 있다). 보다 구체적으로, 특정 시간 구간에서 제 1 검색 공간과 제 2 검색 공간이 서로 다른 협대역(narrowband, NB)에 설정된 경우, 상기 특정 시간 구간에서 단말기는 제 2 검색 공간을 모니터링하고 상기 갭 구간에 기반하여 상기 특정 시간 구간에서 제 1 검색 공간을 모니터링되지 않을 수 있다(또는 모니터링을 생략하거나 또는 모니터링을 연기할 수 있다). 반면, 상기 특정 시간 구간에서 제 1 검색 공간과 제 2 검색 공간이 하나의 협대역에 설정된 경우, 단말기는 상기 갭 구간을 적용하지 않고 상기 특정 시간 구간에서 제 1 검색 공간과 제 2 검색 공간을 모두 모니터링할 수 있다.In step S2204, the terminal may monitor the search space based on the set gap period. As described in the proposal (2) of section H.1, the terminal may monitor the second search space and not monitor the first search space in a specific time interval based on the set gap interval (or omit or monitor the monitoring). Can be postponed). More specifically, when a first search space and a second search space are set in different narrowbands (NBs) in a specific time interval, the terminal monitors a second search space in the specific time interval and is based on the gap period. In this particular time interval, the first search space may not be monitored (or the monitoring may be omitted or the monitoring may be delayed). On the other hand, when the first search space and the second search space are set in one narrow band in the specific time interval, the terminal does not apply the gap interval, and the terminal searches for both the first search space and the second search space in the specific time interval. Can be monitored.
S2204 단계에서, 제 2 검색 공간의 시간 구간과 PDSCH(physical downlink control channel) 수신 시간 구간이 겹치는 경우, 단말기는 겹치는 시간 구간에서 제 2 검색 공간을 모니터링하지 않고 PDSCH를 수신할 수 있다. 또는, 단말기가 HD-FDD(half duplex frequency division duplex)로 동작하고 제 2 검색 공간의 시간 구간과 PUSCH 전송 시간 구간이 겹치는 경우, 단말기는 겹치는 시간 구간에서 제 2 검색 공간을 모니터링하지 않고 PUSCH를 전송할 수 있다. 또는, 단말기가 HD-FDD로 동작하고 제 2 검색 공간의 시간 구간과 PRACH 전송 시간 구간이 겹치는 경우, 단말기는 겹치는 시간 구간에서 제 2 검색 공간을 모니터링하지 않고 PRACH를 전송할 수 있다. 또는, 단말기가 HD-FDD로 동작하고 제 2 검색 공간의 시간 구간과 PUCCH 전송 시간 구간이 겹치는 경우, 단말기는 겹치는 시간 구간에서 제 2 검색 공간을 모니터링하지 않고 PUCCH를 전송할 수 있다.In step S2204, when the time interval of the second search space and the physical downlink control channel (PDSCH) reception time interval overlap, the terminal may receive the PDSCH without monitoring the second search space in the overlapping time interval. Or, if the terminal operates in half-duplex frequency division duplex (HD-FDD) and the time interval of the second search space and the PUSCH transmission time interval overlap, the terminal transmits the PUSCH without monitoring the second search space in the overlapping time intervals. Can be. Alternatively, when the terminal operates in HD-FDD and the time interval of the second search space and the PRACH transmission time interval overlap, the terminal may transmit the PRACH without monitoring the second search space in the overlapping time intervals. Alternatively, when the terminal operates in HD-FDD and the time interval of the second search space and the PUCCH transmission time interval overlap, the terminal may transmit the PUCCH without monitoring the second search space in the overlapping time interval.
도 22에 예시된 방법은 상기 설명으로만 제한되는 것은 아니며 H.1 절 내지 H.11 절에서 설명한 방법들과 결합되어 구현될 수 있다. 또한, 도 22에 예시된 방법은 검색 공간에 기반하여 설명되었지만 제어 채널에 기반하여 동일/유사하게 설명될 수 있다(예, H.1 절의 제안 (2) 관련 설명 참조).The method illustrated in FIG. 22 is not limited to the above description but may be implemented in combination with the methods described in Sections H.1 to H.11. In addition, the method illustrated in FIG. 22 has been described based on the search space but can be described identically / similarly based on the control channel (see, for example, the description of proposal (2) in section H.1).
도 23은 본 발명에 따라 기지국이 페이징 신호를 전송하는 방법의 순서도를 예시한다. 도 23의 예는 도 22의 예에 대응되는 기지국의 동작을 설명하기 위한 것이며, H.1 절에서 제안한 방법을 중심으로 설명하지만 H.2 절 내지 H.11 절에서 제안한 방법들 중 하나 이상이 도 23의 예에 제한 없이 결합되어 적용될 수 있다. 앞서 설명한 바와 같이 기지국(BS)은 단말기와 통신하는 무선 장치로서 eNB(evolved Node-B), gNB(general Node-B), BTS(base transceiver system), AP(access point) 등과 같은 다른 용어로 지칭 될 수 있다(예, 본 명세서의 A절 참조).23 illustrates a flowchart of a method for transmitting a paging signal by a base station according to the present invention. The example of FIG. 23 is for explaining the operation of the base station corresponding to the example of FIG. 22. The example of FIG. 23 will be described based on the method proposed in Section H.1, but one or more of the methods proposed in Sections H.2 to H.11 23 may be combined and applied without limitation. As described above, a base station (BS) is a wireless device that communicates with a terminal and is referred to by other terms such as an evolved node-B (eNB), a general node-B (gNB), a base transceiver system (BTS), an access point (AP), and the like. (Eg, see section A of this specification).
도 23의 예에서 기지국은 non-BL UE와 같은 단말기와 통신하도록 구성될 수 있으며, 기지국은 RRC 연결 모드(RRC connected mode)에서 페이징 신호와 관련된 공통 검색 공간(CSS)을 통해 제어 채널을 단말기로 전송하도록 설정될 수 있다. 페이징 신호는 예를 들어 ETWS(earthquake and tsunami warning system)/CMAS(commercial mobile alert system)와 같은 정보를 포함할 수 있으며, 페이징 채널을 통해 전송될 수 있다. 페이징 채널은 CSS를 통해 전송되는 제어 채널(예, P-RNTI로 스크램블링된 PDCCH)과 관련된 공유 채널(예, PDSCH)을 통해 전송될 수 있다.In the example of FIG. 23, the base station may be configured to communicate with a terminal such as a non-BL UE, and the base station may transmit a control channel to the terminal through a common search space (CSS) associated with a paging signal in an RRC connected mode. Can be set to transmit. The paging signal may include information such as, for example, earthquake and tsunami warning system (ETWS) / commercial mobile alert system (CMAS), and may be transmitted through a paging channel. The paging channel may be transmitted over a shared channel (eg PDSCH) associated with a control channel (eg PDCCH scrambled with P-RNTI) transmitted via CSS.
S2302 단계에서, 기지국은 검색 공간의 갭 구간을 지시하는 갭 설정 정보를 전송할 수 있다. 앞에서 설명한 바와 같이 갭 구간은 단말기가 제 2 검색 공간을 모니터링하는 동안 제 1 검색 공간을 모니터링하지 않을 수 있도록 설정되는 구간을 지칭한다(예, H.1 절의 제안 (2) 참조). 따라서, 기지국은 갭 구간에 기반하여 제 2 검색 공간을 통해 제 2 제어 채널을 전송하는 동안 제 1 검색 공간을 통해 제 1 제어 채널을 전송하지 않거나(또는 전송을 연기하거나 생략) 또는 전송하더라도 단말기가 모니터링하지 않을 수 있도록 설정될 수 있다. 제 1 검색 공간과 제 2 검색 공간과 모니터링에 대한 정의는 앞서 설명한 바와 같으므로 관련 설명 전체를 여기에 참조로서 포함한다.In step S2302, the base station may transmit gap setting information indicating a gap period of a search space. As described above, the gap period refers to a period in which the terminal is configured not to monitor the first search space while monitoring the second search space (see, for example, proposal (2) in Section H.1). Accordingly, even if the base station does not transmit (or defer or omit transmission) or transmits the first control channel through the first search space while transmitting the second control channel through the second search space based on the gap period, Can be set to not monitor. The definitions of the first search space and the second search space and the monitoring are as described above, so the entire description is incorporated herein by reference.
S2304 단계에서, 기지국은 설정된 갭 구간에 기반하여 검색 공간을 통해 제어 채널을 전송할 수 있다(예, H.1 절의 제안 (2) 참조). S2204 단계 및 H.1 절에서 설명한 바와 같이, 단말기는 설정된 갭 구간에 기반하여 특정 시간 구간에서 제 2 검색 공간을 모니터링하고 제 1 검색 공간을 모니터링하지 않을 수 있다(또는 모니터링을 생략하거나 또는 모니터링을 연기할 수 있다). 따라서, S2304 단계에서 기지국은 설정된 갭 구간에 기반하여 특정 시간 구간에서 제 2 검색 공간을 통해 제 2 제어 채널을 전송하고 제 1 검색 공간을 통해 제 1 제어 채널을 전송하지 않거나(또는 전송을 연기하거나 생략) 또는 제 1 제어 채널을 전송하더라도 단말기가 모니터링하지 않도록 설정할 수 있다. 보다 구체적으로, 특정 시간 구간에서 제 1 검색 공간과 제 2 검색 공간이 서로 다른 협대역(narrowband, NB)에 설정된 경우, 상기 특정 시간 구간에서 기지국은 제 2 검색 공간을 통해 제 2 제어 채널을 전송하고 상기 갭 구간에 기반하여 상기 특정 시간 구간에서 제 1 검색 공간을 통해 제 1 제어 채널을 전송하지 않거나(또는 전송을 연기하거나 생략) 또는 제 1 제어 채널을 전송하더라도 단말기가 모니터링하지 않도록 설정할 수 있다. 반면, 상기 특정 시간 구간에서 제 1 검색 공간과 제 2 검색 공간이 하나의 협대역에 설정된 경우, 기지국은 상기 갭 구간을 적용하지 않고 상기 특정 시간 구간에서 제 1 검색 공간과 제 2 검색 공간을 각각 제 1 제어 채널과 제 2 제어 채널을 모두 전송할 수 있다.In step S2304, the base station may transmit a control channel through the search space based on the set gap interval (eg, see proposal (2) in section H.1). As described in step S2204 and H.1, the terminal may monitor the second search space and not monitor the first search space in a specific time interval based on the set gap interval (or omit monitoring or perform monitoring). Can be postponed). Accordingly, in step S2304, the base station transmits the second control channel through the second search space and transmits the first control channel through the first search space (or postpones the transmission) in the specific time period based on the set gap period. Omitted) or even if the first control channel is transmitted may be set so that the terminal does not monitor. More specifically, when the first search space and the second search space are set in different narrowbands (NBs) in a specific time interval, the base station transmits a second control channel through the second search space in the specific time interval. The terminal may be configured not to monitor even if the first control channel is not transmitted (or delayed or omitted) or the first control channel is transmitted through the first search space based on the gap period. . On the other hand, when the first search space and the second search space is set in one narrow band in the specific time interval, the base station does not apply the gap interval, respectively, the base station to the first search space and the second search space in the specific time interval, respectively Both the first control channel and the second control channel can be transmitted.
S2304 단계에서, 제 2 검색 공간의 시간 구간과 PDSCH(physical downlink control channel) 전송 시간 구간이 겹치는 경우, 기지국은 겹치는 시간 구간에서 제 2 검색 공간을 통해 제 2 제어 채널을 전송하지 않고(또는 전송을 연기하거나 생략) PDSCH를 전송할 수 있다(예, H.1 절의 제안 (2) 참조). 또는, 기지국이 HD-FDD(half duplex frequency division duplex)로 동작하는 단말기와 통신하고 제 2 검색 공간의 시간 구간과 PUSCH 수신 시간 구간이 겹치는 경우, 기지국은 겹치는 시간 구간에서 제 2 검색 공간을 통해 제 2 제어 채널을 전송하지 않고(또는 전송을 연기하거나 생략) PUSCH를 수신할 수 있다. 또는, 기지국이 HD-FDD로 동작하는 단말기와 통신하고 제 2 검색 공간의 시간 구간과 PRACH 수신 시간 구간이 겹치는 경우, 단말기는 겹치는 시간 구간에서 제 2 검색 공간을 통해 제 2 제어 채널을 전송하지 않고(또는 전송을 연기하거나 생략) PRACH를 수신할 수 있다. 또는, 기지국이 HD-FDD로 동작하는 단말기와 통신하고 제 2 검색 공간의 시간 구간과 PUCCH 수신 시간 구간이 겹치는 경우, 단말기는 겹치는 시간 구간에서 제 2 검색 공간을 통해 제 2 제어 채널을 전송하지 않고(또는 전송을 연기하거나 생략) PUCCH를 수신할 수 있다.In step S2304, if the time interval of the second search space and the physical downlink control channel (PDSCH) transmission time interval overlap, the base station does not transmit (or transmits) the second control channel through the second search space in the overlapping time interval. Delay or omit) PDSCH can be transmitted (see, eg, proposal (2) in section H.1). Alternatively, when the base station communicates with a terminal operating in half-duplex frequency division duplex (HD-FDD) and the time interval of the second search space and the PUSCH reception time interval overlap, the base station transmits the second search space through the second search space in the overlapping time interval. The PUSCH may be received without transmitting (or postponing or omitting) the 2 control channel. Alternatively, when the base station communicates with the terminal operating in HD-FDD and the time interval of the second search space and the PRACH reception time interval overlap, the terminal does not transmit the second control channel through the second search space in the overlapping time interval. (Or defer or omit transmission) may receive a PRACH. Alternatively, when the base station communicates with the terminal operating in HD-FDD and the time interval of the second search space and the PUCCH reception time interval overlap, the terminal does not transmit the second control channel through the second search space in the overlapping time interval. (Or defer or omit transmission) may receive the PUCCH.
도 23에 예시된 방법은 상기 설명으로만 제한되는 것은 아니며 H.1 절 내지 H.11 절에서 설명한 방법들과 결합되어 구현될 수 있다.The method illustrated in FIG. 23 is not limited to the above description but may be implemented in combination with the methods described in sections H.1 to H.11.
H.2H.2 단말기 타입(type)에 따른 CE 레벨(CE level) 선택CE level selection according to terminal type
MTC에서 CE 레벨 선택 방법과 CE 모드(CE mode) 설정은 아래와 같다.The CE level selection method and the CE mode setting in the MTC are as follows.
(1) CE 레벨 선택(1) CE level selection
- 단말기는 CE 레벨의 기준(criteria)로 CRS 기반 RSRP(CRS-based RSRP(Reference Signal Received Power))를 사용하며, 각 CE 레벨의 RSRP 경계(RSRP boundary)는 기지국에 의해서 설정된다.The terminal uses CRS-based RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power) as a criterion of the CE level, and the RSRP boundary of each CE level is set by the base station.
- 상기 CRS 기반 RSRP에서 RSRP 대신에 RSRQ(Reference Signal Received Power), SINR(Signal to Interference & Noise Ratio) 등 채널의 품질 측정과 관련된 값이 대신 사용될 수도 있다.In the CRS-based RSRP, a value related to channel quality measurement, such as Reference Signal Received Power (RSRQ) and Signal to Interference & Noise Ratio (SINR), may be used instead of RSRP.
- 단말기는 측정한 RSRP 값과 설정된 RSRP 경계 값을 비교하여 CE 레벨을 선택하며, 해당 CE 레벨을 위해서 설정된 PRACH 자원(PRACH resource)(예를 들어, time, frequency, preamble ID)를 사용하여 랜덤 접속(Random access) 절차를 시작한다.-The terminal selects the CE level by comparing the measured RSRP value and the set RSRP boundary value, and random access using a PRACH resource (for example, time, frequency, preamble ID) configured for the corresponding CE level (Random access) Begin the procedure.
- 단말기는 Msg.1 전송 이후에 Msg.2을 모니터링(monitoring) 하며, Msg.2을 모니터링할 시간 자원(time resource) (예를 들어, 최대 반복 전송 횟수 및 사용될 수 있는 subframe 위치)와 주파수 자원(frequency resource) (예를 들어, NB(narrowband) 위치)는 단말기가 전송한 Msg.1 자원과 연관해서 미리 설정되어 있다.The terminal monitors Msg.2 after Msg.1 transmission, and includes time resources (eg, maximum number of repetitive transmissions and subframe positions that can be used) and frequency resources for monitoring Msg.2. A frequency resource (eg, narrowband location) is preset in association with an Msg.1 resource transmitted by the terminal.
- 단말기는 Msg.2를 검출하면, 해당 RAR의 상향링크 그랜트(UL grant)에서 지시한 바에 따라서 Msg.3를 전송한다.-When the terminal detects Msg. 2, the terminal transmits Msg. 3 as indicated by the uplink grant (UL grant) of the corresponding RAR.
- Msg.3 전송 이후에, 단말기가 모니터링 할 시간/주파수 자원 (Msg.3 재전송을 지시하는 MPDCCH 또는 Msg.4를 스케줄링 하는 MPDCCH)는 시스템 정보(system information)과 Msg.2 RAR(random access response)에 의해서 결정된다.After Msg.3 transmission, the time / frequency resource (MPDCCH indicating Msg.3 retransmission or MPDCCH scheduling Msg.4) to be monitored by the terminal is determined by system information and Msg.2 random access response. Is determined by
- 상기 Msg.2를 모니터링 하기 위한 시간/주파수 자원과 Msg.3 전송 이후에 모니터링할 하향링크 시간/주파수 자원은 타입-2 CSS에 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH 관련 파라메터로 정의될 수 있다. 예를 들어, mpdcch-NarrowbandsToMonitor과 Rmax(mpdcch-NumRepetition-RA)는 SIB2에 의해서 설정된다.A time / frequency resource for monitoring Msg.2 and a downlink time / frequency resource to be monitored after Msg.3 transmission may be defined as MPDCCH and / or PDSCH related parameters in Type-2 CSS. For example, mpdcch-NarrowbandsToMonitor and Rmax (mpdcch-Num Repetition-RA) are set by SIB2.
(2) CE 모드(CE mode) 설정(2) CE mode setting
- 네트워크에 부착(Attachment)된 이후에 기지국으로부터 CE 모드를 설정 받기 전까지, 단말기는 Msg.1을 전송한 CE 레벨에 의해서 CE 모드가 결정된다. 이때, CE 레벨 0과 1은 CE 모드 A에 해당하며, 나머지 CE 레벨은 CE 모드 B로 가정하여, 후속 동작을 수행한다.-After attaching to the network, the terminal determines the CE mode by the CE level that transmits Msg.1 until the CE mode is set by the base station. In this case, CE levels 0 and 1 correspond to CE mode A, and the remaining CE levels assume CE mode B to perform subsequent operations.
이와 동일한 절차가 non-BL UE에게도 적용되는 경우에는, 2Rx 에 의한 DL 커버리지(coverage) 증가가 발생된 경우에도 C-RSRP를 기준으로 CE 레벨을 선택하면 DL 반복 횟수(repetition number)가 불필요하게 클 수 있다. 이와 같은 단점을 극복하기 위해서, 랜덤 접속 과정에서도 단말기의 타입 (예를 들어, 수신 안테나 수, 수신 대역폭, 연산 능력 등)을 고려하여 일반 MTC 단말기와 다른 절차를 수행할 수도 있다. 즉, non-BL UE는 아래와 같은 방법으로 랜덤 접속(random access)을 진행할 수 있다.If the same procedure is applied to non-BL UEs, the DL repetition number is unnecessarily large when the CE level is selected based on C-RSRP even when DL coverage increase by 2Rx occurs. Can be. In order to overcome this drawback, the random access procedure may perform a procedure different from that of the general MTC terminal in consideration of the type of the terminal (for example, the number of receiving antennas, the receiving bandwidth, the computing capability, etc.). That is, the non-BL UE may proceed with random access in the following manner.
(1) CE 레벨 선택시에, 단말기가 선택하는 RSRP 값을 새롭게 정의 (이하 RSRP’로 명명함)(1) When selecting the CE level, the RSRP value selected by the terminal is newly defined (hereinafter referred to as RSRP ').
A. 랜덤 접속 과정에서 CE 레벨 선택의 기준 값으로 사용되는 RSRP’와 RRM(Radio Resource Management)에서 사용되는 RSRP는 상이할 수 있다. 즉, CE 레벨 선택의 기준으로 사용되는 RSRP’는 단말기가 CRS를 기반으로 측정한 RSRP에 특정 오프셋(offset)을 추가로 더하는 것을 고려할 수 있다.A. RSRP 'used as a reference value of CE level selection in a random access procedure may be different from RSRP used in RRM (Radio Resource Management). That is, RSRP 'which is used as a criterion for CE level selection may consider adding a specific offset to the RSRP measured by the terminal based on the CRS.
B. 여기서, 특정 오프셋(offset) 값은 non-BL UE에게만 0이 아닌 값으로 설정될 수 있는 파라메터 일 수 있으며, 오프셋은 단말기의 수신 신호 품질을 반영하기 위한 값일 수 있다.B. Here, the specific offset value may be a parameter that may be set to a non-zero value only for the non-BL UE, and the offset may be a value for reflecting the reception signal quality of the terminal.
i. 여기서 수신 신호 품질을 반영해서 오프셋 값을 설정할 수 있는 조건은 최소한 Msg.2 그리고/또는 Msg.4에서 사용할 수신 안테나 수 그리고/또는 수신 기법이 될 수 있다.i. In this case, the condition for setting the offset value to reflect the reception signal quality may be at least the number of reception antennas and / or reception techniques to be used in Msg.2 and / or Msg.4.
ii. 단말기의 수신 안테나 수가 하나 이상인 경우에, 안테나 수에 비례한 값 또는 특정 고정 값(예를 들어, 단말기 수신 안테나 수가 2개인 경우에 3dB)일 수 있다.ii. When the number of the receiving antennas of the terminal is one or more, it may be a value proportional to the number of antennas or a specific fixed value (for example, 3 dB when the number of terminal receiving antennas is two).
C. CE 레벨 선택 시에 단말기가 상기 제안한 RSRP’를 사용할 수 있는 조건은 아래와 같이 설정/정의 될 수 있다. 즉, 아래의 경우에 해당하는 경우에 RSRP’=RSRP + 0 으로 설정될 수 있다.C. The condition under which the terminal can use the proposed RSRP 'when selecting the CE level may be set / defined as follows. That is, RSRP '= RSRP + 0 may be set in the following cases.
i. CE 모드 A에서만 오프셋은 0이 아닌 값(0 보다 큰 값)을 사용할 수 있도록 허용될 수 있다.i. Only in CE mode A, the offset can be allowed to use non-zero values (greater than zero).
ii. RSRP’에 오프셋 값을 0이 아닌 값으로 적용한 경우에, CE 모드가 변경되지 않는 경우에만 허용될 수 있다. 즉, CE 모드 B에 속하는 CE 레벨 2 또는 CE 레벨 3은 오프셋 값 적용에 의해서 CE 레벨 1 또는 CE 레벨 0으로 변경되는 것이 허용되지 않을 수 있다.ii. If the offset value is applied to a value other than 0 in RSRP ', it may be allowed only when the CE mode is not changed. That is, CE level 2 or CE level 3 belonging to CE mode B may not be allowed to be changed to CE level 1 or CE level 0 by applying an offset value.
iii. 만약, RSRP를 기준으로 선택한 CE 레벨에서 Msg.1을 전송하는 경우에, Msg.1 송신 전력이 단말기의 최대 출력 전력보다 같거나 큰 경우에는 RSRP’의 오프셋에 0이 아닌 값의 사용이 제한 될 수 있다.iii. If Msg.1 is transmitted at the CE level selected based on RSRP, if Msg.1 transmit power is equal to or greater than the maximum output power of the terminal, the use of non-zero values in RSRP 'offset may be restricted. Can be.
iv. 만약, RSRP를 기준으로 선택한 CE 레벨에서 Msg.1을 전송하는 경우에, Msg.1 송신 전력과 단말기의 최대 출력 전력의 차이가 특정 값보다 같거나 작은 경우에는 RSRP’의 오프셋에 0이 아닌 값의 사용이 제한 될 수 있다.iv. If Msg.1 is transmitted at the CE level selected based on RSRP, if the difference between Msg.1 transmit power and the maximum output power of the terminal is less than or equal to a specific value, a non-zero value at RSRP 'offset May be restricted.
v. 기지국은 특정 기준 포맷(reference format)을 정의해서, 해당 포맷을 기준으로 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH 수신 성능(예를 들어, BLER(Block Error Rate))이 특정 기준을 만족하지 못하는 경우에는 RSRP’의 오프셋에 0이 아닌 값의 사용이 제한 될 수 있다. 여기서, 기준 포맷(reference format)은 Msg.2 또는 Msg.4 수신 성능을 유추/모사하기 위해서 사용될 수 있는 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH의 특정 반복 횟수(repetition number), DCI 포맷(DCI format), PMI, 코드 레이트(code rate), 병합 레벨(aggregation level) 등과 관련된 정보를 포함할 수 있다.v. The base station defines a specific reference format so that the MPRPCH and / or PDSCH reception performance (e.g., block error rate (BLER)) does not meet a certain criterion based on the format. Use of nonzero values may be restricted. Here, the reference format is a specific repetition number of the DCDCCH and / or PDSCH, DCI format (DCI format), PMI, which can be used to infer / simulate Msg.2 or Msg.4 reception performance. Information related to a code rate, an aggregation level, and the like may be included.
vi. 만약, Msg.2를 특정 윈도우(window) 내에서 수신하지 못하거나, Msg.3를 수 차례 전송했지만 랜덤 접속 절차를 완료하지 못하여 Msg.3를 특정 윈도우 내에서 수 차례 재전송 하거나 또는 Msg.1을 재전송 해야 하는 경우에는 RSRP’의 오프셋에 0이 아닌 값의 사용이 제한 될 수 있다.vi. If Msg.2 is not received within a specific window or Msg.3 has been sent many times but random access procedure is not completed, Msg.3 may be retransmitted several times within a specific window or Msg.1 may not be received. In case of retransmission, use of non-zero value in RSRP 'offset may be restricted.
D. Msg.2 수신 및 Msg.3 재전송 또는 Msg.4 PDSCH 스케줄링을 위한 MPDCCH 모니터링에 사용되는 안테나 수는 CE 레벨 선택 시에 가정한 수신 안테나 수와 같거나 많아야 한다.D. The number of antennas used for Msg.2 reception and Msg.3 retransmission or MPDCCH monitoring for Msg.4 PDSCH scheduling shall be equal to or greater than the number of receive antennas assumed for CE level selection.
E. CE 레벨 선택 시에 단말기가 상기 제안한 RSRP’의 오프셋 값으로 0이 아닌 값을 사용한 경우에, 단말기는 해당 정보(예를 들어, CE 레벨 선택 시에 사용한 오프셋 값 또는 오프셋 값이 0보다 큰 이유(예를 들어, 다중 수신 안테나를 가정/사용했거나, 가정/사용한 다중 수신 안테나 수)를 Msg.3 또는 그 이후 동작에서 기지국에게 알릴 필요가 있다.E. When the terminal uses a non-zero value as the offset value of the proposed RSRP 'when the CE level is selected, the terminal determines that the information (for example, the offset value or offset value used when selecting the CE level is greater than 0). It is necessary to inform the base station in Msg. 3 or later operation of the reason (e.g., the number of multiple receive antennas assumed / used or used multiple receive antennas).
(2) Msg.1을 전송하기 위한 CE 레벨 선택은 하나의 수신 안테나 사용을 기준으로 선택하고, Msg.3에 단말기의 수신 안테나 수를 추가적으로 보고하는 방법(2) CE level selection for transmitting Msg.1 is selected based on the use of one receiving antenna, and additionally reporting the number of receiving antennas of the terminal to Msg.3.
A. 단말기는 Msg.3에서 자신이 non-BL UE 임을 알리거나, 또는 사용할 수 있는 수신 안테나 수(Msg.3 이후에 하향링크 수신 시에 사용할 안테나 수일 수 있으며, 타입2-CSS에서 MPDCCH(MPDCCH in type2-CSS)를 수신할 때에는 최소한 Msg.3에서 보고한 수신 안테나 수 이상을 사용해야 함)를 보고할 수 있으며, 이에 따라서 이후에 후속 절차가 단일 수신 안테나를 기본으로 하는 MTC 단말기와 상이한 동작을 할 수 있다.A. The terminal informs that it is a non-BL UE in Msg.3, or the number of available reception antennas (the number of antennas to be used for downlink reception after Msg.3, and MPDCCH (MPDCCH) in Type2-CSS. in type2-CSS), at least the number of receive antennas reported in Msg.3 should be used), so that subsequent procedures may be different from MTC terminals based on a single receive antenna. can do.
i. 타입2-CSS MPDCCH의 최대 반복 전송 횟수(Rmax) 그리고/또는 AL(Aggregation Level)은 기존에 MTC 단말기를 위해서 설정된 값을 자신이 Msg.3에 보고한 수신 능력(예를 들어, 수신 안테나 수)에 따라서 달리 해석할 수 있다.i. The maximum number of repetitive transmissions (Rmax) and / or the aggregation level (AL) of the type 2-CSS MPDCCH is the reception capability (for example, the number of reception antennas) that the UE reports to Msg. 3 a value previously set for the MTC terminal. It can be interpreted differently according to.
ii. 타입2-CSS MPDCCH의 최대 반복 전송 횟수(Rmax) 그리고/또는 AL(Aggregation Level)은 기존에 MTC 단말기를 위해서 설정된 값과 동일하지만, MPDCCH에서 PDSCH(예를 들어, Msg.4에 해당하는)의 최대 반복 전송 횟수를 재설정 해줄 수 있다. 즉, 이 경우에 단말기는 MPDCCH에서 스케줄링된(scheduled) PDSCH 반복 전송을 지시하는 정보가 재설정된 최대 반복 전송 횟수에 따라서 달리 해석될 수 있으며, 재설정되는 최대 반복 전송 횟수와 스케줄링된 PDSCH의 반복 전송 횟수는 동일한 MPDCCH에서 전송될 수 있다.ii. The maximum number of repetitive transmissions (Rmax) and / or the aggregation level (AL) of the type 2-CSS MPDCCH are the same as the values previously set for the MTC terminal, but the PDSCH (for example, corresponding to Msg. 4) in the MPDCCH You can reset the maximum number of repetitive transmissions. That is, in this case, the terminal may be interpreted differently according to the maximum number of repetitive transmissions in which information indicating PDSCH repetitive transmission scheduled in the MPDCCH is reset, and the maximum number of repetitive transmissions and the number of repetitive transmissions of the scheduled PDSCH are reset. May be transmitted on the same MPDCCH.
iii. 랜덤 접속 절차가 성공적으로 수행되어 CR(Contention Resolution)된 경우에, 단말기는 자신이 Msg.3에 보고한 수신 능력(예를 들어, 수신 안테나 수)에 따라서 미리 설정된 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH의 파라메터 값을 달리 해석할 수 있다.iii. In case that the random access procedure is successfully performed and contention resolution (CR) is performed, the terminal may set a preset MPDCCH and / or PDSCH parameter value according to a reception capability (eg, the number of reception antennas) reported by Msg.3. Can be interpreted differently.
H.3H.3 단말기의 타입(type)을 변경하는 방법How to change the type of terminal
Non-BL UE 또는 MTC 단말기가 둘 이상의 수신 안테나를 사용하는 경우에, 이를 가정한 동작 및 설정(기지국이 단말기의 다중 수신 안테나를 고려하여 설정한 파라메터 들)은 RRC 상태에 따라서 다르게 적용될 수 있다.When the non-BL UE or the MTC terminal uses two or more receiving antennas, the operation and setting (parameters set by the base station in consideration of the multiple receiving antennas of the terminal) may be applied differently depending on the RRC state.
예를 들어, 다중 수신 안테나를 가정한 단말기의 동작은 RRC 연결(RRC connected) 상태에서만 유효하며, RRC 유휴(RRC Idle) 상태에서는 단일 수신 안테나를 가정한 동작 및 설정이 있을 수 있다. 이는 단말기가 RRC 유휴 상태에서는 전력 절감(power saving)을 위해서 단일 수신 안테나 동작을 선호하기 때문일 수 있으며, 이를 위해서 단말기는 단일 안테나를 사용하는 경우에 필요한 수신 성능과 관련된 정보를 기지국에 보고할 필요가 있다. 여기서 단일 안테나를 가정한 수신 성능은, CE 레벨(CE level), RSRP(Reference Signal Received Power)/RSRQ(Reference Signal Received Power), CE 모드(CE mode), MPDCCH 반복 횟수(특정 BLER(Block Error Rate)을 만족하기 위한 MPDCCH의 반복 전송 횟수) 등이 있을 수 있다. 상기 정보를 유도하기 위한 측정 참조 자원(measurement reference resource) 또한 기지국에 의해서 설정될 수도 있다. 즉, 기존에 하향링크 채널 품질(downlink channel quality)에 대한 측정을 위한 측정 참조 자원과 달리 수신 안테나 수에 따른 하향링크 채널 품질 측정을 위한 측정 참조 자원이 새롭게 설정될 수도 있으며, 이는 RRC 상태와 관계 없을 수 있다. 만약, 단말이 RRC 유휴 모드(RRC Idle mode)에서도 다중 수신 안테나를 가정한 동작을 원하는 경우에는, 상기 정보 보고를 생략할 수 있다. 또한, RRC 유휴 모드에서 수신 안테나 수 변경을 하는 경우(예를 들어, 다중 수신 안테나에서 단일 수신 안테나로 또는 단일 수신 안테나에서 다중 수신 안테나로 변경)에는 랜덤 접속(Random access) 절차를 통해서 이를 변경 요청할 수 있으며, 이를 위한 Msg.1 자원을 기지국이 따로 설정(configuration) 하는 것도 가능하다.For example, an operation of a terminal assuming multiple reception antennas is valid only in an RRC connected state, and there may be an operation and configuration assuming a single reception antenna in an RRC idle state. This may be because the terminal prefers a single receive antenna operation for power saving in the RRC idle state. For this purpose, the terminal does not need to report information related to reception performance required when using a single antenna to the base station. have. Here, the reception performance assuming a single antenna is a CE level (CE level), RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power) / RSRQ (Reference Signal Received Power), CE mode (CE mode), MPDCCH repetition frequency (specific block error rate (BLER) ), And the number of repetitive transmissions of the MPDCCH to satisfy (). A measurement reference resource for deriving the information may also be set by the base station. That is, unlike conventional measurement reference resources for measuring downlink channel quality, a measurement reference resource for downlink channel quality measurement according to the number of receiving antennas may be newly set, which is related to the RRC state. It may not be. If the terminal wants to operate assuming multiple reception antennas in the RRC idle mode, the information reporting can be omitted. In addition, when changing the number of receiving antennas in the RRC idle mode (for example, changing from a multiple receiving antenna to a single receiving antenna or from a single receiving antenna to a multiple receiving antenna), a change request is requested through a random access procedure. It is also possible for the base station to separately configure the Msg.1 resource for this.
상기 제안에서 수신 안테나 수에 따른 측정 참조 자원(measurement reference resource) 설정(configuration) 및 수신 안테나 변경을 각각 수신 기법에 따른 하향링크 채널 품질 또는 수신 성능 측정/예측을 위한 측정 참조 자원 설정 및 수신 기법 변경으로 일반화해서, 각각을 아래와 같이 제안한다.In the proposal, the measurement reference resource configuration and the change of the reception antenna according to the number of reception antennas are changed, respectively, and the measurement reference resource setting and the reception scheme change for downlink channel quality or reception performance measurement / prediction according to the reception scheme are changed. In general, we propose each of the following:
(1) 기지국은 단말기의 수신 기법에 따른 수신 성능 측정/예측 및 보고를 위한 측정 참조 자원을 추가로 설정할 수 있다. 측정 참조 자원은 수신 기법 별로 독립적으로 설정되거나 또는 하나의 측정 참조 자원에 대해서 각각 수신 기법에 따른 정보(예를 들어, 하향링크 채널 품질에 상응하는 정보)를 독립적으로 측정하고 이를 보고할 수 있다. 각 수신 기법 별로 보고되는 정보는 앞서 보고되는 정보와 차등 값에 대해서만 보고되는 형태일 수도 있다.(1) The base station may further set measurement reference resources for reception performance measurement / prediction and reporting according to the reception technique of the terminal. The measurement reference resource may be independently set for each reception scheme, or may independently measure and report information (eg, information corresponding to downlink channel quality) according to the reception scheme for each measurement reference resource. The information reported for each reception technique may be reported only for the previously reported information and the differential value.
(2) 여기서 수신 품질에 대한 정보는 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH에 대한 반복 횟수(repetition number), CQI, PMI 정보 일 수 있다.(2) The information on the reception quality may be a repetition number, CQI, PMI information for the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH.
(3) 기지국은 단말기의 수신 기법 변경을 요청할 수 있으며, 단말기는 이에 대해서 거절할 수도 있다. 또한, 단말기가 자신이 사용하고자 하는 수신 기법의 변경을 기지국에게 요청할 수 있으며, 기지국은 이에 대해서 수락 또는 거절할 수 있다.(3) The base station may request to change the reception scheme of the terminal, and the terminal may reject it. In addition, the terminal may request the base station to change the reception scheme that the terminal intends to use, and the base station may accept or reject it.
A. 단말기가 요청하는 경우에는 기지국으로부터 묵시적(implicit) 또는 명시적(explicit)으로 수락 응답을 받기 전까지는 기존에 사용하던 수신 기법을 유지할 필요가 있다.A. If the terminal requests, it is necessary to maintain the existing reception scheme until the base station receives an implicit or implicit response from the base station.
B. 수신 기법 변경을 요청하거나 수락하는 경우에는, 수신 기법 변경에 대한 이유를 함께 알려줄 수 있으며, 이는 요청이 수락되는 경우에 단말기가 기대하는 후속 동작에 영향이 있을 수 있다. 예를 들어,B. In the case of requesting or accepting a change of the receiving scheme, the reason for the change of the receiving scheme may be informed together, which may affect the subsequent operation expected by the terminal when the request is accepted. For example,
i. 수율 향상이 수신 기법 변경의 이유인 경우에, DCI에 랭크(Rank) 그리고/또는 PMI 정보가 포함되거나 표현 범위가 증가하는 것을 기대할 수 있으며, 하향링크 채널 품질 보고(downlink channel quality report) 정보에 랭크 그리고/또는 PMI 정보가 포함되거나 표현 범위가 증가하도록 설정될 수 있다.i. If the yield improvement is the reason for the change of the reception scheme, it can be expected that the rank and / or PMI information is included in the DCI or the range of presentation is increased, and the rank is included in the downlink channel quality report information. And / or PMI information may be included or set to increase the presentation range.
ii. 커버리지 증가가 수신 기법 변경의 이유인 경우에, MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH의 Rmax 값 또는 반복 횟수(repetition number)의 표현 범위가 변경될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 DCI의 해석 방법이 달라질 수 있다. 뿐만 아니라, 단말기가 보고하는 측정 값의 표현 범위 또한 달리 정의/설정될 수 있다.ii. When the coverage increase is the reason for the change of the reception scheme, the expression range of the Rmax value or the repetition number of the MPDCCH and / or the PDSCH may be changed, and thus the interpretation method of the DCI may be changed. In addition, the expression range of the measurement value reported by the terminal may also be defined / set differently.
iii. 전력 감소가 수신 기법 변경의 이유인 경우에, MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH의 Rmax 값 또는 반복 횟수의 표현 범위가 변경될 수 있으며, 이에 따라 DCI의 해석 방법이 달라질 수 있다. 뿐만 아니라, 단말기의 측정 및 보고의 주기가 변경되거나 또는 측정 보고의 표현 범위가 달리 정의/설정될 수 있다.iii. When the power reduction is the reason for the change in the reception scheme, the expression range of the Rmax value or the number of repetitions of the MPDCCH and / or the PDSCH may be changed, and thus, the method of interpreting the DCI may be changed. In addition, the period of measurement and reporting of the terminal may be changed or the expression range of the measurement report may be defined / set differently.
(4) 수신 기법 변경을 요정하는 방법은,(4) how to trick the reception technique change,
A. PRACH 자원을 통해서 수행되거나,A. performed through a PRACH resource, or
B. SR(scheduling Request) 자원을 통해서 수행되거나,B. performed through a scheduling request (SR) resource, or
C. SRS(Sound Reference Signal) 자원을 통해서 수행될 수 있다.C. Can be performed through a Sound Reference Signal (SRS) resource.
D. 즉, 상기에서 PRACH 전송, SR 전송, SRS 전송의 이유가 수신 기법 변경에 의한 것일 수도 있다.D. That is, the reason for the PRACH transmission, the SR transmission, and the SRS transmission in the above may be due to a change in the reception scheme.
(5) 단말기의 수신 기법 정보 중에서 수신 안테나 변경을 요청하는 경우에, 기존에 사용하던 안테나 수에 따라서 절차가 다를 수 있다.(5) In the case of requesting to change the reception antenna among the reception scheme information of the terminal, the procedure may be different according to the number of antennas used previously.
A. 단일 수신 안테나에서 다중 수신 안테나 사용으로 변경하는 경우에, 다중 수신 안테나로 사용 변경하는 이유가 하나 이상의 MIMO 레이어(layer)를 수신하기 위함이거나 더 높은 수율(Throughput) 달성을 위한 것이라면, 기지국에 수신 안테나 수 변경 요청과 함께 그 목적을 보고할 필요가 있다. 즉, 기지국이 하나 이상의 MIMO 레이어를 스케줄링 하거나 또는 이에 적합한 CSI-RS를 설정하거나 또는 CSI 정보 보고를 요청하기 위해서, DCI 구성 등의 정보가 변경될 필요가 있는 경우에는 이를 기지국에 반드시 보고/요청할 필요가 있다.A. When changing from using a single receive antenna to using multiple receive antennas, if the reason for changing to use multiple receive antennas is to receive more than one MIMO layer or to achieve higher throughput, It is necessary to report the purpose with the request to change the number of receiving antennas. That is, if the base station needs to change information such as DCI configuration in order to schedule one or more MIMO layers, set up a suitable CSI-RS, or request CSI information reporting, it must be reported / requested to the base station. There is.
B. 상기 절차에서, 단말기의 수신 안테나 수 변경 요청(기지국이 요청하거나 또는 단말기가 요청하는 경우 모두)에 대한 수락을 받기 전까지는 이전에 가정하고 있던 단말기의 수신 안테나 수를 가정한 동작을 기지국과 단말기가 모두 따를 필요가 있다. 즉, 단말기와 기지국은 DCI 구성(configuration)/해석 및 측정 보고 등과 관련된 모든 동작은 수신 안테나 수 변경 요청이 수락되기 전까지 또는 수락 되고도 일정 시간 동안은 기존과 동일하다고 가정하고 동작할 필요가 있다. 여기서, 수신 안테나 수 변경 요청이 수락되는 방법은 명시적(explicit) 이거나 또는 묵시적(implicit) 일 수 있으며, 묵시적 수락인 경우에는 MPDCCH 관련 Rmax를 새롭게 설정 받거나 또는 PDSCH 관련 TM(Transmission Mode), 랭크(Rank), CSI 피드백 모드(CSI feedback mode), Rmax 등을 새롭게 설정 받는 경우가 있을 수 있다.B. In the above procedure, the operation of assuming the number of receiving antennas of the terminal, which has been previously assumed, is accepted until the base station receives acceptance of the request for changing the number of receiving antennas of the terminal (both requested by the base station or the terminal requests). The terminal needs to follow everything. That is, the terminal and the base station need to operate assuming that all operations related to DCI configuration / interpretation and measurement report, etc. are the same as before until the reception antenna number change request is accepted or for a predetermined time. Here, the method of receiving a request for changing the number of receiving antennas may be explicit or implicit, and in the case of implicit acceptance, the MPDCCH-related Rmax may be newly set or PDSCH-related TM (Transmission Mode), rank ( Rank), CSI feedback mode (CSI feedback mode), Rmax may be newly set.
H.4H.4 채널 별로 사용될 수 있는 수신 안테나 수Number of receive antennas that can be used for each channel
단말기는 하향링크 채널 별로 수신 안테나 수를 달리 가정하여 동작할 수 있으며, 기지국은 이를 고려해서 해당 채널을 스케줄링(scheduling) 할 수 있다.The terminal may operate by assuming a different number of receiving antennas for each downlink channel, and the base station may schedule the corresponding channel in consideration of this.
(1) 타입1-CSS(type1-CSS) (페이징과 시스템 정보(system information) 업데이트 통지(update notification)을 위해서 사용되는 MPDCCH 검색 공간(search space) 및 해당 MPDCCH로 스케줄링된 PDSCH)(1) type1-CSS (type1-CSS) (MPDCCH search space used for paging and system information update notification and PDSCH scheduled with the corresponding MPDCCH)
A. 2Rx 안테나 사용 여부는 구현 이슈(implementation issue)일 수 있으며, RRC 연결 모드(RRC Connected mode)에서 다중 수신 안테나를 사용해서 CE 레벨(CE level)을 선택했거나 또는 다중 수신 안테나를 사용하도록 설정된 경우에도, 타입1-CSS 관련된 채널의 수신은 단일 수신 안테나를 가정하고 설정될 수 있음A. Whether to use 2Rx antennas may be an implementation issue, when the CE level is selected using multiple receive antennas in RRC connected mode, or when multiple receive antennas are set to be used. In addition, the reception of the type1-CSS related channel can be set assuming a single receive antenna
(2) 타입2-CSS(type2-CSS) (랜덤 접속 과정에서 사용되는 MPDCCH 검색 공간 및 해당 MPDCCH로 스케줄링된 PDSCH)(2) type2-CSS (type2-CSS) (MPDCCH search space used in the random access procedure and PDSCH scheduled with the corresponding MPDCCH)
A. Msg.4 모니터링(monitoring)에 가정되는 수신 안테나 수는 Msg.2 모니터링에 사용되거나 가정되는 수신 안테나 수는 다를 수 있으며 또한 CE 레벨 선택 시에 가정한 수신 안테나 수와 다를 수도 있다.A. The number of receive antennas assumed for Msg.4 monitoring may differ from the number of receive antennas used or assumed for Msg.2 monitoring and may differ from the number of receive antennas assumed for CE level selection.
(3) C-RNTI, SPS-C-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI로 스크램블링된 USS 및 타입0-CSS (USS and type0-CSS scrambled with C-RNTI, SPS-C-RNTI, and TPC-PUCCH-RNTI)(3) USS and type 0-CSS scrambled with C-RNTI, SPS-C-RNTI, and TPC-PUCCH- RNTI)
A. 단말기의 수신 안테나 수를 고려해서 MPDCCH와 PDSCH의 파라메터(예를 들어, csi-NumRepetitionCE, mpdcch-NumRepetition, pdsch-maxNumRepetitionCEmodeA와 pdsch-maxNumRepetitionCEmodeB)가 설정될 수 있으며, 이는 각 수신 안테나 수에 따라서 다수의 설정 값이 주어지거나 또는 기준(reference) 수신 안테나 수(예를 들어, 단일 수신 안테나 수)를 가정한 하나의 설정을 실제 사용하는 또는 설정된 수신 안테나 수에 따라서 달리 해석하도록 허용될 수 있다. 또한, 단일 수신 안테나를 가정한 경우와 다중 수신 안테나를 가정한 경우의 DCI 포맷 그리고/또는 사이크(size)가 상이할 수 있으며, DCI의 해석 또한 다를 수 있다. 이때, DCI는 상향링크 그랜트(UL grant)는 단말기의 수신 안테나 수에 관계 없이 동일할 수 있으며, 하향링크 그랜트(DL grant)에 대해서만 그리고/또는 CSI 피드백(CSI feedback) 관련된 정보에 대해서만 단말기의 수신 안테나 수에 따라 다른 포맷 그리고/또는 사이즈 그리고/또는 해석이 허용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, DL 그랜트의 반복 횟수를 지시하는 필드(field)가 N 비트(예를 들어, 1) 만큼 작을 수 있으며, 해당 N 비트는 RI(Rank Indicator) 그리고/또는 PMI 정보를 확장하기 위해서 사용될 수 있다.A. MPDCCH and PDSCH parameters (for example, csi-NumRepetitionCE, mpdcch-NumRepetition, pdsch-maxNumRepetitionCEmodeA and pdsch-maxNumRepetitionCEmodeB) may be set in consideration of the number of receiving antennas of the terminal, Given a setting value of or may be allowed to interpret differently depending on the actual use or set number of receiving antennas, one setting assuming a reference number of receiving antennas (for example, the number of single receiving antennas). In addition, the DCI format and / or size may be different in the case of assuming a single receive antenna and a multiple receive antenna, and interpretation of the DCI may also be different. In this case, the DCI may be the same as the UL grant (UL grant) irrespective of the number of receiving antennas of the terminal, and the reception of the terminal only for downlink grant (DL grant) and / or information related to the CSI feedback (CSI feedback) Other formats and / or sizes and / or interpretations may be allowed depending on the number of antennas. For example, a field indicating the number of repetitions of a DL grant may be as small as N bits (eg, 1), which N bits may be used to extend RI (Rank Indicator) and / or PMI information. Can be.
(4) 타입0-CSS (상향링크 전력 제어(uplink power control)을 위한 DCI가 전달되는 검색 공간(search space)이며, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI로 MPDCCH가 스크램블링(scrambling) 되는 검색 공간)(4) Type 0-CSS (search space in which DCI for uplink power control is carried, search space in which MPDCCH is scrambling with TPC-PUCCH-RNTI)
A. 상향링크 전력 제어를 지시하는 DCI 포맷(DCI format) 그리고/또는 사이즈(size) 그리고/또는 해석은 단말기의 수신 안테나 수에 영향을 받지 않도록 정의될 수 있다.A. The DCI format and / or size and / or interpretation indicating uplink power control may be defined so as not to be affected by the number of reception antennas of the terminal.
H.5H.5 단말기의 수신 안테나 수에 따른 측정(measurement) 및 보고 동작Measurement and reporting operation according to the number of receiving antennas of the terminal
본 실시 예와 관련된 UE/기지국 동작(operation)에 대해 간략히 정리한다.The UE / base station operation related to the present embodiment will be briefly summarized.
먼저, UE는 측정과 관련된 설정(configuration) 정보를 기지국으로부터 수신한다.First, the UE receives configuration information related to the measurement from the base station.
그리고, UE는 수신된 설정 정보에 기초하여 측정을 위한 RS(Reference Signal)를 이용하여 측정을 수행한다.The UE performs measurement using a reference signal (RS) for measurement based on the received configuration information.
그리고, UE는 측정에 대한 정보를 특정 자원 상에서 기지국으로 보고한다.The UE then reports the information about the measurement to the base station on the specific resource.
다음으로, 기지국은 측정과 관련된 설정(configuration) 정보를 UE로 전송한다.Next, the base station transmits configuration information related to the measurement to the UE.
그리고, 기지국은 UE로부터 특정 자원 상에서 측정에 대한 정보를 수신한다.And, the base station receives information on the measurement on a specific resource from the UE.
RLM(Radio Link monitoring)에 사용되는 수신 안테나 수는 달리 가정/정의 될 수 있다.The number of receive antennas used for RLM (Radio Link monitoring) can be assumed / defined otherwise.
(1) In-sync와 Out-of-sync를 판별할 때 가정하는 수신 안테나 수는 달리 설정될 수 있다. 또는, 다중 수신 안테나를 사용하는 단말기는 Out-of-sync가 특정 횟수(예를 들어, 1회) 만큼 발생된 경우에 Out-of-sync 횟수를 카운트(count) 하거나 In-sync를 체크(check) 하기 위해서 항상 다중 수신 안테나를 사용해서 RLM을 수행할 필요가 있을 수 있다. 또한, 다중 수신 안테나를 사용해서 RLM을 수행하는 경우에, In-sync와 Out-out-sync를 판별하는 기준 DCI 포맷/사이즈(reference DCI format/size)가 단일 수신 안테나를 사용하는 경우와 상이게 정의/적용될 수 있다.(1) When determining in-sync and out-of-sync, the number of receiving antennas to be assumed may be set differently. Alternatively, the terminal using the multiple receive antennas counts the number of out-of-syncs or checks the in-sync when the out-of-sync occurs a certain number of times (for example, once). It may always be necessary to perform RLM using multiple receive antennas. In addition, when performing RLM using multiple reception antennas, the reference DCI format / size for determining in-sync and out-out-sync is different from when using a single reception antenna. Can be defined / applied.
(2) CSI(Channel State Information) 획득(acquisition)을 위한 측정 참조 자원(measurement reference resource)가 수신 안테나 수에 따라서 달리 정의될 수 있다.(2) A measurement reference resource for channel state information (CSI) acquisition may be defined differently according to the number of receiving antennas.
A. 예를 들어, 다중 수신 안테나를 사용하거나 또는 랭크 2 이상을 지원하는 경우에, CSI 측정 참조 자원/신호는 CRS가 아닌 CSI-RS를 이용하도록 설정될 수 있다. 이때, CSI-RS가 설정(configuration) 되면, MPDCCH 및 PDSCH와 자원 매핑(resource mapping) 차원에서 혼동이 없도록 특정 규칙(rule)이 정의될 수 있다.A. For example, when using multiple receive antennas or supporting rank 2 or more, the CSI measurement reference resource / signal may be configured to use CSI-RS rather than CRS. In this case, when the CSI-RS is configured, a specific rule may be defined so that there is no confusion in terms of MPDCCH and PDSCH and resource mapping.
i. 예를 들어, 다른 사용자와 공유하는 자원 (MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH)에서는 CSI-RS 전송을 기대하지 않거나, CSI-RS가 없다고 가정하고 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH 레이트 매칭(rate-matching)을 수행할 수 있다. 또는, CSI-RS 전송을 기대하고, 해당 RE에서 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH는 CSI-RS에 의해서 펑쳐링(puncturing) 되었다고 가정하고 수신 동작을 수행할 수 있다.i. For example, resources shared with other users (MPDCCH and / or PDSCH) may not expect CSI-RS transmission, or may perform MPDCCH and / or PDSCH rate matching on the assumption that there is no CSI-RS. have. Alternatively, the UE may expect CSI-RS transmission and assume that the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH in the corresponding RE are punctured by the CSI-RS to perform a reception operation.
ii. 본 발명에서 사용되는 레이트 매칭, 펑쳐링, 드롭핑(dropping)은 동일한 의미로 해석될 수 있다.ii. Rate matching, puncturing, and dropping used in the present invention may be interpreted in the same sense.
iii. 만약, USS(UE-specific search space)와 관련된 채널(MPDCCH 그리고/또는 연관된 PDSCH)은 설정된 CSI-RS가 전송된다고 기대할 수 있으며, CSI-RS RE를 제외한 RE에 대해서 레이트 매칭을 기대할 수 있다.iii. If the channel (MPDCCH and / or associated PDSCH) associated with the UE-specific search space (USS) can be expected that the configured CSI-RS is transmitted, rate matching can be expected for REs other than the CSI-RS RE.
(3) 단말기가 다중 수신 안테나를 사용하는 것을 가정하거나 또는 설정된 경우에, 측정 간격(measurement gap)은 단일 수신 안테나 보다 짧게 설정될 수 있다. 또한, 단말기가 다중 수신 안테나를 가정해서 짧은 측정 간격을 설정 받은 경우에, 측정 간격 구간에서 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH의 자원 매핑(resource mapping) 방식은 기존(측정 간격 구간 동안 MPDCCH/PDSCH는 반복 전송에 카운트(count) 하지만 드롭(drop) 되는 것으로 가정)과 달리 연기(postpone)으로 설정될 수 있다.(3) In the case where it is assumed or set that the terminal uses multiple receive antennas, the measurement gap may be set shorter than that of a single receive antenna. In addition, when the terminal receives a short measurement interval assuming multiple reception antennas, the resource mapping scheme of the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH in the measurement interval interval is conventional (MPDCCH / PDSCH is repeated for repeated transmission during the measurement interval interval). Unlike count, which is assumed to be a drop, it can be set to postpone.
(4) 측정 간격(measurement gap)은 UE가 측정을 수행하는데 사용할 수 있는 기간(period)를 나타내는 것으로, 해당 기간에서는 UL 및 DL 전송이 스케쥴되지 않는다.(4) A measurement gap represents a period in which the UE can use to perform the measurement, and UL and DL transmissions are not scheduled in that period.
(5) UE는 기지국으로부터 측정 간격을 포함하는 RRC 시그널링(signaling)을 수신하고, 상기 측정 간격에 기초하여 특정 신호에 대한 측정을 수행한다.(5) The UE receives an RRC signaling including a measurement interval from the base station and performs measurement on a specific signal based on the measurement interval.
(6) 상기 측정 간격은 UE가 신호를 송수신하는 활성 BWP(active BWP)와 다른 주파수 밴드(frequency band)에 설정될 수 있으며, 이 경우 UE는 RF 재튜닝(RF retuning)(또는 주파수 밴드 스위칭(frequency band switching))을 통해 측정 간격 동안 측정을 수행할 수 있다.(6) The measurement interval may be set in a frequency band different from the active BWP (UE BWP) in which the UE transmits and receives a signal, in which case the UE may use RF retuning (or frequency band switching). frequency band switching) to take measurements during the measurement interval.
(7) 그리고, UE가 RF 재튜닝을 하는 경우, RF를 스위칭(switching)하거나 재구성(reconfiguration)하는데 소용되는 시간이 추가적으로 정의 또는 설정될 수 있다.(7) And, if the UE performs RF retuning, the time used to switch or reconfigure RF may be further defined or set.
H.6H.6 CSI-RS가 설정된 경우에 MPDCCH/PDSCH의 자원 매핑(resource mapping)Resource mapping of MPDCCH / PDSCH when CSI-RS is configured
Non-BL UE의 경우에 CSI 획득(acquisition)을 위한 측정 참조 자원/신호가 CSI-RS로 설정될 수도 있다. 이때, 관련된 단말기의 동작 및 자원 매핑은 아래와 같을 수 있다.In the case of a non-BL UE, a measurement reference resource / signal for CSI acquisition may be set to CSI-RS. At this time, the operation and resource mapping of the associated terminal may be as follows.
(1) CE 레벨 선택은 CRS 기반의 RSRP(Reference Signal Received Power)를 기준으로 수행하지만, CSI-RS 기반으로 측정 보고(measurement report)가 수행된 이후에는 CSI-RS 측정을 기준으로 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH의 자원 관련 설정(예를 들어, Rmax, NB, 자원 할당 타입(resource allocation type) 등)이 달라질 수 있다.(1) CE level selection is performed based on CRS-based RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power), but after measurement report is performed based on CSI-RS, MPDCCH and / or CSI-RS measurement is performed based on CSI-RS measurement. Resource related configuration (eg, Rmax, NB, resource allocation type, etc.) of the PDSCH may vary.
(2) MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH가 반복 전송되는 경우에, 반복된 시간/주파수 자원(time/frequency resource) 간에 일부 자원에 CSI-RS가 포함되면, 반복 전송되는 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH 자원에 모두 CSI-RS가 있다고 가정하고 펑쳐링(puncturing) 또는 레이트 매칭(rate-matching) 될 수 있다. 여기서 펑쳐링 또는 레이트 매칭의 기준은 해당 자원을 다른 단말기와 공유하는지 여부에 따라서 달라질 수 있다. 예를 들어, 해당 자원을 다른 단말기와 공유하는 경우에는 펑쳐링 또는 해당 CSI-RS가 전송되지 않는다고 가정한 자원 매핑이 적용될 수 있다. 또한, CSI-RS 포트(port) 수가 특정 값보다 많거나 또는 CSI-RS 전송 주기가 특정 값 보다 짧은 경우에는 CSI-RS RE(Resource Element)를 고려한 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH 레이트 매칭이 적용될 수 있다.(2) When MPDCCH and / or PDSCH is repeatedly transmitted, if CSI-RS is included in some resources between repeated time / frequency resources, both CSIs are repeatedly transmitted in MPDCCH and / or PDSCH resources. It can be puncturing or rate-matching assuming there is an RS. The criteria for puncturing or rate matching may vary depending on whether the corresponding resource is shared with other terminals. For example, when the resource is shared with other terminals, puncturing or resource mapping assuming that the corresponding CSI-RS is not transmitted may be applied. In addition, when the number of CSI-RS ports is larger than a specific value or the CSI-RS transmission period is shorter than a specific value, MPDCCH and / or PDSCH rate matching considering CSI-RS RE may be applied.
(3) CSI-RS가 전송되는 시간/주파수 자원에서는 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH 자원 매핑이 CSI-RS가 전송되지 않는 경우와 다를 수 있다. 이를 위해서 CSI-RS 설정 정보는 CSI-RS가 전송되는 시간/주파수 자원을 사용하는 단말들 모두에게 공유될 필요가 있다. 이를 위해서 CSI-RS 기반의 CSI 측정을 지원하지 않는 단말기인 경우에도 CSI-RS 설정(configuration) 정보는 필요할 수 있으며, 이는 RRC로 설정 받거나 또는 PDSCH를 스케줄링(scheduling) 하는 DCI에서 해당 자원에 CSI-RS가 있는지 유무를 지시해주는 방법으로 구현될 수 있다. 즉, 기지국은 단말기에게 CSI-RS 기반의 CSI 측정을 요구하지 않는 경우에도, 자원 매핑에 CSI-RS RE를 고려하도록 RRC 그리고/또는 DCI로 이를 알려줄 필요가 있다. 해당 정보가 주어진 경우에, 단말기는 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH 자원 매핑을 하는 과정에서 CSI-RS RE 위치에 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH가 펑쳐링 처리되거나 또는 레이트 매칭 처리된 것으로 해석할 수 있으며, 이는 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH의 반복 전송 횟수(실제 반복 전송 횟수 또는 설정된 최대 반복 전송 횟수), CSI-RS 전송 주기(예를 들어, 특정 시간 구간 내에서 CSI-RS가 전송되는 자원의 비율), 해당 자원을 다른 사용자와 공유하는지 여부에 따라서 펑쳐링과 레이트 매칭 중에서 달리 해석될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 다른 사용자와 공유하는 자원인 경우에는 펑쳐링으로, 특정 단말 그룹 또는 자신에게 한정된 자원인 경우에는 레이트 매칭으로, 특정 반복 전송 횟수 보다 적은 경우에는 레이트 매칭 (또는 펑쳐링) 등으로 해석 될 수 있다.(3) The MPDCCH and / or PDSCH resource mapping may be different from the case in which the CSI-RS is not transmitted in the time / frequency resource in which the CSI-RS is transmitted. To this end, the CSI-RS configuration information needs to be shared with all terminals using time / frequency resources over which the CSI-RS is transmitted. To this end, even if the terminal does not support CSI-RS-based CSI measurement, CSI-RS configuration information may be required, which is set to RRC or CSI-RS to the corresponding resource in DCI scheduling PDSCH. It can be implemented in a way to indicate the presence or absence of RS. That is, even if the base station does not require CSI-RS based CSI measurement, the base station needs to inform the RRC and / or DCI to consider the CSI-RS RE in resource mapping. Given this information, the terminal may interpret the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH to be punctured or rate matched to the CSI-RS RE location in the process of mapping the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH. The number of repetitive transmissions of the PDSCH (the actual number of repetitive transmissions or the set maximum number of repetitive transmissions), the CSI-RS transmission period (for example, the ratio of resources for which the CSI-RS is transmitted within a specific time interval), Depending on whether it is shared with the user, it can be interpreted differently between puncturing and rate matching. For example, if the resource is shared with other users, it is interpreted as puncturing; if it is a resource limited to a specific terminal group or itself, it is rate matching; if it is less than a specific number of repetitive transmissions, it is interpreted as rate matching (or puncturing). Can be.
상기 제안과 유사하게, CSI-RS와 MPDCCH 및 PDSCH의 자원 매핑(resource mapping) 관계를 아래와 같이 설정할 수도 있다.Similar to the above proposal, the resource mapping relationship between the CSI-RS, the MPDCCH, and the PDSCH may be set as follows.
● CSI-RS와 MPDCCH의 자원 매핑Resource mapping between CSI-RS and MPDCCH
(1) MPDCCH 검색 공간(search space) 전체 또는 일부 서브프레임(subframe)에서는 CSI-RS 전송을 기대하지 않음. LTE EPDCCH에서 CSI-RS로 사용되는 RE(Resource Element)는 EPDCCH 자원 매핑 과정에서 레이트 매칭으로 처리되며, ECCE 병합 레벨(aggregation level) 결정시(3GPP TS 36.213의 9.1.4절에서 Case-1의 n EPDCCH < 104에서 n EPDCCH 카운트)에는 CSI-RS RE는 포함하지 않고 계산한다. 반면, MPDCCH에서는 CSI-RS로 사용되는 RE는 MPDCCH 자원 매핑 과정에서 펑쳐링 처리되고, ECCE 병합 레벨 결정시에 CSI-RS RE는 포함된다. 이는 MTC 단말기의 경우에 CSI-RS 설정을 받지 못하기 때문에, CSI-RS의 존재 유무를 정확히 알 수 없기 때문이다. 그러나 non-BL 단말기가 CE 모드(CE mode)로 동작하는 경우에 CSI-RS 설정(configuration)을 이해할 수 있다면(즉, 기지국으로부터 관련된 설정 정보를 수신 할 수 있다면), CSS와 USS를 구분해서 CSI-RS RE가 MPDCCH 자원 매핑에 펑쳐링으로 처리될지, 또는 레이트 매칭으로 처리될지 결정될 수 있다. 뿐만 아니라, ECCE 병합 레벨을 결정함에 있어서, CSI-RS RE를 포함할지 여부를 달리 할 수 있다. 이를 기반으로 간단한 예시는 아래와 같을 수 있다.(1) Do not expect CSI-RS transmission in all or some subframes of MPDCCH search space. Resource element (RE), which is used as CSI-RS in LTE EPDCCH, is processed as rate matching in EPDCCH resource mapping process, and when determining ECCE aggregation level (n. N EPDCCH count in EPDCCH < 104) is calculated without including the CSI-RS RE. On the other hand, in the MPDCCH, the RE used as the CSI-RS is punctured during the MPDCCH resource mapping process, and the CSI-RS RE is included in determining the ECCE aggregation level. This is because the MTC terminal does not receive the CSI-RS configuration, and therefore it is not possible to know exactly whether the CSI-RS exists. However, if the CSI-RS configuration can be understood when the non-BL terminal is operating in the CE mode (that is, if it can receive related configuration information from the base station), the CSI can be distinguished from the CSI. It may be determined whether the RS RE is to be processed by puncturing or MP matching the MPDCCH resource mapping. In addition, in determining the ECCE aggregation level, whether to include the CSI-RS RE may be different. Based on this, a simple example may be as follows.
① 타입0 및/또는 타입1 및/또는 타입2 CSS에서는 CSI-RS 전송을 기대하지 않음, 또는 CSI-RS 전송을 기대하는 경우에도 ECCE 병합 레벨을 결정하기 위해서 MPDCCH 전송에 사용되는 RE 수를 구함에 있어서, CSI-RS 전송되는 RE도 카운트 함Type 0 and / or Type 1 and / or Type 2 CSS does not expect CSI-RS transmission, or calculates the number of REs used for MPDCCH transmission to determine ECCE aggregation level even when expecting CSI-RS transmission. Also counts the CSI-RS transmitted RE
② C-RNTI 및/또는 SPS-C-RNTI 및/또는 TPC-PUCCH-RNTI 및/또는 TPC-PUSCH-RNTI와 관계된 (예를 들어, 해당 RNTI로 CRC가 스크램블링(scrambling) 된) MPDCCH 검색 공간(search space)에서는 CSI-RS 전송을 기대함② MPDCCH search space associated with C-RNTI and / or SPS-C-RNTI and / or TPC-PUCCH-RNTI and / or TPC-PUSCH-RNTI (e.g., CRC scrambling with that RNTI) search space) expects CSI-RS transmission
■ 이때, ECCE 병합 레벨을 결정하기 위해서 MPDCCH 전송에 사용되는 RE 수를 구함에 있어서, CSI-RS 전송되는 RE를 카운트하지 않음At this time, in determining the number of REs used for MPDCCH transmission to determine the ECCE aggregation level, the CSI-RS transmitted REs are not counted.
뿐만 아니라, 상기 제안에서 MPDCCH와 CSI-RS의 자원 매핑 관계 및 병합 레벨 결정에 CSI-RS RE 고려 유무는 MPDCCH의 해당 검색 공간 내에서 Rmax(최대 반복 전송 횟수)에 따라서 다를 수도 있다. 예를 들어, Rmax가 특정 값 보다 큰 경우에는, CSI-RS RE에 대해서 MPDCCH가 펑쳐링 처리되며, 병합 레벨 결정시에 고려하는 RE 수에 CSI-RS가 포함되도록 설정될 수 있다.In addition, in the above proposal, whether the CSI-RS RE is considered in determining the resource mapping relationship and the merge level between the MPDCCH and the CSI-RS may vary depending on Rmax (maximum number of repetitive transmissions) in the corresponding search space of the MPDCCH. For example, when Rmax is larger than a specific value, the MPDCCH is punctured for the CSI-RS RE, and the CSI-RS may be set to be included in the number of REs considered in determining the merge level.
● CSI-RS와 PDSCH의 자원 매핑(resource mapping)Resource mapping between CSI-RS and PDSCH
(1) CSI-RS 설정(configuration)을 이해하는 단말기(들)가 수신을 기대하는 PDSCH(예를 들어, C-RNTI 또는 SPS-C-RNTI로 스크램블링(scrambling)된 MPDCCH로부터 스케줄링(scheduling) 또는 유도된)는 해당 자원 내에서 CSI-RS 전송이 예약된 경우에, CSI-RS 전송에 사용되는 RE를 제외하고 PDSCH가 레이트 매칭 되어 전송된다고 기대할 수 있다(1) Scheduling from a PDSCH (e.g., an MPDCCH scrambled with C-RNTI or SPS-C-RNTI) that the terminal (s) that understands the CSI-RS configuration expect to receive or If the CSI-RS transmission is reserved within the corresponding resource, it can be expected that the PDSCH is rate matched except for the RE used for the CSI-RS transmission.
① PDSCH가 여러 서브프레임에 걸쳐 반복 전송되는 경우에, 그리고 반복 전송되는 서브프레임 간에 CSI-RS 전송이 예약된 PDSCH 자원과 그렇지 않은 PDSCH 자원이 포함되는 경우에는 예약된 CSI-RS 전송을 기대할 수는 있지만, PDSCH의 일부 RE가 CSI-RS에 의해서 펑쳐링 된다고 기대할 수 있다. 이때, CSI-RS 전송이 예약되지 않은 PDSCH 자원에서는 CSI-RS에 의한 펑쳐링은 발생하지 않는다고 기대할 수 있다.(1) When PDSCH is repeatedly transmitted over several subframes, and when PDSCH resources reserved for CSI-RS transmission and PDSCH resources other than repeated subframes are included, the reserved CSI-RS transmission may not be expected. However, some REs of the PDSCH can be expected to be punctured by the CSI-RS. At this time, it can be expected that puncturing by CSI-RS does not occur in PDSCH resources for which CSI-RS transmission is not reserved.
② 특징적으로, CSI-RS 전송에 사용되는 RE에 대해서 PDSCH가 레이트 매칭 되거나 또는 펑쳐링 처리되는지 여부는 PDSCH 전송 방법에 따라서 달리 적용될 수 있다.② In particular, whether the PDSCH is rate matched or punctured with respect to the RE used for the CSI-RS transmission may be differently applied according to the PDSCH transmission method.
■ 예를 들어, PDSCH 반복 전송이 특정 값 보다 적거나 또는 PDSCH 반복 전송에 사용되는 모든 PDSCH 자원에 CSI-RS 전송이 예약되어 있는 경우에는 레이트 매칭이 적용될 수 있다. 여기서, PDSCH 반복 전송 내에서 CSI-RS 전송이 예약되었는지 여부는, RV(Redundancy Version) 단위 내로 한정될 수도 있다. 즉, 반복 전송 간에 RV가 변경될 때, 그리고 전체 반복 전송 사이에 일부 PDSCH 자원에만 CSI-RS 전송이 예약된 경우에, 동일한 RV가 연속 전송되는 (BL/CE DL 서브프레임 기준으로) 서브프레임 내에서는 CSI-RS 전송 유무가 동일하다면, 해당 구간 내에서는 PDSCH 반복 전송의 다른 구간과 다른 방법이 적용될 수 있다.For example, rate matching may be applied when PDSCH repetitive transmission is less than a specific value or CSI-RS transmission is reserved for all PDSCH resources used for PDSCH repetitive transmission. Here, whether CSI-RS transmission is reserved in the PDSCH repetitive transmission may be limited to a redundancy version (RV) unit. That is, when the RV is changed between repetitive transmissions and when CSI-RS transmission is reserved for only some PDSCH resources between all repetitive transmissions, the same RV is continuously transmitted (based on BL / CE DL subframe) in the subframe. In the case of whether CSI-RS transmission is the same, a method different from other intervals of PDSCH repeated transmission may be applied in the corresponding interval.
■ 또 다른 일례로, PDSCH 전송 모드(transmission mode, TM)에 따라서 달리 적용될 수 있다. 특히, RE 그룹을 활용한 전송 다이버시티 방식(transmit diversity scheme)을 사용하는 경우(예를 들어, TM2 또는 SFBC(Space Frequency Block Coding) 또는 FSTD(Frequency Shift Transmit Diversity))에는 레이트 매칭과 펑쳐링 중에서 다른 조건에 따라 선택적으로 적용되는 것이 아니라 특정 기법으로 고정될 수 있다. 만약, 펑쳐링을 적용하는 경우에는 전송 다이버시티 방식을 구성하는 RE 그룹이 온전히 수신되지 못하기 때문에, 제약이 있을 수 있으며, 레이트 매칭을 적용하는 경우에는, 전송 다이버시티 방식을 구성하는 RE 그룹 사이에 간격이 너무 멀어서 RE 그룹 내에서 채널 변화로 인한 성능 열화가 발생할 수 있기 때문일 수 있다.In another example, it may be differently applied according to a PDSCH transmission mode (TM). In particular, in case of using a transmit diversity scheme using an RE group (for example, TM2 or Space Frequency Block Coding (SFBC) or Frequency Shift Transmit Diversity (FSTD)), among rate matching and puncturing, It may be fixed by a specific technique instead of being selectively applied according to other conditions. If puncturing is applied, the RE group constituting the transmit diversity scheme may not be completely received. Therefore, there may be a limitation. When applying rate matching, between the RE groups constituting the transmit diversity scheme, This may be because the intervals are too long to cause performance degradation due to channel changes within the RE group.
H.7H.7 단말기의 타입(type)에 따른 자원 설정(resource configuration)Resource configuration according to the type of the terminal
단말기의 타입 (예를 들어, Non-BL UE 또는 일반 MTC UE 또는 단말기의 수신 안테나 수)에 따라서 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH 자원 설정(예를 들어, Rmax)이 다를 수 있으며, 이는 상위 계층 메시지 (예를 들어, RRC)를 통해서 설정 되거나, 또는 상위 계층 메시지를 통해서 각 단말기의 타입 별로 다수의 자원 세트(resource set)이 설정된 이후에 해당 세트 내에서 특정 설정을 DCI 기반(또는 MAC(Medium Access Control) CE(Control Element) 기반)으로 지시할 수도 있다.Depending on the type of terminal (e.g., number of non-BL UEs or generic MTC UEs or the number of receive antennas of the terminal), the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH resource configuration (e.g., Rmax) may be different, which is higher layer message (e.g., For example, after a plurality of resource sets are set for each terminal type through an RRC or an upper layer message, a specific setting is set within the corresponding set based on DCI (or MAC (Medium Access Control)). Control element (CE) based).
(1) TM(Transmission Mode) 별로 Rmax를 독립적으로 설정할 수 있다. 여기서, ‘독립’은 관계가 없는 경우도 포함되며, 상이한 값인 경우에도 적용될 수 있다.(1) Rmax can be set independently for each transmission mode (TM). Here, the term 'independence' includes a case where there is no relation and may be applied to a case where the value is different.
A. TM 변경시에 단말기는 해당 TM을 위해서 설정된 Rmax 값으로 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH의 설정을 변경하거나, 또는 해당 TM에서 사용할 Rmax 값(실제 Rmax 값 또는 참조 TM(reference TM)을 기준으로 스케일(scale)한 값)을 재설정 받을 수도 있다.A. When changing TM, the terminal changes the setting of MPDCCH and / or PDSCH to the Rmax value set for the TM, or scales based on the Rmax value (actual Rmax value or reference TM) to be used in the TM. may be reset.
B. 단말기의 타입에 관계 없이 사용할 수 있거나 또는 특정 이벤트가 발생하는 경우에 사용할 TM으로 폴백 TM(fallback TM)이 정의되는 경우에, 해당 폴백 TM에서 사용할 Rmax 값은 독립적으로 설정될 수 있다. 또한, 폴백 TM은 다른 TM의 Rmax를 설정함에 있어서, 참조 TM으로 사용될 수도 있다.B. When a fallback TM is defined as a TM that can be used regardless of the type of the terminal or to be used when a specific event occurs, the Rmax value to be used in the corresponding fallback TM may be independently set. The fallback TM may also be used as a reference TM in setting the Rmax of another TM.
C. 여기서, Rmax는 MPDCCH와 PDSCH 간에 상이할 수 있다.C. Here, Rmax may be different between the MPDCCH and the PDSCH.
(2) 랭크(Rank) 별로 Rmax를 독립적으로 설정할 수 있다. 여기서, ‘독립’은 관계가 없는 경우도 포함되며, 상이한 값인 경우에도 적용될 수 있다.(2) Rmax can be set independently for each rank. Here, the term 'independence' includes a case where there is no relation and may be applied to a case where the value is different.
A. MPDCCH에서 스케줄(schedule) 받은 PDSCH의 랭크에 따라서 PDSCH Rmax 변경될 수 있으며, 해당 Rmax는 기존에 설정(Rank 1을 기준으로)된 PDSCH Rmax를 기준으로 스케일(scale) 되거나 또는 랭크 2를 위해서 미리 설정된 값일 수 있다.A. The PDSCH Rmax may be changed according to the rank of the PDSCH scheduled in the MPDCCH, and the corresponding Rmax may be scaled based on the previously set PDSCH Rmax (based on Rank 1) or for rank 2 It may be a preset value.
B. 단말기가 앞서 보고한 랭크에 따라서 PDSCH Rmax 변경될 수 있으며, 해당 Rmax는 기존에 설정(Rank 1을 기준으로)된 PDSCH Rmax를 기준으로 스케일 되거나 또는 랭크 2를 위해서 미리 설정된 값일 수 있다.B. The PDSCH Rmax may be changed according to the rank previously reported by the UE, and the corresponding Rmax may be scaled based on a previously set PDSCH Rmax (based on Rank 1) or may be a preset value for rank 2.
(3) 단말기는 앞서 보고한 CSI 정보(예를 들어, RI, PMI, CQI 정보 등) 그리고/또는 앞서 스케줄 받은 PDSCH 정보(예를 들어, RI, TM 등)에 따라서 MPDCCH 그리고/또는 PDSCH 자원 관련 정보(예를 들어, Rmax, DCI 포맷/사이즈, DCI 필드(field) 구성, TM 등)를 달리 기대할 수 있다.(3) The terminal may relate to the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH resources according to previously reported CSI information (eg, RI, PMI, CQI information, etc.) and / or previously scheduled PDSCH information (eg, RI, TM, etc.). Information (eg, Rmax, DCI format / size, DCI field configuration, TM, etc.) can be expected differently.
(4) 상기 제안에서 새롭게 기대하는 Rmax 값은 실제 Rmax 값이 바뀌는 것 외에도, Rmax에 따라서 DCI에서 기대할 수 있는 실제 반복 횟수(repetition number)의 구성 및 상태(state) 해석을 달리 하는 방법도 적용될 수 있다.(4) In addition to changing the actual Rmax value, the newly expected Rmax value in the proposal may also be applied to a method of changing the configuration and state interpretation of the actual repetition number that can be expected in the DCI according to Rmax. have.
H.8H.8 단말기의 수신 모드 요청Receive mode request of terminal
Non-BL UE는 CE 모드(CE mode)에서 동작하는 경우에, 자신의 수신 모드(예를 들어, 수신 안테나 수, 수신 대역폭, 수신기법 등)를 직접 기지국에게 요청하거나, 또는 기지국으로부터 수신 모드를 지시 받을 수 있다. 이는 꼭 non-BL UE에게만 해당하는 것은 아니며, 단말기가 해당 시스템에서 요구하는 최소의 수신 모드 이상을 지원하는 경우(즉, 최소의 수신 모드 구현/동작 보다 일반적으로 더 복잡하다고 여겨지는 구현/동작)에도 동일하게 적용될 수 있다.When the non-BL UE operates in the CE mode, it requests the base station directly for its reception mode (for example, the number of reception antennas, the reception bandwidth, the receiver method, etc.) or the reception mode from the base station. You can be directed. This is not necessarily the case for non-BL UEs only, and if the terminal supports more than the minimum reception mode required by the system (ie implementation / operation that is generally considered more complex than minimum reception mode implementation / operation). The same can be applied to.
(1) 단말기가 RRC 연결 모드(RRC connected mode)에서 유휴 모드(idle mode)로 진입하는 과정에서 수신 모드 요청 및 설정(1) Request and configuration of a reception mode in a process in which the terminal enters an idle mode from an RRC connected mode
단말기는 RRC 유휴 모드(RRC Idle mode)로 진입하는 과정에서, RRC 연결 모드에서 동작하던 수신 모드와 다른 모드로 RRC 유휴 모드에서 송/수신을 하겠다는 요청을 기지국에게 할 수 있으며, 기지국은 이를 수락하는 경우에 단말기의 수신 모드를 고려한 송/수신 관련 파라메터를 설정할 수 있다. 이는 특히 RRC 연결 모드에서 동작하던 수신기 모드보다 하향링크 수신 성능 열화가 발생할 것으로 예상되는 수신 모드(예를 들어, 수신 안테나 수 그리고/또는 수신 대역폭을 줄이는 경우)로 동작을 원하는 경우에, 반드시 이와 같은 요청 및 수락 절차를 거칠 필요가 있다. 만약, 요청이 수락되는 경우에는 RRC 유휴 모드에서 필요한 송/수신 관련 파라메터를 직접 지시하지 않고, 수신 모드 변경 전/후의 성능 차이로부터 간접적으로 파라메터를 설정 받을 수도 있다. 예를 들어, 2개의 수신 안테나로 동작하다가 RRC 유휴 모드에서 1개의 수신 안테나로 동작하는 경우, 수신 성능 3dB 열화를 가정하여 페이징 채널(paging channel) 최대 반복 전송 횟수를 2배 큰 값으로 해석하도록 허용될 수도 있다.In the process of entering the RRC idle mode, the terminal may make a request to the base station to transmit / receive in the RRC idle mode in a mode different from the reception mode operating in the RRC connected mode, and the base station accepts the request. In this case, parameters related to the reception mode of the terminal may be set. This is especially true if you want to operate in a receive mode where the downlink receive performance degradation is expected to occur (eg, when the number of receive antennas and / or receive bandwidth is reduced) rather than the receiver mode that was operating in the RRC connected mode. You need to go through the request and acceptance process. If the request is accepted, the parameters may be indirectly set from the performance difference before / after the reception mode change without directly indicating the transmission / reception related parameters required in the RRC idle mode. For example, when operating with two receive antennas and then with one receive antenna in RRC idle mode, the maximum number of repetitive transmissions of a paging channel can be interpreted as twice as large, assuming a 3dB degradation in reception performance. May be
(2) 단말기가 RRC 유휴 모드에서 연결 모드(connected mode)로 진입하는 과정에서 수신 모드 요청 및 설정(2) Request and configuration of a reception mode while the terminal enters a connected mode from an RRC idle mode
RRC 유휴 모드에서 연결 모드로 진입 하는 경우에, 단말기는 상기 수신 모드 관련 정보를 초기 랜덤 접속(initial random access) 과정에서 기지국에 보고하거나 수신 모드 변경을 요청할 수 있다. 다만, 관련 요청이 수락되기 전까지 또는 RRC 연결 모드로 진입(예를 들어, UE 특정 RRC 구성(UE specific RRC configuration) 정보를 받거나 또는 이를 수신하고 ACK(Acknowledgement)을 보고하는 단계)하기 전까지는 수신 모드를 변경하지 않고 유지 할 수 있다.When entering the connected mode from the RRC idle mode, the terminal may report the reception mode related information to the base station or request to change the reception mode in the initial random access (initial random access) process. However, until the related request is accepted or until entering the RRC connection mode (for example, receiving or receiving UE specific RRC configuration information or reporting it and reporting an acknowledgment). You can keep it unchanged.
(3) RRC 연결 모드(RRC connected mode)에서 수신 모드 요청 및 설정(3) Request and set receive mode in RRC connected mode
단말기의 수신 모드 변경은 기지국의 전송 모드(transmission mode) 변경 또는 랭크(rank) 변경 등으로 간접적으로 지시 받을 수도 있다. 또한, 단말기가 수신 모드 변경을 요청하는 방법은 직접적으로 관련 요청을 메시지(message)로 하는 것 이외에 CSI 보고 과정에서 랭크를 변경하는 방법으로도 가능하다. 이때, 수신 요청 변경을 수락하는 방법은 기지국이 해당 랭크에 상응하는 전송 모드로 변경하거나 또는 해당 랭크에 상응하는 하향링크 스케줄(downlink schedule)을 통하는 간접적인 방법이 있을 수 있다.The change of the reception mode of the terminal may be indirectly indicated by the transmission mode change or the rank change of the base station. In addition, the method of requesting the terminal to change the reception mode may be a method of changing the rank in the CSI reporting process in addition to directly making a related request as a message. In this case, the method of accepting the change of the reception request may be an indirect method through which the base station changes to a transmission mode corresponding to the rank or through a downlink schedule corresponding to the rank.
H.9H.9 CE 모드(CE mode) 동작하는 Non-BL UE를 위한 CSI-RS 설정(CSI-RS Configuration)CSI-RS Configuration for Non-BL UEs operating in CE Mode
CE 모드로 동작하는 non-BL UE는 기본적으로 MTC 단말기(BL/CE UE)와 동일한 구조의 채널을 송/수신한다. 따라서, 기존 MTC 단말기들과 역호환성(backward compatibility)가 중요한 고려 요소 중에 하나이며, 이를 위해서는 CSI-RS 설정 방법이 기존 LTE와 다를 수 있다. 예를 들어, non-BL UE가 참고하는 CSI-RS는 이미 LTE 단말기들을 위해서 셀(cell) 내에서 전송되는 있는 신호일 수 있으며, non-BL UE는 단지 전송되고 있는 CSI-RS에 대한 설정을 이해할 수 있도록, 추가적인 설정(configuration)을 수신 받을 수 있을 뿐 일 수도 있다. 여기서 CSI-RS는 CSI 측정(measurement)를 위한 용도 뿐만 아니라, LTE 단말기들을 위해서 CSI-RS가 전송되고 있으니, 해당 RE(Resource Element)를 MPDCCH/PDSCH 디코딩(decoding) 시에 무시하거나 할 수 있도록 참고 설정 값일 수 있다.The non-BL UE operating in the CE mode basically transmits / receives a channel having the same structure as that of the MTC terminal (BL / CE UE). Therefore, backward compatibility with existing MTC terminals is one of important considerations, and for this purpose, the CSI-RS configuration method may be different from that of the existing LTE. For example, the CSI-RS referenced by a non-BL UE may be a signal that is already transmitted in a cell for LTE terminals, and the non-BL UE may only understand the configuration for the CSI-RS being transmitted. In order to be able to receive the additional configuration, only the configuration may be received. Here, the CSI-RS is not only used for CSI measurement, but also CSI-RS is transmitted for LTE terminals, so that the corresponding RE (Resource Element) can be ignored during MPDCCH / PDSCH decoding. It may be a setting value.
또한, 셀 공통(Cell common) 또는 CE 레벨 공통(CE level common) 또는 CE 모드 공통(CE mode common)으로 둘 이상의 복수 단말기들이 해당 정보를 모두 수신할 수 있도록 설정될 수 있다. 이는 CSI-RS를 기반으로 CSI 측정을 직접 수행하지 않는 단말기에 대해서도 특정 PDSCH에서는 CSI-RS로 사용되는 RE를 제외한 RE에 PDSCH가 레이트 매칭 적용될 수 있도록 하기 위함일 수 있다.Also, two or more terminals may be configured to receive all corresponding information in a cell common, a CE level common, or a CE mode common. This may be for the PDSCH to be rate matched to the RE except the RE used as the CSI-RS in a specific PDSCH, even for a terminal that does not directly perform CSI measurement based on the CSI-RS.
만약, CSI-RS 기반의 CSI 측정을 필요로 하는 경우에는, PDSCH 스케줄링(scheduling)이 특정 조건으로 한정된 경우에만 CSI-RS가 전송된다고 설정 받거나 정의될 수도 있다. 이는 일반적으로 CSI-RS 기반의 CSI 측정은 상당히 높은 SNR(Signal-to-Noise Ratio)을 요구할 수 있기 때문일 수 있다. 여기서 특정 조건은 높은 SNR 구간을 간접적으로 대표하는 상황을 의미하며, 예를 들어, CE 모드 A이거나, 또는 CE 레벨 0 또는 1이거나, 또는 64QAM 스케줄링이 설정된 경우거나, 또는 랭크 2 이상이 설정된 경우 이거나, 또는 앞서 스케줄링 받은 PDSCH의 변조 차수(modulation order) 또는 코드 레이트(code rate) 등이 특정 값 이상으로 N회 이상 있었으며, 해당 구간에서 ACK 비율이 특정 값보다 높았던 경우로 한정될 수도 있다.If CSI-RS based CSI measurement is required, the CSI-RS may be set or defined to be transmitted only when PDSCH scheduling is limited to a specific condition. This may be because, in general, CSI-RS based CSI measurement may require a considerably higher signal-to-noise ratio (SNR). Herein, the specific condition means a situation in which the high SNR interval is indirectly represented, for example, CE mode A, CE level 0 or 1, 64QAM scheduling is set, or rank 2 or more is set. Alternatively, the PDSCH may be limited to a case where a modulation order or code rate of the PDSCH previously scheduled has been N or more times above a specific value and the ACK rate is higher than a specific value in a corresponding section.
H.10H.10 랭크(Rank) 2 이상의 하향링크 전송 Downlink transmission of rank 2 or higher
CE 모드(CE mode)로 동작하는 non-BL UE는 해당 단말기의 안테나 수 등의 능력(capability)에 따라서 랭크 2 이상의 PDSCH를 수신할 수도 있다. 이런 경우에, 랭크 적응(rank adaptation) 및 TM 적응(TM(Transmission Mode) adaptation)이 요구될 수도 있다. 특히 TM 적응인 경우에, LTE에서는 단말기가 (반-)정적((semi-)static)하게 설정 받은 TM이 있더라도, TM1 또는 TM2에서 기본 전송 모드(TM2인 경우에 SFBC(Space Frequency Block Coding) 또는 FSTD(Frequency Shift Transmit Diversity))로 폴백 스케줄링(fallback scheduling)을 할 수 있도록 폴백 DCI (예를 들어, DCI 포맷 1A)를 단말기가 항상 블라인드 검출(blind detection) 하도록 요구되었다. 그러나, MTC에서는 설정된 TM에 따라서 특정 시점에는 하나의 DCI 포맷만 블라인드 검출하기 때문에, 폴백 TM을 동적(dynamic)하게 사용할 수 없는 단점이 있다. 이러한 점을 보완하기 위해서 아래와 같은 방법을 제안한다.A non-BL UE operating in a CE mode may receive a PDSCH of rank 2 or higher according to a capability such as the number of antennas of a corresponding UE. In this case, rank adaptation and Transmission Mode (TM) adaptation may be required. Particularly in the case of TM adaptation, even though the terminal has a (semi-) statically configured TM in LTE, the Space Transmission Block Coding (SFBC) or the default transmission mode in TM1 or TM2 (TM2) In order to perform fallback scheduling with FSTD (Frequency Shift Transmit Diversity), it is required for a terminal to always detect a fallback DCI (eg, DCI format 1A). However, since the MTC detects only one DCI format blindly at a specific time according to the set TM, the fallback TM cannot be used dynamically. To compensate for this, the following method is proposed.
● 랭크(Rank) 2를 지원하는 DCI 정보에 폴백 TM 및/또는 랭크를 지시하는 정보가 포함될 수 있다. 이는 DCI 내에서 폴백 플래그(fallback flag)와 같은 필드(field)로 정의되어 추가되는 형태일 수 있다. 또는, 랭크 2에 해당하는 TM을 설정 받거나 랭크 2를 위한 DCI를 모니터링(monitoring) 하도록 설정된 CE 모드 non-BL UE 단말이 적어도 특정 시점에서는 랭크 2 DCI와 폴백 DCI (랭크 1 이거나 또는 TM1/TM2를 스케줄링 하는 DCI)를 모두 블라인드 검출 시도하도록 요구될 수도 있다. 여기서, 폴백은 DCI에서 스케줄링된 PDSCH 구간까지만 유효한 정보 일 수 있으며, 독립된 MPDCCH는 이와 무관할 수도 잇다.DCI information supporting rank 2 may include information indicating a fallback TM and / or rank. This may be a form defined and added to a field such as a fallback flag in the DCI. Alternatively, the CE mode non-BL UE terminal configured to receive the TM corresponding to the rank 2 or to monitor the DCI for the rank 2 may perform the rank 2 DCI and the fallback DCI (rank 1 or TM1 / TM2 at least at a specific time). All of the scheduling DCIs) may be required to attempt blind detection. Here, the fallback may be valid information only up to the PDSCH interval scheduled in the DCI, and the independent MPDCCH may be irrelevant thereto.
랭크 2를 지원하거나 랭크 2 기반의 CSI(CQI 및/또는 PMI)를 보고하는 경우에, CSI 참조 자원(CSI reference resource)에 사용되는 RCSI 값이 추가적으로 정의될 수도 있다. 이는 기존 BL/CE UE를 위해서 정의된 RCSI(csi-NumRepetitionCE이며, 관련 내용은 TS36.213의 7.2.3절)로부터 유도되는 값이거나 또는 추가로 설정되는 값일 수 있다. 이는, 랭크 2 기반의 PDSCH는 일반적으로 높은 SNR(high SNR) 영역에서 사용되기 때문에, CSI 참조 자원에 포함되거나 또는 CSI가 대표하는 PDSCH 성능의 기준 반복 전송 횟수가 기존 값 보다 낮을 수 있기 때문이다.When supporting rank 2 or reporting rank 2 based CSI (CQI and / or PMI), an RCSI value used for a CSI reference resource may be further defined. This may be a value derived from RCSI (csi-NumRepetitionCE) defined for the existing BL / CE UE, and the related information may be a value derived from or additionally set. This is because the rank 2 based PDSCH is generally used in a high SNR region, and thus, the number of reference repetitive transmissions of the PDSCH performance included in the CSI reference resource or represented by the CSI may be lower than the existing value.
또한, MTC는 반복 전송을 특징으로 하는 시스템이기 때문에 랭크 2 기반의 PDSCH 역시 반복 전송이 적용될 수 있다. 이런 경우에, 반복 전송되는 PDSCH는 특정 서브프레임 단위로 코드워드-레이어 매핑(codeword-to-layer mapping) 관계 및/또는 레이어-안테나 포트 매핑(layer-to-antenna port mapping) 관계가 변경될 수 있다. 이는 주파수 호핑(frequency hopping) 여부에 따라서 달라질 수도 있다. 여기서, 특정 서브프레임 단위는 RV(Redundancy Version) 또는 주파수 호핑 간격(frequency hopping interval) (주파수 도메인(frequency domain)에서 동일한 NB(narrowband)에 연속 전송되는 서브프레임 수 또는 이에 상응하는 서브프레임 수) 단위의 정수 배일 수 있다. 여기서 매핑 규칙(mapping rule)은 순열(permutation)으로도 표현될 수 있으며, MIMO 레이어(layer) 간에 공간 다이버시티 이득(spatial diversity gain)을 획득하기 위한 목적으로 적용될 수 있다.In addition, since MTC is a system characterized by repetitive transmission, rank 2 based PDSCH may also be applied to repetitive transmission. In this case, the repeated repeated PDSCH may change the codeword-to-layer mapping relationship and / or the layer-to-antenna port mapping relationship on a specific subframe basis. have. This may vary depending on whether or not frequency hopping. In this case, the specific subframe unit is a unit of a redundancy version (RV) or a frequency hopping interval (number of subframes or corresponding subframes consecutively transmitted in the same narrowband in the frequency domain). It may be an integer multiple of. The mapping rule may also be expressed as a permutation, and may be applied for the purpose of obtaining spatial diversity gain between MIMO layers.
랭크 2 이상을 지원하는 경우에, 하향링크 공유 채널(downlink shared channel)을 스케줄링 하는 DCI(DL grant)에 RI(Rank Indicator, Rank 수를 지시하기 위한 용도) 필드(field)가 존재할 수 있으며, 해당 필드의 값에 따라서 해당 DCI 내의 특정 필드의 해석이 달라질 수 있다. 예를 들어, TBS(Transport Block Size)와 MCS(Modulation and Coding Scheme)가 있을 수 있으며, 이는 공간 다중화(spatial multiplexing)을 지원하는 경우에 SNR과 데이터 레이트(data rate)이 높을 수 있기 때문에 상대적으로 낮은 TBS나 MCS는 불필요하기 때문일 수 있으며, 해당 필드를 재해석함으로써 DCI 사이즈(size) 증가를 최소화하기 위한 목적일 수 있다. 예를 들어, TBS와 MCS는 새로운 값들로 정의될 수도 있으며, 또는 특정 상태(state)를 사용하지 않는(예를 들어, 낮은 범위의 값) 경우에 해당 상태 또는 비트(bit) 일부는 다른 용도로 재해석 될 수 있다. 또한, 특정 필드는 RI 값이 1이 아닌 경우에 다른 용도로 활용될 수 있으며, 예를 들어 주파수 호핑의 온/오프(on/off)를 나타내기 위한 필드가 항상 오프로 해석되고, 해당 필드는 다른 용도로 활용될 수 있다.In the case of supporting rank 2 or more, a RI (Rank Indicator, Field for indicating Rank) field may exist in a DL grant that schedules a downlink shared channel. The interpretation of a specific field in the corresponding DCI may vary depending on the value of the field. For example, there may be a Transport Block Size (TBS) and a Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS), which may be relatively high because SNR and data rate may be high when spatial multiplexing is supported. This may be because a low TBS or MCS is unnecessary and may be aimed at minimizing the increase in DCI size by reinterpreting the field. For example, TBS and MCS may be defined with new values, or some of the states or bits may be used for other purposes if they do not use a particular state (for example, a lower range of values). Can be reinterpreted. In addition, a specific field may be utilized for other purposes when the RI value is not 1, for example, a field for indicating on / off of frequency hopping is always interpreted as off, and the field is It can be used for other purposes.
H.11H.11 수신 모드에 따른 파라메터 재설정 Parameter reset according to receive mode
Non-BL UE가 CE 모드(CE mode)에 동작 시에 노멀 모드(normal mode)에서 사용할 수 있는 일부 수신 기능을 CE 모드에서도 동작할 수 있다고 또는 동작하겠다고 기지국에 보고하는 경우에, 기지국은 해당 단말기에게 MPDCCH 및/또는 PDSCH의 최대 반복 전송 횟수 그리고/도는 최대 반복 전송에 대해서 DCI로 지시할 수 있는 실제 최대 반복 전송 횟수를 별개로 추가 또는 재설정할 수 있다. 이는, 예를 들어, MRC, MMSE-IRC, eMMSE-IRC, ML, CRS-IC, NAICS(Network-Assisted Interference Cancellation and Suppression), ISIC(Inter-Stream Interference Cancellation)와 같은 수신 기법은 수신 성능을 향상 시킬 수 있기 때문에, 기존에 정의된 CE 모드 A와 B에서의 일부 파라메터(예를 들어, MPDCCH 및/또는 PDSCH의 최대 반복 전송 횟수 그리고/도는 최대 반복 전송에 대해서 DCI로 지시할 수 있는 실제 최대 반복 전송 횟수)가 적합하지 않거나 해당 수신 기법을 지원하는 경우의 수신 성능에 비해서 과도하게 큰 값일 수 있기 때문이다.When the non-BL UE operates in the CE mode and reports to the base station that some reception functions that can be used in the normal mode may or may be operated in the CE mode, the base station reports the terminal. The maximum number of repetitive transmissions and / or the maximum number of repetitive transmissions of the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH may be separately added or reconfigured. For example, reception techniques such as MRC, MMSE-IRC, eMMSE-IRC, ML, CRS-IC, Network-Assisted Interference Cancellation and Suppression (NAICS), and Inter-Stream Interference Cancellation (ISIC) improve reception performance. Some parameters in the previously defined CE modes A and B (e.g., the maximum number of repetitive transmissions and / or the MPDCCH and / or PDSCH are actual maximum repetitions that can be indicated by DCI for the maximum repetitive transmission). This is because the number of transmissions) may not be appropriate or may be excessively large compared to the reception performance when the reception scheme is supported.
H.12H.12 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 장치Wireless communication device to which the present invention can be applied
이로 제한되는 것은 아니지만, 본 문서에 개시된 본 발명의 다양한 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들은 기기들간에 무선 통신/연결(예, 5G)을 필요로 하는 다양한 분야에 적용될 수 있다.Although not limited thereto, the various descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and / or operational flowcharts of the present invention disclosed herein may be applied to various fields requiring wireless communication / connection (eg, 5G) between devices. have.
이하, 도면을 참조하여 보다 구체적으로 예시한다. 이하의 도면/설명에서 동일한 도면 부호는 다르게 기술하지 않는 한, 동일하거나 대응되는 하드웨어 블록, 소프트웨어 블록 또는 기능 블록을 예시할 수 있다.Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings to illustrate in more detail. The same reference numerals in the following drawings / descriptions may illustrate the same or corresponding hardware blocks, software blocks, or functional blocks unless otherwise indicated.
도 24는 본 명세서에서 제안하는 방법들이 적용될 수 있는 무선 통신 장치의 블록 구성도를 예시한다.24 illustrates a block diagram of a wireless communication device to which the methods proposed herein can be applied.
도 24를 참조하면, 무선 통신 시스템은 기지국(2410)과 기지국 영역 내에 위치한 다수의 단말(2420)을 포함한다. 기지국은 송신 장치로, 단말은 수신 장치로 표현될 수 있으며, 그 반대도 가능하다. 기지국과 단말은 프로세서(processor, 2411,2421), 메모리(memory, 2414,2424), 하나 이상의 전송(Tx)/수신(Rx) RF 모듈(radio frequency module, 2415,2425)(또는 RF transceiver), Tx 프로세서(2412,2422), Rx 프로세서(2413,2423), 안테나(2416,2426)를 포함한다. 프로세서는 앞서 살핀 기능, 과정 및/또는 방법을 구현한다. 보다 구체적으로, 하향링크(DL)(기지국에서 단말로의 통신)에서, 코어 네트워크로부터의 상위 계층 패킷은 프로세서(2411)에 제공된다. 프로세서는 L2 계층의 기능을 구현한다. 하향링크(DL)에서, 프로세서는 논리 채널과 전송 채널 간의 다중화(multiplexing), 무선 자원 할당을 단말(2420)에 제공하며, 단말로의 시그널링을 담당한다. 전송(TX) 프로세서(2412)는 L1 계층 (즉, 물리 계층)에 대한 다양한 신호 처리 기능을 구현한다. 신호 처리 기능은 단말에서 FEC(forward error correction)을 용이하게 하고, 코딩 및 인터리빙(coding and interleaving)을 포함한다. 부호화 및 변조된 심볼은 병렬 스트림으로 분할되고, 각각의 스트림은 OFDM 부반송파에 매핑되고, 시간 및/또는 주파수 영역에서 기준 신호(Reference Signal, RS)와 멀티플렉싱되며, IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform)를 사용하여 함께 결합되어 시간 영역 OFDMA 심볼 스트림을 운반하는 물리적 채널을 생성한다. OFDM 스트림은 다중 공간 스트림을 생성하기 위해 공간적으로 프리코딩된다. 각각의 공간 스트림은 개별 Tx/Rx 모듈(또는 송수신기(transceiver), 2415)를 통해 상이한 안테나(2416)에 제공될 수 있다. 각각의 Tx/Rx 모듈은 전송을 위해 각각의 공간 스트림으로 RF 반송파를 변조할 수 있다. 단말에서, 각각의 Tx/Rx 모듈(또는 송수신기, 2425)는 각 Tx/Rx 모듈의 각 안테나(2426)을 통해 신호를 수신한다. 각각의 Tx/Rx 모듈은 RF 캐리어로 변조된 정보를 복원하여, 수신(RX) 프로세서(2423)에 제공한다. RX 프로세서는 layer 1의 다양한 신호 프로세싱 기능을 구현한다. RX 프로세서는 단말로 향하는 임의의 공간 스트림을 복구하기 위해 정보에 공간 프로세싱을 수행할 수 있다. 만약 다수의 공간 스트림들이 단말로 향하는 경우, 다수의 RX 프로세서들에 의해 단일 OFDMA 심볼 스트림으로 결합될 수 있다. RX 프로세서는 고속 푸리에 변환 (FFT)을 사용하여 OFDMA 심볼 스트림을 시간 영역에서 주파수 영역으로 변환한다. 주파수 영역 신호는 OFDM 신호의 각각의 서브 캐리어에 대한 개별적인 OFDMA 심볼 스트림을 포함한다. 각각의 서브캐리어 상의 심볼들 및 기준 신호는 기지국에 의해 전송된 가장 가능성 있는 신호 배치 포인트들을 결정함으로써 복원되고 복조된다. 이러한 연 판정(soft decision)들은 채널 추정 값들에 기초할 수 있다. 연판정들은 물리 채널 상에서 기지국에 의해 원래 전송된 데이터 및 제어 신호를 복원하기 위해 디코딩 및 디인터리빙되다. 해당 데이터 및 제어 신호는 프로세서(2421)에 제공된다.Referring to FIG. 24, a wireless communication system includes a base station 2410 and a plurality of terminals 2420 located in a base station area. The base station may be represented by a transmitting device, the terminal may be represented by a receiving device, and vice versa. The base station and the terminal are a processor (processor, 2411, 2421), memory (memory, 2414, 2424), one or more transmit (Tx) / receive (Rx) radio frequency module (2415, 2425) (or RF transceiver), Tx processors 2412 and 2422, Rx processors 2413 and 2423 and antennas 2416 and 2426. The processor implements the salping functions, processes and / or methods above. More specifically, in downlink DL (communication from the base station to the terminal), upper layer packets from the core network are provided to the processor 2411. The processor implements the functionality of the L2 layer. In downlink DL, a processor provides multiplexing and radio resource allocation between a logical channel and a transport channel to a terminal 2420 and is responsible for signaling to the terminal. The transmit (TX) processor 2412 implements various signal processing functions for the L1 layer (ie, the physical layer). The signal processing function facilitates forward error correction (FEC) in the terminal and includes coding and interleaving. The encoded and modulated symbols are divided into parallel streams, each stream mapped to an OFDM subcarrier, multiplexed with a reference signal (RS) in the time and / or frequency domain, and using an Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT). To be combined together to create a physical channel carrying a time-domain OFDMA symbol stream. The OFDM stream is spatially precoded to produce multiple spatial streams. Each spatial stream may be provided to a different antenna 2416 through separate Tx / Rx modules (or transceivers 2415). Each Tx / Rx module can modulate an RF carrier with each spatial stream for transmission. At the terminal, each Tx / Rx module (or transceiver 2425) receives a signal through each antenna 2426 of each Tx / Rx module. Each Tx / Rx module recovers information modulated onto an RF carrier and provides it to a receive (RX) processor 2423. The RX processor implements the various signal processing functions of layer 1. The RX processor may perform spatial processing on the information to recover any spatial stream destined for the terminal. If multiple spatial streams are directed to the terminal, it may be combined into a single OFDMA symbol stream by multiple RX processors. The RX processor uses fast Fourier transform (FFT) to convert the OFDMA symbol stream from the time domain to the frequency domain. The frequency domain signal includes a separate OFDMA symbol stream for each subcarrier of the OFDM signal. The symbols and reference signal on each subcarrier are recovered and demodulated by determining the most likely signal placement points sent by the base station. Such soft decisions may be based on channel estimate values. Soft decisions are decoded and deinterleaved to recover the data and control signals originally transmitted by the base station on the physical channel. The corresponding data and control signals are provided to the processor 2421.
상향링크(UL)(단말에서 기지국으로의 통신)은 단말(2420)에서 수신기 기능과 관련하여 기술된 것과 유사한 방식으로 기지국(2410)에서 처리된다. 각각의 Tx/Rx 모듈(또는 송수신기(transceiver), 2425)는 각각의 안테나(2426)을 통해 신호를 수신한다. 각각의 Tx/Rx 모듈은 RF 반송파 및 정보를 RX 프로세서(2423)에 제공한다. 프로세서(2421)는 프로그램 코드 및 데이터를 저장하는 메모리(2424)와 관련될 수 있다. 메모리는 컴퓨터 판독 가능 매체로서 지칭될 수 있다.UL (communication from terminal to base station) is processed at base station 2410 in a manner similar to that described with respect to receiver functionality at terminal 2420. Each Tx / Rx module (or transceiver) 2425 receives a signal through each antenna 2426. Each Tx / Rx module provides an RF carrier and information to the RX processor 2423. Processor 2421 may be associated with memory 2424 that stores program code and data. The memory may be referred to as a computer readable medium.
본 발명의 제안은 상기 도 24에서 설명한 무선 통신 장치인 기지국(2410) 및 단말(2420)에 의해서 수행될 수 있다.The proposal of the present invention may be performed by the base station 2410 and the terminal 2420 which are the wireless communication apparatus described with reference to FIG.
도 25는 본 발명에 적용되는 통신 시스템(1)을 예시한다.25 illustrates a communication system 1 applied to the present invention.
도 25를 참조하면, 본 발명에 적용되는 통신 시스템(1)은 무선 기기, 기지국 및 네트워크를 포함한다. 여기서, 무선 기기는 무선 접속 기술(예, 5G NR(New RAT), LTE(Long Term Evolution))을 이용하여 통신을 수행하는 기기를 의미하며, 통신/무선/5G 기기로 지칭될 수 있다. 이로 제한되는 것은 아니지만, 무선 기기는 로봇(100a), 차량(100b-1, 100b-2), XR(eXtended Reality) 기기(100c), 휴대 기기(Hand-held device)(100d), 가전(100e), IoT(Internet of Thing) 기기(100f), AI기기/서버(400)를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 차량은 무선 통신 기능이 구비된 차량, 자율 주행 차량, 차량간 통신을 수행할 수 있는 차량 등을 포함할 수 있다. 여기서, 차량은 UAV(Unmanned Aerial Vehicle)(예, 드론)를 포함할 수 있다. XR 기기는 AR(Augmented Reality)/VR(Virtual Reality)/MR(Mixed Reality) 기기를 포함하며, HMD(Head-Mounted Device), 차량에 구비된 HUD(Head-Up Display), 텔레비전, 스마트폰, 컴퓨터, 웨어러블 디바이스, 가전 기기, 디지털 사이니지(signage), 차량, 로봇 등의 형태로 구현될 수 있다. 휴대 기기는 스마트폰, 스마트패드, 웨어러블 기기(예, 스마트워치, 스마트글래스), 컴퓨터(예, 노트북 등) 등을 포함할 수 있다. 가전은 TV, 냉장고, 세탁기 등을 포함할 수 있다. IoT 기기는 센서, 스마트미터 등을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 기지국, 네트워크는 무선 기기로도 구현될 수 있으며, 특정 무선 기기(200a)는 다른 무선 기기에게 기지국/네트워크 노드로 동작할 수도 있다.Referring to Fig. 25, a communication system 1 applied to the present invention includes a wireless device, a base station and a network. Here, the wireless device refers to a device that performs communication using a radio access technology (eg, 5G New RAT (Long Term), Long Term Evolution (LTE)), and may be referred to as a communication / wireless / 5G device. Although not limited thereto, the wireless device may be a robot 100a, a vehicle 100b-1, 100b-2, an eXtended Reality (XR) device 100c, a hand-held device 100d, a home appliance 100e. ), IoT (Internet of Thing) device (100f), AI device / server 400 may be included. For example, the vehicle may include a vehicle having a wireless communication function, an autonomous vehicle, a vehicle capable of performing inter-vehicle communication, and the like. Here, the vehicle may include an unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) (eg, a drone). XR devices include AR (Augmented Reality) / VR (Virtual Reality) / MR (Mixed Reality) devices, Head-Mounted Device (HMD), Head-Up Display (HUD), television, smartphone, It may be implemented in the form of a computer, a wearable device, a home appliance, a digital signage, a vehicle, a robot, and the like. The portable device may include a smartphone, a smart pad, a wearable device (eg, smart watch, smart glasses), a computer (eg, a notebook, etc.). The home appliance may include a TV, a refrigerator, a washing machine, and the like. IoT devices may include sensors, smart meters, and the like. For example, the base station and the network may be implemented as a wireless device, and the specific wireless device 200a may operate as a base station / network node to other wireless devices.
무선 기기(100a~100f)는 기지국(200)을 통해 네트워크(300)와 연결될 수 있다. 무선 기기(100a~100f)에는 AI(Artificial Intelligence) 기술이 적용될 수 있으며, 무선 기기(100a~100f)는 네트워크(300)를 통해 AI 서버(400)와 연결될 수 있다. 네트워크(300)는 3G 네트워크, 4G(예, LTE) 네트워크 또는 5G(예, NR) 네트워크 등을 이용하여 구성될 수 있다. 무선 기기(100a~100f)는 기지국(200)/네트워크(300)를 통해 서로 통신할 수도 있지만, 기지국/네트워크를 통하지 않고 직접 통신(e.g. 사이드링크 통신(sidelink communication))할 수도 있다. 예를 들어, 차량들(100b-1, 100b-2)은 직접 통신(e.g. V2V(Vehicle to Vehicle)/V2X(Vehicle to everything) communication)을 할 수 있다. 또한, IoT 기기(예, 센서)는 다른 IoT 기기(예, 센서) 또는 다른 무선 기기(100a~100f)와 직접 통신을 할 수 있다.The wireless devices 100a to 100f may be connected to the network 300 through the base station 200. AI (Artificial Intelligence) technology may be applied to the wireless devices 100a to 100f, and the wireless devices 100a to 100f may be connected to the AI server 400 through the network 300. The network 300 may be configured using a 3G network, a 4G (eg LTE) network or a 5G (eg NR) network. The wireless devices 100a-100f may communicate with each other via the base station 200 / network 300, but may also communicate directly (e.g. sidelink communication) without going through the base station / network. For example, the vehicles 100b-1 and 100b-2 may perform direct communication (e.g. vehicle to vehicle (V2V) / vehicle to everything (V2X) communication). In addition, the IoT device (eg, sensor) may directly communicate with another IoT device (eg, sensor) or another wireless device 100a to 100f.
무선 기기(100a~100f)/기지국(200), 기지국(200)/기지국(200) 간에는 무선 통신/연결(150a, 150b, 150c)이 이뤄질 수 있다. 여기서, 무선 통신/연결은 상향/하향링크 통신(150a)과 사이드링크 통신(150b)(또는, D2D 통신), 기지국간 통신(150c)(e.g. relay, IAB(Integrated Access Backhaul)과 같은 다양한 무선 접속 기술(예, 5G NR)을 통해 이뤄질 수 있다. 무선 통신/연결(150a, 150b, 150c)을 통해 무선 기기와 기지국/무선 기기, 기지국과 기지국은 서로 무선 신호를 송신/수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 무선 통신/연결(150a, 150b, 150c)은 다양한 물리 채널을 통해 신호를 송신/수신할 수 있다. 이를 위해, 본 발명의 다양한 제안들에 기반하여, 무선 신호의 송신/수신을 위한 다양한 구성정보 설정 과정, 다양한 신호 처리 과정(예, 채널 인코딩/디코딩, 변조/복조, 자원 매핑/디매핑 등), 자원 할당 과정 등 중 적어도 일부가 수행될 수 있다.Wireless communication / connection 150a, 150b, 150c may be performed between the wireless devices 100a-100f / base station 200 and base station 200 / base station 200. Here, the wireless communication / connection is various wireless connections such as uplink / downlink communication 150a, sidelink communication 150b (or D2D communication), inter-base station communication 150c (eg relay, integrated access backhaul), and the like. Technology (eg, 5G NR) via wireless communication / connections 150a, 150b, 150c, the wireless device and the base station / wireless device, the base station and the base station may transmit / receive radio signals to each other. For example, the wireless communication / connection 150a, 150b, 150c may transmit / receive signals over various physical channels.To this end, based on various proposals of the present invention, a wireless signal for transmission / reception At least some of various configuration information setting processes, various signal processing processes (eg, channel encoding / decoding, modulation / demodulation, resource mapping / demapping, etc.) and resource allocation processes may be performed.
도 26은 본 발명에 적용될 수 있는 무선 기기를 예시한다.26 illustrates a wireless device that can be applied to the present invention.
도 26을 참조하면, 제1 무선 기기(100)와 제2 무선 기기(200)는 다양한 무선 접속 기술(예, LTE, NR)을 통해 무선 신호를 송수신할 수 있다. 여기서, {제1 무선 기기(100), 제2 무선 기기(200)}은 도 25의 {무선 기기(100a~100f), 기지국(200)} 및/또는 {무선 기기(100a~100f), 무선 기기(100a~100f)}에 대응할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 26, the first wireless device 100 and the second wireless device 200 may transmit and receive wireless signals through various wireless access technologies (eg, LTE and NR). Here, the {first wireless device 100 and the second wireless device 200} may refer to the {wireless devices 100a to 100f, the base station 200} and / or the {wireless devices 100a to 100f, wireless of FIG. 25. Devices 100a to 100f}.
제1 무선 기기(100)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102) 및 하나 이상의 메모리(104)를 포함하며, 추가적으로 하나 이상의 송수신기(106) 및/또는 하나 이상의 안테나(108)을 더 포함할 수 있다. 프로세서(102)는 메모리(104) 및/또는 송수신기(106)를 제어하며, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들을 구현하도록 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 프로세서(102)는 메모리(104) 내의 정보를 처리하여 제1 정보/신호를 생성한 뒤, 송수신기(106)을 통해 제1 정보/신호를 포함하는 무선 신호를 전송할 수 있다. 또한, 프로세서(102)는 송수신기(106)를 통해 제2 정보/신호를 포함하는 무선 신호를 수신한 뒤, 제2 정보/신호의 신호 처리로부터 얻은 정보를 메모리(104)에 저장할 수 있다. 메모리(104)는 프로세서(102)와 연결될 수 있고, 프로세서(102)의 동작과 관련한 다양한 정보를 저장할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 메모리(104)는 프로세서(102)에 의해 제어되는 프로세스들 중 일부 또는 전부를 수행하거나, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들을 수행하기 위한 명령들을 포함하는 소프트웨어 코드를 저장할 수 있다. 여기서, 프로세서(102)와 메모리(104)는 무선 통신 기술(예, LTE, NR)을 구현하도록 설계된 통신 모뎀/회로/칩의 일부일 수 있다. 송수신기(106)는 프로세서(102)와 연결될 수 있고, 하나 이상의 안테나(108)를 통해 무선 신호를 송신 및/또는 수신할 수 있다. 송수신기(106)는 송신기 및/또는 수신기를 포함할 수 있다. 송수신기(106)는 RF(Radio Frequency) 유닛과 혼용될 수 있다. 본 발명에서 무선 기기는 통신 모뎀/회로/칩을 의미할 수도 있다.The first wireless device 100 includes one or more processors 102 and one or more memories 104, and may further include one or more transceivers 106 and / or one or more antennas 108. The processor 102 controls the memory 104 and / or the transceiver 106 and may be configured to implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein. For example, the processor 102 may process the information in the memory 104 to generate the first information / signal, and then transmit the wireless signal including the first information / signal through the transceiver 106. In addition, the processor 102 may receive the radio signal including the second information / signal through the transceiver 106 and store the information obtained from the signal processing of the second information / signal in the memory 104. The memory 104 may be coupled to the processor 102 and may store various information related to the operation of the processor 102. For example, the memory 104 may perform instructions to perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor 102 or to perform descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein. Can store software code that includes them. Here, processor 102 and memory 104 may be part of a communication modem / circuit / chip designed to implement wireless communication technology (eg, LTE, NR). The transceiver 106 may be coupled to the processor 102 and may transmit and / or receive wireless signals via one or more antennas 108. The transceiver 106 may include a transmitter and / or a receiver. The transceiver 106 may be mixed with a radio frequency (RF) unit. In the present invention, a wireless device may mean a communication modem / circuit / chip.
제2 무선 기기(200)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(202), 하나 이상의 메모리(204)를 포함하며, 추가적으로 하나 이상의 송수신기(206) 및/또는 하나 이상의 안테나(208)를 더 포함할 수 있다. 프로세서(202)는 메모리(204) 및/또는 송수신기(206)를 제어하며, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들을 구현하도록 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 프로세서(202)는 메모리(204) 내의 정보를 처리하여 제3 정보/신호를 생성한 뒤, 송수신기(206)를 통해 제3 정보/신호를 포함하는 무선 신호를 전송할 수 있다. 또한, 프로세서(202)는 송수신기(206)를 통해 제4 정보/신호를 포함하는 무선 신호를 수신한 뒤, 제4 정보/신호의 신호 처리로부터 얻은 정보를 메모리(204)에 저장할 수 있다. 메모리(204)는 프로세서(202)와 연결될 수 있고, 프로세서(202)의 동작과 관련한 다양한 정보를 저장할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 메모리(204)는 프로세서(202)에 의해 제어되는 프로세스들 중 일부 또는 전부를 수행하거나, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들을 수행하기 위한 명령들을 포함하는 소프트웨어 코드를 저장할 수 있다. 여기서, 프로세서(202)와 메모리(204)는 무선 통신 기술(예, LTE, NR)을 구현하도록 설계된 통신 모뎀/회로/칩의 일부일 수 있다. 송수신기(206)는 프로세서(202)와 연결될 수 있고, 하나 이상의 안테나(208)를 통해 무선 신호를 송신 및/또는 수신할 수 있다. 송수신기(206)는 송신기 및/또는 수신기를 포함할 수 있다 송수신기(206)는 RF 유닛과 혼용될 수 있다. 본 발명에서 무선 기기는 통신 모뎀/회로/칩을 의미할 수도 있다.The second wireless device 200 may include one or more processors 202, one or more memories 204, and may further include one or more transceivers 206 and / or one or more antennas 208. The processor 202 controls the memory 204 and / or the transceiver 206 and may be configured to implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein. For example, the processor 202 may process the information in the memory 204 to generate third information / signal, and then transmit the wireless signal including the third information / signal through the transceiver 206. In addition, the processor 202 may receive the radio signal including the fourth information / signal through the transceiver 206 and then store information obtained from the signal processing of the fourth information / signal in the memory 204. The memory 204 may be connected to the processor 202 and store various information related to the operation of the processor 202. For example, the memory 204 may perform instructions to perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor 202 or to perform descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein. Can store software code that includes them. Here, processor 202 and memory 204 may be part of a communication modem / circuit / chip designed to implement wireless communication technology (eg, LTE, NR). The transceiver 206 may be coupled with the processor 202 and may transmit and / or receive wireless signals via one or more antennas 208. The transceiver 206 may include a transmitter and / or a receiver. The transceiver 206 may be mixed with an RF unit. In the present invention, a wireless device may mean a communication modem / circuit / chip.
이하, 무선 기기(100, 200)의 하드웨어 요소에 대해 보다 구체적으로 설명한다. 이로 제한되는 것은 아니지만, 하나 이상의 프로토콜 계층이 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)에 의해 구현될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하나 이상의 계층(예, PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, SDAP와 같은 기능적 계층)을 구현할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들에 따라 하나 이상의 PDU(Protocol Data Unit) 및/또는 하나 이상의 SDU(Service Data Unit)를 생성할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들에 따라 메시지, 제어정보, 데이터 또는 정보를 생성할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 본 문서에 개시된 기능, 절차, 제안 및/또는 방법에 따라 PDU, SDU, 메시지, 제어정보, 데이터 또는 정보를 포함하는 신호(예, 베이스밴드 신호)를 생성하여, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)에게 제공할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)로부터 신호(예, 베이스밴드 신호)를 수신할 수 있고, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들에 따라 PDU, SDU, 메시지, 제어정보, 데이터 또는 정보를 획득할 수 있다.Hereinafter, hardware elements of the wireless devices 100 and 200 will be described in more detail. One or more protocol layers may be implemented by one or more processors 102, 202, although not limited thereto. For example, one or more processors 102 and 202 may implement one or more layers (eg, functional layers such as PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, SDAP). One or more processors 102, 202 may employ one or more Protocol Data Units (PDUs) and / or one or more Service Data Units (SDUs) in accordance with the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein. Can be generated. One or more processors 102, 202 may generate messages, control information, data, or information in accordance with the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein. One or more processors 102, 202 may generate signals (eg, baseband signals) including PDUs, SDUs, messages, control information, data or information in accordance with the functions, procedures, suggestions and / or methods disclosed herein. And one or more transceivers 106 and 206. One or more processors 102, 202 may receive signals (eg, baseband signals) from one or more transceivers 106, 206, and include descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein. In accordance with the above, a PDU, an SDU, a message, control information, data, or information can be obtained.
하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 컨트롤러, 마이크로 컨트롤러, 마이크로 프로세서 또는 마이크로 컴퓨터로 지칭될 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하드웨어, 펌웨어, 소프트웨어, 또는 이들의 조합에 의해 구현될 수 있다. 일 예로, 하나 이상의 ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuit), 하나 이상의 DSP(Digital Signal Processor), 하나 이상의 DSPD(Digital Signal Processing Device), 하나 이상의 PLD(Programmable Logic Device) 또는 하나 이상의 FPGA(Field Programmable Gate Arrays)가 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)에 포함될 수 있다. 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들은 펌웨어 또는 소프트웨어를 사용하여 구현될 수 있고, 펌웨어 또는 소프트웨어는 모듈, 절차, 기능 등을 포함하도록 구현될 수 있다. 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들은 수행하도록 설정된 펌웨어 또는 소프트웨어는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)에 포함되거나, 하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)에 저장되어 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)에 의해 구동될 수 있다. 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들은 코드, 명령어(instruction) 및/또는 명령어의 집합 형태로 펌웨어 또는 소프트웨어를 사용하여 구현될 수 있다. One or more processors 102, 202 may be referred to as a controller, microcontroller, microprocessor, or microcomputer. One or more processors 102, 202 may be implemented by hardware, firmware, software, or a combination thereof. For example, one or more Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), one or more Digital Signal Processors (DSPs), one or more Digital Signal Processing Devices (DSPDs), one or more Programmable Logic Devices (PLDs), or one or more Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs) May be included in one or more processors 102, 202. The descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein may be implemented using firmware or software, and the firmware or software may be implemented to include modules, procedures, functions, and the like. The descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein may be included in one or more processors (102, 202) or stored in one or more memories (104, 204) of It may be driven by the above-described processor (102, 202). The descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein may be implemented using firmware or software in the form of code, instructions, and / or a set of instructions.
하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)와 연결될 수 있고, 다양한 형태의 데이터, 신호, 메시지, 정보, 프로그램, 코드, 지시 및/또는 명령을 저장할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)는 ROM, RAM, EPROM, 플래시 메모리, 하드 드라이브, 레지스터, 캐쉬 메모리, 컴퓨터 판독 저장 매체 및/또는 이들의 조합으로 구성될 수 있다. 하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)의 내부 및/또는 외부에 위치할 수 있다. 또한, 하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)는 유선 또는 무선 연결과 같은 다양한 기술을 통해 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)와 연결될 수 있다.One or more memories 104, 204 may be coupled to one or more processors 102, 202 and may store various forms of data, signals, messages, information, programs, codes, instructions, and / or instructions. One or more memories 104, 204 may be comprised of ROM, RAM, EPROM, flash memory, hard drive, registers, cache memory, computer readable storage medium, and / or combinations thereof. One or more memories 104, 204 may be located inside and / or outside one or more processors 102, 202. In addition, one or more memories 104, 204 may be coupled with one or more processors 102, 202 through various techniques, such as a wired or wireless connection.
하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 다른 장치에게 본 문서의 방법들 및/또는 동작 순서도 등에서 언급되는 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 전송할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 다른 장치로부터 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도 등에서 언급되는 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)와 연결될 수 있고, 무선 신호를 송수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)가 하나 이상의 다른 장치에게 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보 또는 무선 신호를 전송하도록 제어할 수 있다. 또한, 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)가 하나 이상의 다른 장치로부터 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보 또는 무선 신호를 수신하도록 제어할 수 있다. 또한, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 안테나(108, 208)와 연결될 수 있고, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 안테나(108, 208)를 통해 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도 등에서 언급되는 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 송수신하도록 설정될 수 있다. 본 문서에서, 하나 이상의 안테나는 복수의 물리 안테나이거나, 복수의 논리 안테나(예, 안테나 포트)일 수 있다. 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 수신된 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)를 이용하여 처리하기 위해, 수신된 무선 신호/채널 등을 RF 밴드 신호에서 베이스밴드 신호로 변환(Convert)할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)를 이용하여 처리된 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 베이스밴드 신호에서 RF 밴드 신호로 변환할 수 있다. 이를 위하여, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 (아날로그) 오실레이터 및/또는 필터를 포함할 수 있다.One or more transceivers 106 and 206 may transmit user data, control information, wireless signals / channels, etc., as mentioned in the methods and / or operational flowcharts of this document, to one or more other devices. One or more transceivers 106 and 206 may receive, from one or more other devices, user data, control information, wireless signals / channels, etc., as mentioned in the description, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and / or operational flowcharts disclosed herein. have. For example, one or more transceivers 106 and 206 may be coupled with one or more processors 102 and 202 and may transmit and receive wireless signals. For example, one or more processors 102 and 202 may control one or more transceivers 106 and 206 to transmit user data, control information or wireless signals to one or more other devices. In addition, one or more processors 102 and 202 may control one or more transceivers 106 and 206 to receive user data, control information or wireless signals from one or more other devices. In addition, one or more transceivers 106, 206 may be coupled with one or more antennas 108, 208, and one or more transceivers 106, 206 may be connected to one or more antennas 108, 208 through the description, functions, and features disclosed herein. Can be set to transmit and receive user data, control information, wireless signals / channels, etc., which are mentioned in the procedures, procedures, suggestions, methods and / or operational flowcharts, and the like. In this document, one or more antennas may be a plurality of physical antennas or a plurality of logical antennas (eg, antenna ports). One or more transceivers 106, 206 may process the received wireless signal / channel or the like in an RF band signal to process received user data, control information, wireless signals / channels, etc. using one or more processors 102,202. The baseband signal can be converted. One or more transceivers 106 and 206 may use the one or more processors 102 and 202 to convert processed user data, control information, wireless signals / channels, etc. from baseband signals to RF band signals. To this end, one or more transceivers 106 and 206 may include (analog) oscillators and / or filters.
도 27은 본 발명에 적용되는 무선 기기의 다른 예를 나타낸다. 무선 기기는 사용-예/서비스에 따라 다양한 형태로 구현될 수 있다(도 25 참조).27 shows another example of a wireless device to which the present invention is applied. The wireless device may be implemented in various forms depending on the use-example / service (see FIG. 25).
도 27을 참조하면, 무선 기기(100, 200)는 도 26의 무선 기기(100,200)에 대응하며, 다양한 요소(element), 성분(component), 유닛/부(unit), 및/또는 모듈(module)로 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 무선 기기(100, 200)는 통신부(110), 제어부(120), 메모리부(130) 및 추가 요소(140)를 포함할 수 있다. 통신부는 통신 회로(112) 및 송수신기(들)(114)을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 통신 회로(112)는 도 26의 하나 이상의 프로세서(102,202) 및/또는 하나 이상의 메모리(104,204) 를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 송수신기(들)(114)는 도 26의 하나 이상의 송수신기(106,206) 및/또는 하나 이상의 안테나(108,208)을 포함할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 통신부(110), 메모리부(130) 및 추가 요소(140)와 전기적으로 연결되며 무선 기기의 제반 동작을 제어한다. 예를 들어, 제어부(120)는 메모리부(130)에 저장된 프로그램/코드/명령/정보에 기반하여 무선 기기의 전기적/기계적 동작을 제어할 수 있다. 또한, 제어부(120)는 메모리부(130)에 저장된 정보를 통신부(110)을 통해 외부(예, 다른 통신 기기)로 무선/유선 인터페이스를 통해 전송하거나, 통신부(110)를 통해 외부(예, 다른 통신 기기)로부터 무선/유선 인터페이스를 통해 수신된 정보를 메모리부(130)에 저장할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 27, the wireless devices 100 and 200 correspond to the wireless devices 100 and 200 of FIG. 26, and various elements, components, units / units, and / or modules It can be composed of). For example, the wireless device 100, 200 may include a communication unit 110, a control unit 120, a memory unit 130, and additional elements 140. The communication unit may include communication circuitry 112 and transceiver (s) 114. For example, communication circuitry 112 may include one or more processors 102, 202 and / or one or more memories 104, 204 of FIG. 26. For example, the transceiver (s) 114 may include one or more transceivers 106, 206 and / or one or more antennas 108, 208 of FIG. 26. The controller 120 is electrically connected to the communication unit 110, the memory unit 130, and the additional element 140, and controls various operations of the wireless device. For example, the controller 120 may control the electrical / mechanical operation of the wireless device based on the program / code / command / information stored in the memory unit 130. In addition, the control unit 120 transmits the information stored in the memory unit 130 to the outside (eg, other communication devices) through the communication unit 110 through a wireless / wired interface, or externally (eg, through the communication unit 110). Information received through a wireless / wired interface from another communication device) may be stored in the memory unit 130.
추가 요소(140)는 무선 기기의 종류에 따라 다양하게 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 추가 요소(140)는 파워 유닛/배터리, 입출력부(I/O unit), 구동부 및 컴퓨팅부 중 적어도 하나를 포함할 수 있다. 이로 제한되는 것은 아니지만, 무선 기기는 로봇(도 25, 100a), 차량(도 25, 100b-1, 100b-2), XR 기기(도 25, 100c), 휴대 기기(도 25, 100d), 가전(도 25, 100e), IoT 기기(도 25, 100f), 디지털 방송용 단말, 홀로그램 장치, 공공 안전 장치, MTC 장치, 의료 장치, 핀테크 장치(또는 금융 장치), 보안 장치, 기후/환경 장치, AI 서버/기기(도 25, 400), 기지국(도 25, 200), 네트워크 노드 등의 형태로 구현될 수 있다. 무선 기기는 사용-예/서비스에 따라 이동 가능하거나 고정된 장소에서 사용될 수 있다.The additional element 140 may be configured in various ways depending on the type of wireless device. For example, the additional element 140 may include at least one of a power unit / battery, an I / O unit, a driver, and a computing unit. Although not limited thereto, the wireless device may be a robot (FIGS. 25, 100 a), a vehicle (FIGS. 25, 100 b-1, 100 b-2), an XR device (FIGS. 25, 100 c), a portable device (FIGS. 25, 100 d), a home appliance. (FIG. 25, 100e), IoT device (FIG. 25, 100f), terminal for digital broadcasting, hologram device, public safety device, MTC device, medical device, fintech device (or financial device), security device, climate / environment device, The server may be implemented in the form of an AI server / device (FIGS. 25 and 400), a base station (FIGS. 25 and 200), a network node, or the like. The wireless device may be used in a mobile or fixed location depending on the usage-example / service.
도 27에서 무선 기기(100, 200) 내의 다양한 요소, 성분, 유닛/부, 및/또는 모듈은 전체가 유선 인터페이스를 통해 상호 연결되거나, 적어도 일부가 통신부(110)를 통해 무선으로 연결될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 무선 기기(100, 200) 내에서 제어부(120)와 통신부(110)는 유선으로 연결되며, 제어부(120)와 제1 유닛(예, 130, 140)은 통신부(110)를 통해 무선으로 연결될 수 있다. 또한, 무선 기기(100, 200) 내의 각 요소, 성분, 유닛/부, 및/또는 모듈은 하나 이상의 요소를 더 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제어부(120)는 하나 이상의 프로세서 집합으로 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제어부(120)는 통신 제어 프로세서, 어플리케이션 프로세서(Application processor), ECU(Electronic Control Unit), 그래픽 처리 프로세서, 메모리 제어 프로세서 등의 집합으로 구성될 수 있다. 다른 예로, 메모리부(130)는 RAM(Random Access Memory), DRAM(Dynamic RAM), ROM(Read Only Memory), 플래시 메모리(flash memory), 휘발성 메모리(volatile memory), 비-휘발성 메모리(non-volatile memory) 및/또는 이들의 조합으로 구성될 수 있다.In FIG. 27, various elements, components, units / units, and / or modules in the wireless devices 100 and 200 may be entirely interconnected through a wired interface, or at least a part of them may be wirelessly connected through the communication unit 110. For example, the control unit 120 and the communication unit 110 are connected by wire in the wireless device 100 or 200, and the control unit 120 and the first unit (eg, 130 and 140) are connected through the communication unit 110. It can be connected wirelessly. In addition, each element, component, unit / unit, and / or module in wireless device 100, 200 may further include one or more elements. For example, the controller 120 may be composed of one or more processor sets. For example, the controller 120 may be configured as a set of a communication control processor, an application processor, an electronic control unit (ECU), a graphics processing processor, a memory control processor, and the like. As another example, the memory unit 130 may include random access memory (RAM), dynamic RAM (DRAM), read only memory (ROM), flash memory, volatile memory, and non-volatile memory. volatile memory) and / or combinations thereof.
이하, 도 27의 구현 예에 대해 도면을 참조하여 보다 자세히 설명한다.Hereinafter, the implementation example of FIG. 27 will be described in more detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
도 28은 본 발명에 적용되는 휴대 기기를 예시한다. 휴대 기기는 스마트폰, 스마트패드, 웨어러블 기기(예, 스마트워치, 스마트글래스), 휴대용 컴퓨터(예, 노트북 등)을 포함할 수 있다. 휴대 기기는 MS(Mobile Station), UT(user terminal), MSS(Mobile Subscriber Station), SS(Subscriber Station), AMS(Advanced Mobile Station) 또는 WT(Wireless terminal)로 지칭될 수 있다.28 illustrates a portable device applied to the present invention. The mobile device may include a smart phone, a smart pad, a wearable device (eg, smart watch, smart glasses), a portable computer (eg, a notebook, etc.). The mobile device may be referred to as a mobile station (MS), a user terminal (UT), a mobile subscriber station (MSS), a subscriber station (SS), an advanced mobile station (AMS), or a wireless terminal (WT).
도 28을 참조하면, 휴대 기기(100)는 안테나부(108), 통신부(110), 제어부(120), 메모리부(130), 전원공급부(140a), 인터페이스부(140b) 및 입출력부(140c)를 포함할 수 있다. 안테나부(108)는 통신부(110)의 일부로 구성될 수 있다. 블록 110~130/140a~140c는 각각 도 27의 블록 110~130/140에 대응한다.Referring to FIG. 28, the portable device 100 includes an antenna unit 108, a communication unit 110, a control unit 120, a memory unit 130, a power supply unit 140a, an interface unit 140b, and an input / output unit 140c. ) May be included. The antenna unit 108 may be configured as part of the communication unit 110. Blocks 110 to 130 / 140a to 140c correspond to blocks 110 to 130/140 of FIG. 27, respectively.
통신부(110)는 다른 무선 기기, 기지국들과 신호(예, 데이터, 제어 신호 등)를 송수신할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 휴대 기기(100)의 구성 요소들을 제어하여 다양한 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 AP(Application Processor)를 포함할 수 있다. 메모리부(130)는 휴대 기기(100)의 구동에 필요한 데이터/파라미터/프로그램/코드/명령을 저장할 수 있다. 또한, 메모리부(130)는 입/출력되는 데이터/정보 등을 저장할 수 있다. 전원공급부(140a)는 휴대 기기(100)에게 전원을 공급하며, 유/무선 충전 회로, 배터리 등을 포함할 수 있다. 인터페이스부(140b)는 휴대 기기(100)와 다른 외부 기기의 연결을 지원할 수 있다. 인터페이스부(140b)는 외부 기기와의 연결을 위한 다양한 포트(예, 오디오 입/출력 포트, 비디오 입/출력 포트)를 포함할 수 있다. 입출력부(140c)는 영상 정보/신호, 오디오 정보/신호, 데이터, 및/또는 사용자로부터 입력되는 정보를 입력 받거나 출력할 수 있다. 입출력부(140c)는 카메라, 마이크로폰, 사용자 입력부, 디스플레이부(140d), 스피커 및/또는 햅틱 모듈 등을 포함할 수 있다.The communication unit 110 may transmit and receive signals (eg, data, control signals, etc.) with other wireless devices and base stations. The controller 120 may control various components of the mobile device 100 to perform various operations. The control unit 120 may include an application processor (AP). The memory unit 130 may store data / parameters / programs / codes / commands necessary for driving the portable device 100. In addition, the memory unit 130 may store input / output data / information and the like. The power supply unit 140a supplies power to the portable device 100 and may include a wired / wireless charging circuit, a battery, and the like. The interface unit 140b may support the connection of the mobile device 100 to another external device. The interface unit 140b may include various ports (eg, audio input / output port and video input / output port) for connecting to an external device. The input / output unit 140c may receive or output image information / signal, audio information / signal, data, and / or information input from a user. The input / output unit 140c may include a camera, a microphone, a user input unit, a display unit 140d, a speaker, and / or a haptic module.
일 예로, 데이터 통신의 경우, 입출력부(140c)는 사용자로부터 입력된 정보/신호(예, 터치, 문자, 음성, 이미지, 비디오)를 획득하며, 획득된 정보/신호는 메모리부(130)에 저장될 수 있다. 통신부(110)는 메모리에 저장된 정보/신호를 무선 신호로 변환하고, 변환된 무선 신호를 다른 무선 기기에게 직접 전송하거나 기지국에게 전송할 수 있다. 또한, 통신부(110)는 다른 무선 기기 또는 기지국으로부터 무선 신호를 수신한 뒤, 수신된 무선 신호를 원래의 정보/신호로 복원할 수 있다. 복원된 정보/신호는 메모리부(130)에 저장된 뒤, 입출력부(140c)를 통해 다양한 형태(예, 문자, 음성, 이미지, 비디오, 헵틱)로 출력될 수 있다. For example, in the case of data communication, the input / output unit 140c obtains information / signals (eg, touch, text, voice, image, and video) input from the user, and the obtained information / signal is stored in the memory unit 130. Can be stored. The communication unit 110 may convert the information / signal stored in the memory into a wireless signal, and directly transmit the converted wireless signal to another wireless device or to the base station. In addition, the communication unit 110 may receive a radio signal from another wireless device or a base station, and then restore the received radio signal to original information / signal. The restored information / signal may be stored in the memory unit 130 and then output in various forms (eg, text, voice, image, video, heptic) through the input / output unit 140c.
도 29는 본 발명에 적용되는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량을 예시한다. 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량은 이동형 로봇, 차량, 기차, 유/무인 비행체(Aerial Vehicle, AV), 선박 등으로 구현될 수 있다.29 illustrates a vehicle or an autonomous vehicle applied to the present invention. The vehicle or autonomous vehicle may be implemented as a mobile robot, a vehicle, a train, an aerial vehicle (AV), a ship, or the like.
도 29를 참조하면, 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)은 안테나부(108), 통신부(110), 제어부(120), 구동부(140a), 전원공급부(140b), 센서부(140c) 및 자율 주행부(140d)를 포함할 수 있다. 안테나부(108)는 통신부(110)의 일부로 구성될 수 있다. 블록 110/130/140a~140d는 각각 도 27의 블록 110/130/140에 대응한다.Referring to FIG. 29, the vehicle or the autonomous vehicle 100 includes an antenna unit 108, a communication unit 110, a control unit 120, a driving unit 140a, a power supply unit 140b, a sensor unit 140c, and autonomous driving. It may include a portion 140d. The antenna unit 108 may be configured as part of the communication unit 110. Blocks 110/130 / 140a through 140d respectively correspond to blocks 110/130/140 in FIG.
통신부(110)는 다른 차량, 기지국(예, 기지국, 노변 기지국(Road Side unit) 등), 서버 등의 외부 기기들과 신호(예, 데이터, 제어 신호 등)를 송수신할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)의 요소들을 제어하여 다양한 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 ECU(Electronic Control Unit)를 포함할 수 있다. 구동부(140a)는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)을 지상에서 주행하게 할 수 있다. 구동부(140a)는 엔진, 모터, 파워 트레인, 바퀴, 브레이크, 조향 장치 등을 포함할 수 있다. 전원공급부(140b)는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)에게 전원을 공급하며, 유/무선 충전 회로, 배터리 등을 포함할 수 있다. 센서부(140c)는 차량 상태, 주변 환경 정보, 사용자 정보 등을 얻을 수 있다. 센서부(140c)는 IMU(inertial measurement unit) 센서, 충돌 센서, 휠 센서(wheel sensor), 속도 센서, 경사 센서, 중량 감지 센서, 헤딩 센서(heading sensor), 포지션 모듈(position module), 차량 전진/후진 센서, 배터리 센서, 연료 센서, 타이어 센서, 스티어링 센서, 온도 센서, 습도 센서, 초음파 센서, 조도 센서, 페달 포지션 센서 등을 포함할 수 있다. 자율 주행부(140d)는 주행중인 차선을 유지하는 기술, 어댑티브 크루즈 컨트롤과 같이 속도를 자동으로 조절하는 기술, 정해진 경로를 따라 자동으로 주행하는 기술, 목적지가 설정되면 자동으로 경로를 설정하여 주행하는 기술 등을 구현할 수 있다.The communication unit 110 may transmit and receive signals (eg, data, control signals, etc.) with other devices such as another vehicle, a base station (eg, a base station, a road side unit), a server, and the like. The controller 120 may control various elements of the vehicle or the autonomous vehicle 100 to perform various operations. The control unit 120 may include an electronic control unit (ECU). The driving unit 140a may cause the vehicle or the autonomous vehicle 100 to travel on the ground. The driver 140a may include an engine, a motor, a power train, wheels, a brake, a steering device, and the like. The power supply unit 140b supplies power to the vehicle or the autonomous vehicle 100, and may include a wired / wireless charging circuit, a battery, and the like. The sensor unit 140c may obtain vehicle status, surrounding environment information, user information, and the like. The sensor unit 140c includes an inertial measurement unit (IMU) sensor, a collision sensor, a wheel sensor, a speed sensor, an inclination sensor, a weight sensor, a heading sensor, a position module, a vehicle forward / Reverse sensors, battery sensors, fuel sensors, tire sensors, steering sensors, temperature sensors, humidity sensors, ultrasonic sensors, illuminance sensors, pedal position sensors, and the like. The autonomous driving unit 140d is a technology for maintaining a driving lane, a technology for automatically adjusting speed such as adaptive cruise control, a technology for automatically driving along a predetermined route, and automatically setting a route when a destination is set. Technology and the like.
일 예로, 통신부(110)는 외부 서버로부터 지도 데이터, 교통 정보 데이터 등을 수신할 수 있다. 자율 주행부(140d)는 획득된 데이터를 기반으로 자율 주행 경로와 드라이빙 플랜을 생성할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 드라이빙 플랜에 따라 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)이 자율 주행 경로를 따라 이동하도록 구동부(140a)를 제어할 수 있다(예, 속도/방향 조절). 자율 주행 도중에 통신부(110)는 외부 서버로부터 최신 교통 정보 데이터를 비/주기적으로 획득하며, 주변 차량으로부터 주변 교통 정보 데이터를 획득할 수 있다. 또한, 자율 주행 도중에 센서부(140c)는 차량 상태, 주변 환경 정보를 획득할 수 있다. 자율 주행부(140d)는 새로 획득된 데이터/정보에 기반하여 자율 주행 경로와 드라이빙 플랜을 갱신할 수 있다. 통신부(110)는 차량 위치, 자율 주행 경로, 드라이빙 플랜 등에 관한 정보를 외부 서버로 전달할 수 있다. 외부 서버는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량들로부터 수집된 정보에 기반하여, AI 기술 등을 이용하여 교통 정보 데이터를 미리 예측할 수 있고, 예측된 교통 정보 데이터를 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량들에게 제공할 수 있다.For example, the communication unit 110 may receive map data, traffic information data, and the like from an external server. The autonomous driving unit 140d may generate an autonomous driving route and a driving plan based on the obtained data. The controller 120 may control the driving unit 140a to move the vehicle or the autonomous vehicle 100 along the autonomous driving path according to the driving plan (eg, speed / direction adjustment). During autonomous driving, the communication unit 110 may acquire the latest traffic information data aperiodically from an external server and may obtain the surrounding traffic information data from the surrounding vehicles. In addition, during autonomous driving, the sensor unit 140c may acquire vehicle state and surrounding environment information. The autonomous driving unit 140d may update the autonomous driving route and the driving plan based on the newly obtained data / information. The communication unit 110 may transmit information regarding a vehicle location, an autonomous driving route, a driving plan, and the like to an external server. The external server may predict traffic information data in advance using AI technology or the like based on information collected from the vehicle or autonomous vehicles, and provide the predicted traffic information data to the vehicle or autonomous vehicles.
이상에서 설명된 실시 예들은 본 발명의 구성요소들과 특징들이 소정 형태로 결합된 것들이다. 각 구성요소 또는 특징은 별도의 명시적 언급이 없는 한 선택적인 것으로 고려되어야 한다. 각 구성요소 또는 특징은 다른 구성요소나 특징과 결합되지 않은 형태로 실시될 수 있다. 또한, 일부 구성요소들 및/또는 특징들을 결합하여 본 발명의 실시 예를 구성하는 것도 가능하다. 본 발명의 실시 예들에서 설명되는 동작들의 순서는 변경될 수 있다. 어느 실시예의 일부 구성이나 특징은 다른 실시 예에 포함될 수 있고, 또는 다른 실시예의 대응하는 구성 또는 특징과 교체될 수 있다. 특허청구범위에서 명시적인 인용 관계가 있지 않은 청구항들을 결합하여 실시 예를 구성하거나 출원 후의 보정에 의해 새로운 청구항으로 포함시킬 수 있음은 자명하다.The embodiments described above are the components and features of the present invention are combined in a predetermined form. Each component or feature is to be considered optional unless stated otherwise. Each component or feature may be embodied in a form that is not combined with other components or features. In addition, it is also possible to configure the embodiments of the present invention by combining some components and / or features. The order of the operations described in the embodiments of the present invention may be changed. Some components or features of one embodiment may be included in another embodiment or may be replaced with corresponding components or features of another embodiment. It is obvious that the claims may be combined to form an embodiment by combining claims that do not have an explicit citation in the claims, or may be incorporated into new claims by post-application correction.
본 발명은 3GPP LTE/LTE-A 시스템/5G 시스템(또는 NR(New RAT) 시스템) 뿐만 아니라 다양한 무선 통신 시스템에서 동작하는 단말, 기지국 등과 같은 무선 통신 장치에 적용될 수 있다.The present invention can be applied not only to 3GPP LTE / LTE-A system / 5G system (or NR (New RAT) system) but also to wireless communication devices such as terminals, base stations, etc. that operate in various wireless communication systems.

Claims (14)

  1. RRC(radio resource control) 연결 모드(connected mode)에서 제1 시스템에서 동작하도록 구성된 사용자 기기(user equipment, UE)가 신호를 수신하는 방법에 있어서,A method for receiving a signal by a user equipment (UE) configured to operate in a first system in a radio resource control (RRC) connected mode,
    기지국으로부터 제2 시스템의 특정 채널을 위한 설정 정보를 수신하는 단계;Receiving configuration information for a specific channel of a second system from a base station;
    RRC 유휴 모드(idle mode)에서 상기 설정 정보에 기반하여 상기 제2 시스템에서 상기 특정 채널을 수신하는 단계; 및Receiving the specific channel in the second system based on the configuration information in an RRC idle mode; And
    상기 수신된 특정 채널에 대한 응답으로 상기 제1 시스템 또는 상기 제2 시스템에서 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하는 단계를 포함하는, 방법.Performing a random access procedure in the first system or the second system in response to the received particular channel.
  2. 청구항 1에 있어서,The method according to claim 1,
    상기 제2 시스템의 특정 채널을 위한 설정 정보는 상기 제1 시스템에서 수신되는, 방법.Setting information for a particular channel of the second system is received at the first system.
  3. 청구항 1에 있어서,The method according to claim 1,
    상기 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하는 단계는,Performing the random access procedure,
    상기 특정 채널을 통해 수신된 정보에 기반하여 상기 제1 시스템과 상기 제2 시스템 중에서 상기 특정 채널의 검출 후에 동작할 시스템을 결정하는 것과,Determining a system to operate after detection of the specific channel among the first system and the second system based on the information received through the specific channel;
    상기 결정된 시스템에서 상기 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하는 것을 포함하는, 방법.Performing the random access procedure in the determined system.
  4. 청구항 1에 있어서,The method according to claim 1,
    상기 특정 채널의 검출 후에 동작할 시스템을 지시하는 정보를 상기 제1 시스템에서 수신하는 단계를 더 포함하되,Receiving information in the first system indicating the system to operate after detection of the particular channel;
    상기 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하는 단계는,Performing the random access procedure,
    상기 지시된 시스템에서 상기 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하는 것을 포함하는, 방법.Performing the random access procedure in the indicated system.
  5. 청구항 1에 있어서,The method according to claim 1,
    상기 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하는 단계는,Performing the random access procedure,
    상기 특정 채널의 검출 후에 동작할 시스템을 결정하는 것과,Determining a system to operate after detection of the particular channel;
    상기 결정된 시스템에 대한 요청을 상기 기지국으로 전송하는 것과,Sending a request for the determined system to the base station;
    상기 요청에 대한 수락을 상기 기지국으로부터 수신하는 것을 포함하는, 방법.Receiving an acceptance of the request from the base station.
  6. 청구항 5에 있어서,The method according to claim 5,
    상기 결정된 시스템에서 동작하기 위해 필요한 정보를 상기 기지국으로부터 수신하는 것을 더 포함하는, 방법.Receiving from the base station information needed to operate in the determined system.
  7. 청구항 5에 있어서,The method according to claim 5,
    상기 요청은 랜덤 접속 프리앰블을 통해 전송되는, 방법.Wherein the request is sent on a random access preamble.
  8. 청구항 5에 있어서,The method according to claim 5,
    상기 요청은 랜덤 접속 응답(random access response)에 대한 상향링크 전송을 통해 전송되는, 방법.Wherein the request is sent via uplink transmission for a random access response.
  9. 청구항 1에 있어서,The method according to claim 1,
    상기 특정 채널은 페이징 채널인, 방법.And the particular channel is a paging channel.
  10. 청구항 1에 있어서,The method according to claim 1,
    상기 제2 시스템은 커버리지 확장(coverage extension 또는 coverage enhancement)을 위한 반복 전송을 지원하도록 설정된 시스템이고,The second system is a system configured to support repetitive transmission for coverage extension or coverage enhancement,
    상기 제1 시스템은 커버리지 확장을 위한 반복 전송을 지원하도록 설정되지 않은 시스템인, 방법.The first system is a system that is not configured to support repetitive transmission for coverage extension.
  11. 청구항 1에 있어서,The method according to claim 1,
    상기 제2 시스템은 협대역(narrowband)에서 동작하도록 설정된 시스템이고,The second system is a system configured to operate in a narrowband,
    상기 제1 시스템은 광대역(wideband)에서 동작하도록 설정된 시스템인, 방법.And the first system is a system configured to operate over wideband.
  12. 청구항 1에 있어서,The method according to claim 1,
    상기 제2 시스템의 특정 채널을 위한 설정 정보는 상기 제1 시스템에서 RRC 연결 해제(connection release) 시에 수신되는, 방법.Configuration information for a particular channel of the second system is received upon RRC connection release in the first system.
  13. RRC(radio resource control) 연결 모드(connected mode)에서 제1 시스템에서 동작하도록 구성된 사용자 기기(user equipment, UE)에 있어서,In a user equipment (UE) configured to operate in a first system in a radio resource control (RRC) connected mode,
    RF(Radio Frequency) 송수신기(transceiver); 및A radio frequency (RF) transceiver; And
    상기 RF 송수신기와 동작시(operatively) 연결되는 프로세서를 포함하되, 상기 프로세서는 상기 RF 송수신기를 제어하여And a processor that is operatively connected with the RF transceiver, wherein the processor controls the RF transceiver
    기지국으로부터 제2 시스템의 특정 채널을 위한 설정 정보를 수신하고,Receiving configuration information for a specific channel of a second system from a base station,
    RRC 유휴 모드(idle mode)에서 상기 설정 정보에 기반하여 상기 제2 시스템에서 상기 특정 채널을 수신하고, Receiving the specific channel in the second system based on the configuration information in an RRC idle mode,
    상기 수신된 특정 채널에 대한 응답으로 상기 제1 시스템 또는 상기 제2 시스템에서 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하도록 구성되는, 사용자 기기.And perform a random access procedure in the first system or the second system in response to the received particular channel.
  14. RRC(radio resource control) 연결 모드(connected mode)에서 제1 시스템에서 동작하도록 구성된 사용자 기기(user equipment, UE)를 위한 장치에 있어서,An apparatus for a user equipment (UE) configured to operate in a first system in a radio resource control (RRC) connected mode, the apparatus comprising:
    실행가능한 코드를 포함하는 메모리; 및A memory containing executable code; And
    상기 메모리에 동작시 연결되는 프로세서를 포함하되,Including a processor connected to the memory when the operation,
    상기 프로세서는 상기 실행가능한 코드를 실행하여 특정 동작들을 수행하도록 구성되며, 상기 특정 동작들은,The processor is configured to execute the executable code to perform specific operations, wherein the specific operations are:
    기지국으로부터 제2 시스템의 특정 채널을 위한 설정 정보를 수신하는 것과,Receiving configuration information for a specific channel of the second system from the base station;
    RRC 유휴 모드(idle mode)에서 상기 설정 정보에 기반하여 상기 제2 시스템에서 상기 특정 채널을 수신하는 것과,Receiving the specific channel in the second system based on the configuration information in an RRC idle mode;
    상기 수신된 특정 채널에 대한 응답으로 상기 제1 시스템 또는 상기 제2 시스템에서 랜덤 접속 절차를 수행하는 것을 포함하는, 장치.And performing a random access procedure in the first system or the second system in response to the received particular channel.
PCT/KR2019/010004 2018-08-09 2019-08-08 Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor WO2020032643A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR10-2018-0093396 2018-08-09
KR20180093396 2018-08-09
KR20180114505 2018-09-21
KR10-2018-0114505 2018-09-21
US201862755353P 2018-11-02 2018-11-02
US62/755,353 2018-11-02

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020032643A1 true WO2020032643A1 (en) 2020-02-13

Family

ID=69415056

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/KR2019/010004 WO2020032643A1 (en) 2018-08-09 2019-08-08 Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2020032643A1 (en)

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112839338A (en) * 2021-02-09 2021-05-25 河南垂天科技有限公司 Fair power distribution method in shared cognitive cooperation NOMA network
CN113890694A (en) * 2020-07-02 2022-01-04 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 Method and apparatus in a node used for wireless communication
WO2022018235A1 (en) * 2020-07-24 2022-01-27 Sony Group Corporation Methods, communications devices and infrastructure equipment
CN114070676A (en) * 2020-08-05 2022-02-18 展讯半导体(南京)有限公司 Method and device for reporting and receiving AI network model support capability, storage medium, user equipment and base station
WO2022217459A1 (en) * 2021-04-13 2022-10-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Symbol puncturing during a random access channel (rach) procedure
EP4280780A4 (en) * 2021-01-12 2024-01-03 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Access resource determination method, access resource determination apparatus and storage medium
EP4340484A4 (en) * 2021-05-10 2024-06-12 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Resource configuration method and apparatus, communication device, and storage medium
RU2826612C2 (en) * 2021-05-10 2024-09-13 Бейдзин Сяоми Мобайл Софтвэр Ко., Лтд. Method and device for configuring resources, communication device and data medium

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20140018786A (en) * 2012-08-03 2014-02-13 주식회사 케이티 Methods and apparatuses for power control of random access
WO2014098505A1 (en) * 2012-12-19 2014-06-26 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for communicating in wireless communication system supporting multiple access network and apparatus supporting same
WO2014098535A1 (en) * 2012-12-20 2014-06-26 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for communicating in wireless communication system and apparatus supporting same
US20170317798A1 (en) * 2014-11-06 2017-11-02 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for transmitting data in unlicensed band-secondary carrier and device for same
KR20180036538A (en) * 2016-09-30 2018-04-09 한국전자통신연구원 Method for controlling access based on common resource in communication system and apparatus for the same

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20140018786A (en) * 2012-08-03 2014-02-13 주식회사 케이티 Methods and apparatuses for power control of random access
WO2014098505A1 (en) * 2012-12-19 2014-06-26 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for communicating in wireless communication system supporting multiple access network and apparatus supporting same
WO2014098535A1 (en) * 2012-12-20 2014-06-26 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for communicating in wireless communication system and apparatus supporting same
US20170317798A1 (en) * 2014-11-06 2017-11-02 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for transmitting data in unlicensed band-secondary carrier and device for same
KR20180036538A (en) * 2016-09-30 2018-04-09 한국전자통신연구원 Method for controlling access based on common resource in communication system and apparatus for the same

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113890694A (en) * 2020-07-02 2022-01-04 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 Method and apparatus in a node used for wireless communication
WO2022018235A1 (en) * 2020-07-24 2022-01-27 Sony Group Corporation Methods, communications devices and infrastructure equipment
CN114070676A (en) * 2020-08-05 2022-02-18 展讯半导体(南京)有限公司 Method and device for reporting and receiving AI network model support capability, storage medium, user equipment and base station
CN114070676B (en) * 2020-08-05 2023-03-14 展讯半导体(南京)有限公司 Method and device for reporting and receiving AI network model support capability and storage medium
EP4280780A4 (en) * 2021-01-12 2024-01-03 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Access resource determination method, access resource determination apparatus and storage medium
CN112839338A (en) * 2021-02-09 2021-05-25 河南垂天科技有限公司 Fair power distribution method in shared cognitive cooperation NOMA network
CN112839338B (en) * 2021-02-09 2024-03-15 河南垂天科技有限公司 Fair power distribution method in shared cognitive cooperation NOMA network
WO2022217459A1 (en) * 2021-04-13 2022-10-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Symbol puncturing during a random access channel (rach) procedure
EP4340484A4 (en) * 2021-05-10 2024-06-12 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Resource configuration method and apparatus, communication device, and storage medium
RU2826612C2 (en) * 2021-05-10 2024-09-13 Бейдзин Сяоми Мобайл Софтвэр Ко., Лтд. Method and device for configuring resources, communication device and data medium

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020032740A1 (en) Method for transmitting/receiving signal in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2020032750A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving signals in wireless communication system and device therefor
WO2020032646A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting or receiving signal in wireless communication system
WO2020204322A1 (en) Method for performing beam management by terminal in wireless communication system, and terminal and base station supporting same
WO2020032643A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
WO2020032726A1 (en) Method and device for communication device to sense or transmit wus signal in wireless communication system
WO2020184836A1 (en) Method for transmitting beam information by user equipment in wireless communication system, and user equipment and base station supporting same
WO2020032748A1 (en) Method for transmitting/receiving signal in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2020032751A1 (en) Method for transmitting wus in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2020145784A1 (en) Channel access procedure by apparatus in unlicensed band
WO2021187967A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting and receiving sounding reference signal in wireless communication system
WO2020050682A1 (en) Operation method of terminal in wireless communication system and terminal supporting same
WO2020159189A1 (en) Method by which terminal reports state information in wireless communication system, and terminal and base station for supporting same
WO2020032756A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving signals in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2022154616A1 (en) Method and device for obtaining cbr value on basis of partial sensing in nr v2x
WO2021177782A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting or receiving signal on basis of space parameter in wireless communication system
WO2020166848A1 (en) Method for transmitting uplink feedback information related to beam of user equipment in wireless communication system, and user equipment and base station for supporting same
WO2020145575A1 (en) Method for reporting beam failure of terminal in wireless communication system, and terminal and base station for supporting same
WO2023287224A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving physical sidelink shared channel in wireless communication system, and device for same
WO2020184965A1 (en) Method for controlling plurality of antenna remote units in sidelink-supporting wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2020032717A1 (en) Method and apparatus for receiving signal in wireless communication system
WO2020091557A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system, and apparatus therefor
WO2023022576A1 (en) Method for transmitting/receiving inter-ue coordination information in wireless communication system and device therefor
WO2021230676A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving wireless signal in wireless communication system
WO2022220615A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting or receiving physical sidelink feedback channel in wireless communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19847062

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19847062

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1